The Project Gutenberg EBook of To Mars via The Moon, by Mark Wicks
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
Title: To Mars via The Moon
An Astronomical Story
Author: Mark Wicks
Release Date: December 27, 2008 [EBook #27633]
Language: English
*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TO MARS VIA THE MOON ***
Produced by Chris Curnow, Greg Bergquist and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
Transcriber's Note
The punctuation and spelling from the original text have been faithfully
preserved. Only obvious typographical errors have been corrected.
Plate XVI is missing from the scanned image files. The reference within
the Maps and Plates list has been preserved.
TO MARS _via_ THE MOON
[Illustration: _Drawn by M. Wicks_
VIEW FROM THE AIR-SHIP, OVER THE CANALS AND THE CITY OF SIRAPION
"What a splendid view we then had over the country all around us!...
Across the country, in line after line, were the canals which we had
been so anxious to see, extending as far as the eye could reach!"]
To Mars _via_ The Moon
_AN ASTRONOMICAL STORY_
BY
MARK WICKS
"_It is astronomy which will eventually be the chief educator and
emancipator of the human race._"--SIR EDWIN ARNOLD.
WITH ILLUSTRATIONS
LONDON
SEELEY AND CO. LIMITED
38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
1911
Printed by BALLANTYNE, HANSON & CO.
At the Ballantyne Press, Edinburgh
TO
PROFESSOR PERCIVAL LOWELL
A.B., LL.D.
_Director of the Observatory at Flagstaff, Arizona_
TO WHOSE CAREFUL AND PAINSTAKING RESEARCHES,
EXTENDING OVER MANY YEARS, THE WORLD OWES
SO MUCH OF ITS KNOWLEDGE OF
THE PLANET MARS,
THIS LITTLE BOOK IS RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED BY
ONE WHO HAS DERIVED INFINITE PLEASURE FROM
THE PERUSAL OF HIS WORKS ON
THE SUBJECT
PREFACE
In the course of my experience as an occasional lecturer during the past
twelve years, I have been much impressed by the keen interest evinced,
even by the most unlettered persons, when astronomical subjects are
dealt with in plain untechnical language which they can really grasp and
understand.
The pertinent questions which have been addressed to me privately by
members of my audiences have clearly indicated that there is ample scope
for writers in satisfying a widespread desire for fuller and clearer
information upon such subjects. I have observed that particular interest
is taken in the planet Mars and also in the moon, but ordinary persons
usually find astronomical text-books too technical and too difficult to
master; whilst, as regards Mars, the information they contain is
generally meagre and sometimes not up-to-date.
Scientific readers are already provided for: and it occurred to me that
it would be much more useful and appeal to a more numerous class if,
instead of writing a book on the usual lines, I wrote a narrative of
events which might be supposed to occur in the course of an actual
voyage to Mars; and describing what might be seen on the planet during a
short visit.
This is the genesis of the story; and, in carrying out my programme, I
have endeavoured to convey by means of natural incidents and
conversations between the characters portrayed, the most recent and
reliable scientific information respecting the moon and Mars; together
with other astronomical information: stating it in an interesting form,
and in concise, clear, and understandable language.
Every endeavour has been made to ensure that this scientific information
shall be thoroughly accurate, so that in this respect the book may be
referred to with as much confidence as any ordinary textbook.
Apart from my own studies and work, all these facts have been carefully
verified by reference, as regards the moon, to the works of such
well-known authorities as Neison, Elger, Proctor, Sir Robert Ball, &c.,
whilst, with respect to Mars, the works of Professor Lowell, Flammarion,
Professor Langley, and other writers, as well as practical papers by
other actual observers of the planet, have been studied.
The personal opinions expressed are entirely my own, and the technical
writers above mentioned are in no way responsible for them. I do not,
however, expect my readers to accept all my views, as they relate to
matters in which there is ample room for differences of opinion.
The reader will, of course, understand that whilst the astronomical
information is, in all cases, scientific fact according to our present
knowledge, the story itself--as well as the attempt to describe the
physical and social conditions on Mars--is purely imaginative. It is
not, however, merely random imagining. In a narrative such as this some
matters--as, for instance, the "air-ship," and the possibility of a
voyage through space--must be taken for granted; but the other ideas
are mainly logical deductions from known facts and scientific data, or
legitimate inferences.
Many years' careful study of the various theories which have been
evolved has convinced me that the weight of evidence is in favour of
Professor Lowell's conceptions, as being not only the most reasonable
but the most scientific; and that they fit the observed facts with a
completeness attaching to no other theory. These conceptions I have
endeavoured to present fully and clearly; together with my own views as
an entirely independent writer.
In dealing with the conditions on a distant and inaccessible world the
farthest flight of imagination might fall short of the reality, but I
have preferred to treat these matters somewhat restrainedly. Whilst no
one can say positively that the intelligent inhabitants of Mars do not
possess bodies resembling our own, it is very probable that they differ
from us entirely; and may possess forms which would appear to us strange
and weird. I have, however, thought it desirable to endow the Martians
with bodies resembling ours, but glorified in form and features. The
powers ascribed to the Martians are really only extensions of powers
which some amongst us claim to possess, and they fall short of what more
than one modern scientific writer has predicated as being within the
possibilities of science at a not very distant future.
During the past few years I have been greatly indebted to Professor
Lowell for his kindness and ready courtesy in furnishing me with
information on obscure matters connected with Mars; and my thanks are
also due to the Rev. Theodore E.R. Phillips, of Ashstead, who was good
enough to read the manuscript of this book, and whose great
observational experience enabled him to make valuable suggestions in
regard to the scientific matters dealt with therein.
Truly "a labour of love," this little book--which Professor Lowell has
most kindly permitted me to dedicate to him--is now submitted to the
public, in the sincere hope that its perusal may serve not only to while
away a leisure hour, but tend to nurture a love of the sublime science
of astronomy, and at the same time provide some food for thought.
A few maps, plates, and charts have been added to give completeness to
the work, and it is hoped that they will aid the reader in understanding
the several matters dealt with.
M.W.
1910.
CONTENTS
PAGE
LIST OF PLATES AND MAPS xvii
NOTES ON THE MAPS AND CHARTS xix
THE SUN, MOON, AND PLANETS xxiii
(_Narrative by Wilfrid Poynders, Esq._)
CHAP.
I. WE START ON A VERY LONG VOYAGE 25
II. PERSONAL REMINISCENCES--WHY WE DECIDED ON
THE VOYAGE 35
III. WE APPROACH THE MOON--A MAGNIFICENT SPECTACLE 44
IV. CLOSE TO THE MOON--I GIVE SOME INFORMATION
ABOUT IT 52
V. WE VIEW THE LUNAR SCENERY IN THE NORTHERN
HEMISPHERE 63
VI. THE SCENERY OF THE MOON'S SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE 78
VII. WE RESUME OUR VOYAGE--THE SUN AND THE
SKY AS SEEN FROM SPACE 92
VIII. JOHN INSISTS ON GOING BACK AGAIN--A STRANGE,
BUT AMUSING INCIDENT OCCURS 101
IX. A NARROW ESCAPE FROM DESTRUCTION--I GIVE
SOME PARTICULARS ABOUT MARS AND MARTIAN
DISCOVERY 113
X. THE DISCOVERY OF LINES UPON MARS--THE
GREAT MARTIAN CONTROVERSY 128
XI. THE GREAT MARTIAN CONTROVERSY (_continued_) 139
XII. WE ARE MYSTERIOUSLY PREVENTED FROM APPROACHING
MARS 155
XIII. WE ARRIVE ON MARS AND MEET WITH A STARTLING
SURPRISE 162
XIV. I MAKE A MOST AMAZING DISCOVERY 166
XV. WHAT IS IN A NAME!--THE STORY OF MERNA 169
XVI. WE LEARN SOMETHING ABOUT THE POWERS OF
THE MARTIANS 184
XVII. WE VISIT THE CANALS AND DISCOVER THEIR
SECRET--MARTIAN VIEWS OF LIFE AND DEATH 194
XVIII. WE ATTEND A MARTIAN BANQUET 207
XIX. THE CHIEF OF THE MARTIAN COUNCIL DISCUSSES
THE SOCIAL CONDITIONS OF OUR
WORLD AND MARS 212
XX. THE SECRET OF THE "CARETS"--THE SUN AS
SEEN FROM MARS 224
XXI. OUR FIRST VIEW OF THE EARTH FROM MARS--A
MARTIAN COURTSHIP 236
XXII. CELESTIAL PHENOMENA SEEN FROM MARS--M'ALLISTER
RECEIVES A PRACTICAL LESSON
IN GRAVITATION 242
XXIII. I HAVE A SERIOUS TALK WITH JOHN 253
XXIV. THE MARTIAN SEASONS 256
XXV. MANY THINGS SEEN UPON MARS--I RECEIVE
SOME NEWS 264
XXVI. WE WITNESS SOME WONDERFUL AERIAL EVOLUTIONS
AND LISTEN TO MARVELLOUS MUSIC 282
XXVII. A FAREWELL BANQUET AND A PAINFUL PARTING 293
XXVIII. LAST WORDS TO MY READERS 298
(_Addendum by John Yiewsley Claxton_)
XXIX. WHAT HAPPENED UPON OUR RETURN HOME--RESULTS
OF THE MOST RECENT OBSERVATIONS OF MARS--PROFESSOR
LOWELL'S IMPORTANT DISCOVERY 302
LIST OF PLATES AND MAPS
PLATE PAGE
I. "WHAT A SPLENDID VIEW WE THEN HAD!" _frontispiece_
II. IDEAL VIEW OF LUNAR SCENERY 54
III. CHART OF THE MOON, SHOWING THE PRINCIPAL }
FORMATIONS SEEN ON ITS SURFACE } 80
}
IV. INDEX MAP TO CHART OF THE MOON }
V. DIAGRAM SHOWING THE RELATIVE POSITIONS
AND MOVEMENTS OF THE PLANETS DURING
THE VOYAGE OF THE _AREONAL_ 100
VI. DIAGRAM SHOWING THE RELATIVE POSITIONS
OF THE EARTH AND MARS AT THE TIME OF
VARIOUS OPPOSITIONS OF MARS 110
VII. CHART SHOWING THE RELATIVE POSITIONS OF
THE EARTH AND MARS DURING THE YEARS
1909-1910 118
VIII. MARS. MAP 1 128
IX. MARS. MAP 2 138
X. MARS. MAP 3 154
XI. MARS. MAP 4 206
XII. MARS. MAP 5 224
XIII. MARS. MAP 6 256
XIV. MARS. MAP 7, SHOWING THE PLANET'S SOUTHERN
SNOW-CAP AT ITS MAXIMUM 266
XV. MARS AS SEEN ON AUGUST 16, 1909 }
} 314
XVI. MARS AS SEEN ON OCTOBER 29, 1909 }
NOTES ON THE MAPS AND CHARTS
The maps included in this work have been photographed from a globe of
Mars specially made for the purpose from various charts. In all the maps
the south is at the top and the north at the bottom; and the series
shows the general surface configuration all round the planet, together
with the principal canal lines which have been observed; but many other
canal lines exist, especially on the dark areas near the south pole.
These lines are usually straight and uniform in width throughout their
whole length: indeed it is difficult to mark them upon a globe so that
they shall appear as regular and uniform as they are actually seen on
the planet.
The names on the maps are those now generally accepted and used by
astronomers.
The "Greenwich" of Mars, _i.e._ the point on the Meridian from which
astronomers reckon the Martian longitudes, is indicated by the apex of
the small triangular light area just above the equator in Map I. It is
marked on the map as "Fastigium Aryn," and is chosen as longitude "0,"
because from its general outline it cannot be mistaken by observers.
"Sirapion," the supposed landing-place of the travellers mentioned in
the story, is shown on Map III., just above the central and lowest point
of the dark area at the top of the map. This name will not be found upon
any other map of Mars.
The chart showing the relative positions of the Earth and Mars during
the years 1909-10 is reduced and modified from one prepared accurately
to scale by the author for his own use in connection with the book. From
it the reader will gain a clear idea of the shape of the two orbits and
how they are placed with regard to each other.
It also shows the course supposed to be taken by the air-ship on its
outward and homeward journeys, and the point reached when one of the
travellers desired to turn back; together with the alternative routes
which were then discussed.
This chart, and the other one showing the positions of the two planets
at different oppositions of Mars, will enable the reader to understand
how it is that Mars approaches so much nearer to the earth at some
oppositions than it does at others. The positions of the oppositions
from 1916 to 1922 are only approximations, as no exact data are yet
available. The earth is closest to the orbit of Mars about the 27th of
August each year, and if Mars comes into opposition about that date it
is then only about thirty-five million miles away. If, however, the
opposition occurs near the 22nd February, the earth is then at its
greatest possible distance from the orbit of Mars, and that planet will
then be over sixty million miles away: appearing very much smaller than
when at its most favourable point of approach.
On the 18th of September, 1909, Mars was only slightly over thirty-six
million miles from the earth, and it will be fifteen years before such a
favourable situation again occurs.
The nearest point of approach does not necessarily occur on the actual
date of the opposition. In 1907 Mars was in perigee, as it is termed,
seven days after the opposition; while in 1909, perigee was before
opposition.
The diagram showing the positions and movements of the planets during
the period covered by the outward voyage of the _Areonal_ is
sufficiently explained by the notes printed thereon. It may, however, be
pointed out that though the orbits of the planets are all elliptical,
especially those of Mercury and Mars, they are so nearly true circles
that, when reduced to the scale of these diagrams, they practically
become circles. The exaggerated ellipses so often found in astronomical
books are very misleading. The orbits of Mercury and Mars have an
appearance of ellipticity because the sun does not occupy the central
point in the diagram.
The view of the moon is photographed from a large coloured drawing by
the author, which occupied many months in preparation and execution. It
shows all the principal formations seen through the telescope as the
moon passes through its various phases, but it must be understood that
the formations can never all be seen at one view as shown in this
picture. As the sun rises on any particular formation the details are
gradually revealed by the long shadows cast by the more elevated
portions when the sun is low down in the lunar sky. As the sun rises
higher and higher the shadows grow shorter and shorter, and when the sun
is vertically over the formation the shadows entirely disappear; all
details are thus rendered invisible.
When the moon is full the sun is practically vertical over the whole
lunar surface, so the only details then seen are those which are vaguely
brought out by differences in tint.
The bright ray-streaks are only suggested in the picture, because, if
shown complete, they would have the same effect as upon the moon, viz.
they would entirely obliterate all the formations over which they
passed.
The Key Map indicates the principal lunar formations, and includes the
names of those mentioned in the book.
The last two plates in the book are from drawings made at the telescope
(a 12-inch Calver reflector) by the Rev. T. E. R. Phillips. The
opposition of 1909 was not favourable for the observation of Martian
details from England; for although the planet was near to us, it was too
low down in the sky; and many of the nights were either cloudy or
misty.
THE SUN, MOON, AND PLANETS
Diameter. Period of Rotation. Mean Distance
from the Earth.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUN 865,000 miles 25 to 26 days 92,800,000 miles
MOON 2,160 miles 27-1/3 days 238,000 miles
(It revolves round the
earth in the same time.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
PLANETS. Diameter in Number of Period of Period of Mean Distance
Miles.[1] Satellites Rotation. Revolution from the Sun in
Known.[2] Round the Sun. Millions
of Miles.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hrs. Mins. Days.
Mercury 2,992 None [3]? 88 36
Venus 7,660 None ? 225 67
Earth 7,918 One 23 56 365-1/4 92-3/4
Mars 4,220 Two 24 37 687 141-1/2
Asteroids Very tiny planets, hundreds in number; and more are
frequently being discovered.
Jupiter 86,000 Eight 9 55 4,332-1/2 482
Saturn 74,000 Ten 10 14 10,759 886
Uranus 31,700 Four Not known 30,687 1,780
Neptune 34,500 One " " 60,127 2,780
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
TO MARS _via_ THE MOON
(_Narrative written by Wilfrid Poynders, Esquire, late of Norbury, in
the County Borough of Croydon, Surrey_)
CHAPTER I
WE START ON A VERY LONG VOYAGE
"Well, I suppose it is about time to get ready for starting?"
The speaker was a smart, well-set-up man about forty-three years of age,
whose keen and alert expression, clear eyes and well-cut features were a
true index to the intellectuality and integrity of his character; whilst
his closely compressed lips and the deep vertical line down the centre
of his forehead betokened a dogged perseverance in carrying into effect
anything he might undertake.
John Yiewsley Claxton, for that was his name, was my very intimate
friend of at least twenty-five years' standing; and during the greater
portion of that time he had been my constant companion. We had passed
through many trials and troubles together, but a better friend and
companion no man could have desired.
We were just finishing a last quiet smoke and chat in my snuggery at
Norbury, near Croydon, preparatory to starting off on a very long
journey for which all arrangements had been completed, and we had risen
early that morning in order to have everything in readiness.
John took his pipe from his lips as he spoke, then, rising, stretched
out his arms and braced himself up like one ready and eager for any
emergency; the next minute he was smoking in his usual calm and
thoughtful manner. I rose when he did, then giving a few final
instructions to Mrs. Challen, my housekeeper, we bade her "good-bye" and
stepped out on to the lawn, thence crossing over to a gate at the far
end of the garden, we passed into an extensive field and walked toward a
large shed that stood near its centre.
It was a most beautiful evening near the beginning of August 1909, clear
and calm. The sun had only just passed below the horizon, the sky
immediately above it being a rippled glory of gold, merging higher up
into gold flecked with crimson, then into a placid sea of pale
apple-green. Above this were fleecy clouds of delicate rose-pink, which
reflected their splendours upon the higher parts of the surrounding
hills, the latter standing out clear and sharp, and glowing with roseate
hues, whilst their bases were seen dimly as through a thin veiling of
purple mist.
Surely nothing could be better for the commencement of our long-planned
trip. The moon would not rise until about a quarter-past nine, and
darkness would have descended by the time we were ready to start. This
was exactly what we required, because we did not wish either our
preparations or our departure to be observed.
Just as we arrived within hail of the shed the door opened, and a
rugged-featured man with sandy hair stepped out. This was Kenneth
M'Allister, our engineer and general factotum in all mechanical
matters--a typical specimen of a Scotch engineer. He had followed his
profession in its different phases on tramp-steamers, on ocean liners,
naval gunboats, and even on battle-ships, besides having served for
several years in the workshops of a great firm of electrical engineers.
Whether repairing a broken propeller-shaft two or three scores of tons
in weight, the most intricate machinery, or the most delicate electric
mechanism, he was equally at home and sure in his work; in fact nothing
seemed to come amiss to him. His machinery was always the object of his
most anxious care, and, providing that all worked satisfactorily,
nothing else troubled him much.
"Well, M'Allister," I called to him, "is everything ready for our trip
to-night?"
"Heh, mon," he replied, "everything is all ready; will you look in and
take a turn round the ship?"
"Certainly we will," I answered; so we all went into the shed, where we
gazed with equal pride and satisfaction upon the splendid shining object
which was housed therein. Here, in perfect readiness for its destined
service, was our air-ship--if it could be so called--upon which we three
had expended years of thought, experiment, and work.
Outwardly it was shaped somewhat like a fish, being constructed of a
special metal--our joint invention--which we had named "martalium." The
metal was composed of aluminium and two other rarer metals which, when
combined together, produced a substance almost as light as aluminium,
yet many times harder and tougher than case-hardened steel; whilst its
surface shone like burnished silver and could never in any circumstances
become tarnished or affected by rust.
The ship was ninety-five feet in length, and its diameter twenty feet in
the broadest part, tapering off to a point at either end.
With the exception of the steering and balancing fans, there was no
machinery whatever visible on the exterior of the vessel. Several
windows along each side, together with a few at the top and bottom of
the vessel, gave light to the interior, and would allow for observations
being made in any direction. These windows were all constructed of a
special toughened glass obtained from Vienna, very thick and warranted
to withstand the hardest blows. Along each side of the vessel there was
an observation platform or gallery on to which the exterior doors
opened, and each gallery was provided with a protecting railing.
The interior of the ship was divided into five separate compartments,
the rear one being the general living and sleeping room, having
observation windows so arranged as to command an outlook in all
directions. The next compartment was mainly a store-room, but, like all
the others, could be used for observation purposes; next to that was a
small compartment intended for a special purpose which will hereafter be
apparent; then another containing water storage, apparatus for
compressing or rarefying air, as well as machinery for producing the
latter chemically.
Lastly, right in the forepart of the vessel was M'Allister's special
sanctum, containing the driving, lighting, warming, and steering
machinery, but electric buttons and switches were also provided for
controlling these in every compartment, so that whichever one we
happened to be in we were prepared for all emergencies. Periscopes
capable of being turned in all directions also communicated with every
compartment, thus we could always see what might be around us.
All the machinery was either electric or magnetic, some of it being very
simple; other portions were extremely intricate, but nearly all was the
outcome of our joint inventions. Such parts as could not profitably be
made by ourselves had been carefully distributed between several firms
of founders and engineers, in order that none could have any means of
discovering the use to which they were intended to be put. The whole of
the shell of the vessel was double, with a packed space between the two
skins; and each door opened into a small lobby, having another door on
the farther side, to ensure that every part might be kept perfectly
air-tight when required.
By the time we had completed a thorough inspection of the vessel and its
machinery, and overhauled the stores to make sure that everything
requisite was on board, it had become nearly dark, so, moving a switch,
M'Allister swung open the great doors at the end of the shed. The vessel
was standing upon a low trolley having many wheels running on rails,
with a small electric motor beneath it, and, upon M'Allister moving the
trolley switch, the whole affair glided smoothly out into the open
field. I may as well confess that we owed this trolley and the mode of
its working to ideas gained during an inspection of the construction and
working of the conduit trams belonging to the London County Council.
When the vessel was out in the open we congratulated ourselves upon its
splendid proportions and business-like appearance.
I asked M'Allister whether "he was satisfied with the result of our
labours?"
"Mon," he replied, "she's grand, and it's fine to have the handling of
such machinery; everything works as slick as grease!" It was a pleasure
to hear him talk about his machines, for he was always so enthusiastic
where they were concerned.
"Now," I suggested, "before we start we'll give our good ship her name."
"Bravo!" said John Claxton, "and we'll drink to her success, a good
voyage and a safe return"; and he was so struck by the brilliancy of his
idea that he actually took his pipe from his lips, and, holding it in
his hand, regarded it with thoughtful contemplation for quite three
minutes.
I accordingly went to the store-room and brought out two bottles of
champagne. Directly M'Allister saw them he entered a vigorous and
emphatic protest, saying, "Heh, Professor! you're surely not going to
celebrate this most auspicious event with such poor fizzy stuff as
champagne? Let's have a wee drop of good old Scotch whisky, and do the
thing properly!"
John Claxton here interposed: "Let M'Allister have his whisky if he
prefers it, and we'll have the 'fizz'!" So I went laughing to the store
again and returned with a bottle of special Scotch, whereat
M'Allister's eye gleamed as he smiled approval.
Then, taking up a bottle of the champagne, I broke it over the prow of
the vessel, and we solemnly christened her the _Areonal_ in honour of
the planet for which we were bound.
Raising high our glasses we gave the toast of "_The Areonal_; may she
and her passengers have a good voyage and a safe return home!"
M'Allister peered over the rim of his glass, and, with upturned eyes,
remarked that "his old wife in Glasgow would be looking for his safe
return in a few months' time"; then his glass slowly tipped up, and the
old Scotch whisky disappeared.
Claxton and I at once stepped on board the vessel, and having just set
the machinery slowly moving so as to raise the vessel a few feet, I put
on the neutral power so that the ship remained poised in the air.
M'Allister ran the trolley back into the shed, closed the doors, and
switched off the electric current; then climbed the extending ladder,
and came on board, John steadying the vessel by an anchor rope in the
meantime.
M'Allister took over the command of the machinery, and, setting it in
motion, the _Areonal_ at once rose slowly and gracefully straight up
into the air.
John and I were standing outside on the platform, from whence, looking
toward the house, we could plainly see Mrs. Challen at the open door of
our sitting-room waving farewell to us--her figure silhouetted against
the bright light of the room. We waved back to her in response, but I am
very doubtful if she could see our signal, as she was looking into the
darkness.
We now rose rapidly as M'Allister switched on more power, and far away
to the northward we could see over the whole extent of the vast
metropolis, with its countless miles of lighted streets. On turning
towards the east the Crystal Palace, which was lighted up, was a very
conspicuous object against the skyline over the Sydenham hills.
John, when he saw it, remarked that "it would have been an appropriate
tribute to our enterprise if the Palace Company had provided one of
their grand firework displays as a send-off for us"; "but," he added,
"these companies will never do what is expected of them!" On the
westward side the lights all along the hill where Sutton lies were
clearly visible; farther off was Epsom, and, with the aid of a glass, we
could even faintly see the lights of Guildford in the far distance.
Nearly south of us Croydon seemed from our altitude to lie almost
beneath our vessel. We directed our course towards the south-east,
passing over the railway-station at Thornton Heath, with Croydon to the
right of us, just as the clock of the Croydon Town Hall was striking
nine. The long lines of lighted streets made a fine panorama, and we
could trace the lights of the moving tram-cars out to Anerley, South
Norwood, Purley, Wallington, and Mitcham.
Although we were fully 5000 feet, or nearly a mile, above the earth it
was surprising how clearly we could hear the sounds from below--the
rumble of the electric tram-cars, the clang of their gongs, the
toot-toot of the motor-horns, and, louder still, the whistles of the
locomotives on the London and Brighton Railway were borne to us with
almost startling distinctness through the still night air.
Our electric lights were now switched on at their full power, their
bright beams shining out through the windows all around the vessel.
Whilst we were on the ground we only used just sufficient light to see
by, as we did not wish to draw attention to our proceedings; but now we
were well up and on our way it mattered not who saw us.
With increased speed we passed over South Norwood and the village of
Shirley, rising higher and higher as we proceeded on our way. The moon,
which was just past the full, had not risen above the horizon of those
upon the earth below us; but we had now attained such an altitude that
it became visible to us, low down on the horizon and far ahead on our
left hand. Owing to our height above the earth it soon became impossible
for us to see the places over which we passed, and as we were moving
over an open part of Kent there were very few lights which we could have
seen in any case. As there was nothing of particular interest to attract
our attention which we had not already seen on our trial trips, we
entered our general room and sat down to supper.
The machinery had been set to maintain a speed of 150 miles an hour
until we passed beyond the limits of the earth's atmosphere; for though,
no doubt, we might safely have travelled faster, we did not intend
taking any risk of overheating our vessel by the friction of the
atmosphere.
Notwithstanding the speed at which we were travelling we were quite
unconscious of any movement in our vessel. The impression we received
was not that we were rushing away from the earth, but that the earth was
rapidly falling away from our position in space.
It may, perhaps, be desirable that I should now give a little
information respecting myself and my friends, together with some
explanation of our reasons for embarking upon such a very long voyage.
CHAPTER II
PERSONAL REMINISCENCES--WHY WE DECIDED ON THE VOYAGE
My name is Wilfrid Poynders, and during the greater part of my lifetime
of more than sixty-three years astronomy has been my favourite study.
For the last thirty years the planet Mars has been an object of special
interest to me, and I have devoted much time to observation of the
planet and have endeavoured to make myself fully acquainted with all
that has been discovered or surmised respecting it.
My dear wife had died when I was thirty-six years of age, leaving me
with one child, my son Mark, then about fifteen years old. In my intense
sorrow at my bereavement I should probably have become almost a hermit
had it not been for my boy who, having been carefully educated, was a
bright and intelligent lad. I now took him under my special care and
made it my constant endeavour to impart to him such of my own knowledge
as seemed likely to be useful or interesting, hoping to keep him with me
for many years as a companion. He soon became imbued with my love of
mechanical pursuits and also with my passion for astronomy and allied
sciences, developing an interest in Mars equal to if not surpassing my
own.
His most intimate schoolfellow was John Claxton, and, as there was a
very strong friendship between them, we were so much together that I
came to regard him almost as a second son.
When my boy was in his twentieth year I noticed that a great change came
over him, for instead of being cheerful and high-spirited he became very
quiet and self-absorbed, and there was often a faraway look in his eyes
which puzzled me very much. One morning I went to call him at his usual
time for rising and found him in a deep sleep from which I was unable to
rouse him. After trying some time without effect his stupor so alarmed
me that I immediately sent off for a doctor, who advised that it would
be best to let him lie and he would probably awaken naturally in a few
hours' time. This indeed proved to be the case; and, as soon as he
awoke, the doctor carefully examined him, but could find nothing wrong
to account for what had happened. A month later he had a similar
seizure, with the same result, but this time his sleep lasted nearly
thirty hours. On the doctor's advice I then took him to the seaside for
several weeks' stay, and there he soon regained his usual buoyancy of
spirits.
Shortly after our return home, however, he had a third seizure from
which he never awoke, but, to my profound sorrow, passed quietly away.
Just before the end came I noticed his lips move slightly as though he
were trying to speak, and on bending down to listen I thought I caught
faintly what sounded like the words, "I am coming," but whether this
really were so I could not be sure.
I will not dwell upon the pain and sorrow of that dark and dreary
portion of my life when I was left quite alone, without a single
relative to cheer me, but merely say that my grief at his loss was so
overwhelming that it was long before my former mode of living could be
resumed. John Claxton was almost as deeply affected as myself, for poor
Mark was a most affectionate lad, and had greatly endeared himself to
both of us. John also had his own troubles, having lost his father
during the previous year, and was then living with an aunt and two
cousins, but had never been comfortable with them, as both the boys were
rather wild, and of anything but good dispositions. He had inherited a
substantial income from his father, but this piece of good fortune only
aroused the jealousy and envy of his cousins, who only seemed to
tolerate his presence in their home because of what they could obtain
from him by their sponging propensities.
Although I was not rich, my income was amply sufficient to render me
quite independent of work, and as I felt most lonely and desolate since
Mark's death, I at length begged John to come and live with me. He
joyfully agreed, and from that time our relations have practically been
those of father and son. As our dispositions and likings are very
similar, we are as happy together as past sorrows will permit.
John always had a great fancy for engineering and electrical work, in
which, after some years of training, he became an expert. Being well
endowed with the faculty of invention, he devised and constructed many
new kinds of electric and magnetic machines, and as my tastes also run
in the direction of mechanical work, I have also done a great deal in
connection with such matters.
About six years ago, when the problem of aerial navigation began to be
studied in earnest, John became greatly interested in the matter,
devoting all his time and energies to designing and constructing working
models of air-ships, aeroplanes, and other flying machines.
At that period I was very keen on Martian matters, to such an extent
indeed that my mind was always occupied with the various problems they
presented. One day, in the course of conversation, I suggested that it
would be a splendid thing if we could construct a vessel which would
enable us to visit Mars and see it for ourselves, and thus settle all
our doubts and speculations on the various controversial points which
were so much discussed.
The idea soon had him in its grip, and he then immediately commenced a
series of experiments with a view to designing machinery capable of
carrying a vessel through space. After many failures he thought out a
plan for utilising the earth's gravitation and magnetism as a means of
obtaining the requisite power and storing it up for future use. This
scheme was thoroughly tested and proved to have solved the problem, for
the machinery could transform the power from either positive or negative
to neutral.
The task of making the vessel and machinery was of course too great for
two pairs of hands to undertake, and we were therefore under the
necessity of obtaining a third man to help us. John had known M'Allister
when he was studying electrical work, and suggested that, if available,
he would be just the man to suit us. We at once communicated with him,
making a liberal offer for his assistance in our scheme, and as it was a
question of dealing with an entirely new kind of machinery it appealed
to his professional pride, so, being out of an engagement, he gladly
accepted our offer. He came over to my house and has lived with us ever
since, apparently quite in his element. M'Allister was about fifty years
of age when he joined us, married, but without children. His wife's home
was at Glasgow, and owing to his so often being away at sea for long
periods, she had become so accustomed to the separation that she
declined our offer to find a home for herself and her husband near us.
She paid him a visit occasionally, or he went to spend a few days with
her, but as a permanent arrangement she preferred staying with her
relatives in Glasgow. It was not exactly my ideal of married life, but
as the couple always seemed happy enough when together, and the
arrangement appeared to suit them both, it was not my place to make any
comment.
My house on the outskirts of Norbury was well situated for securing the
privacy we required in carrying on our work and experiments, lying as it
did in the valley on the westward side of a small eminence known as
Pollard's Hill, which effectually screened us from observation by the
inhabitants of the houses in the London Road. Thus we enjoyed complete
seclusion, although not more than a quarter of a mile from that busy
thoroughfare.
Notwithstanding that Pollard's Hill is only a small elevation, and its
rise scarcely noticed when approached from the London Road, when its
summit is gained one is astonished by the extensive and splendid view it
commands over hills and valleys, town and country; and it breaks upon
one almost as a startling surprise when its beauties are seen for the
first time. It is, indeed, so very unexpected to come upon such a fine
and far-spreading view so suddenly and so close to bricks and mortar.
Alas! the latter are fast encroaching upon this delightful but somewhat
neglected spot, and unless the Croydonians are wise enough to secure the
acquirement of the summit of the hill as a public open space, this
splendid view will be entirely lost to future generations.
A further advantage of our situation was its nearness to Croydon and
Wallington, where there were engineering and electrical machinery works;
besides which we also had convenient and easy means of reaching the
metropolis, from whence we could travel to any other town to purchase or
order anything we might require.
Once we had fairly set to work our progress was rapid and our vessel had
practically been complete nearly a year, since when we have undertaken
many voyages at night in order to test its powers and to ascertain where
improvements were needed.
We were much amused to find in the newspapers of this period, especially
in the London Press, numerous letters from various parts of England
describing the appearance of a strange and very brilliant star in the
sky, either at night or in the morning hours before sunrise. Some
described the star as moving in one direction, others stated that it
passed in quite another direction; though it does not appear to have
occurred to any one that stars do not move in this eccentric fashion,
nor at the rapid rate at which this peculiar star was stated to travel.
No one guessed that it was the light of our air-ship which they saw as
we flitted about the country in the dark hours, and often at extremely
high altitudes.
Three extensive fields were occupied by me in connection with my
residence, and these afforded plenty of room for our large shed and
workshops; whilst as north, south, and west of us there was a large
stretch of open country, extending in some directions for miles, there
was little risk of our operations attracting attention. Moreover, we
were always careful not to prepare for any ascent until it was fairly
dark.
Our establishment was a small one, Mrs. Challen being our only indoor
servant. She came to me as a young widow after my wife's death, and has
proved an excellent manager and a most trustworthy servant. I have
therefore left my house in her charge with a feeling of entire certainty
that it will be well looked after in my absence. My solicitors have a
sealed packet containing full instructions as to what is to be done in
the event of my not returning home or communicating with them within
fifteen months from the date of our departure.
Altogether, our little party of three has been a very agreeable one up
to the present. John Claxton is a splendid fellow--a good talker when in
the humour, and an excellent listener when either myself or M'Allister
are in the vein for airing our own particular views. He is rather fond
of chaffing M'Allister, who has a quiet humour of his own, and takes it
all in good part. John has only one weakness--he has become a most
inveterate smoker, and we have learned by experience that in this matter
his wishes must never be opposed. Both M'Allister and myself are also
smokers, though to a much less extent; the former, indeed, more often
prefers to chew navy plug-tobacco--a habit which I am glad to say I
never acquired, but it is a pretty general one amongst those who have
been employed on sea-going vessels. In these matters it is an understood
thing that each is to do as he pleases, without let or hindrance.
One more point and then I will finish this rather long but very
necessary digression. In conversation I am generally addressed by my
colleagues as "Professor." Not that I ever occupied a Professorial Chair
at a university or elsewhere, but it arose in this way: When John first
came to live with me he felt a diffidence, owing to the disparity
between our ages, in addressing me by my Christian name; on the other
hand, to call me by my surname seemed to him far too cold and formal. So
on one occasion, when I had been holding forth on my favourite science,
he remarked, "I think, sir, if you will allow me, I shall call you
'Professor' in future; the title seems most appropriate for one who has
the power of conveying information on scientific subjects in so clear
and interesting a manner."
I was much amused at this proposal, but fully appreciating the
difficulty he felt in the matter, replied, "John, you really flatter me
too much; but as you seem to think the title fits, you may call me by it
if you like." So from that time forth John always addressed me as
"Professor," and from hearing him constantly using the term, M'Allister
soon acquired the same habit. I am afraid they both credited me with
rather more erudition than I really possessed; but although I should
never attempt to talk at large on matters with which I was not fully
acquainted, I have lived long enough to know that it is not always wise
to go very far in disillusioning others of the favourable opinions they
may have formed respecting one's own abilities. It is, perhaps, one of
those matters in which "a still tongue makes a wise head"; and, if dealt
with in a tactful way, may be of real advantage to both persons. The one
will continue to be receptive of the ideas of the person whom he esteems
as well qualified to impart sound and reliable information, whilst the
other will honestly endeavour to live up to his reputation, and be most
scrupulously careful to make sure of the accuracy of the information
which he desires to impart.
CHAPTER III
WE APPROACH THE MOON--A MAGNIFICENT SPECTACLE
When we had finished our supper John remarked, "Professor, I am a little
mystified in regard to our present position. We have started on a voyage
to Mars, but up to the present I have not seen even a glimpse of the
planet to-night. How is that?"
"Hear, hear," chimed in M'Allister. "Mon, I've been bothering over the
very same thing ever since we started, and wondering where yon little
red star has gone to!"
"The question is very soon answered," I replied: "it is a case of 'the
Spanish fleet you cannot see because it's not in sight.' Mars does not
rise above our late horizon until about a quarter-past ten, and was
therefore hidden by the earth whilst we were out on the platform; so we
could not expect to see it then, but if we look out now no doubt we
shall see it."
We went over to a window, and I pointed out the planet, remarking,
"There it is; that little red star is the world which we hope to land
upon in a few weeks' time. You will notice that it does not lie quite in
the direction in which we are moving, for I must tell you that we are
not on our course to Mars at present. I thought we should all be glad to
have a look at the moon from a close point of view now we have the
chance, and M'Allister will remember that I gave him instructions just
before supper to direct our course so as to head off the moon in its
journey."
"Quite right, Professor, so you did," said M'Allister; "but I did not
fully understand the reason of your instructions."
"But," interrupted John, "are we not going rather out of our way?"
"Yes, that is so, John," I replied, "but a few thousand miles more or
less will make very little difference to us at the rate we shall travel,
especially if you allow for the fact that the earth and moon are both
moving nearly in the direction we wish to go. Besides, I hope to
approach sufficiently near the moon to enable us to add a little more
power to our store, so it will not all be lost time; and we can also use
the moon to give us a fresh start. But for the fact that it would be
best for us to reach the moon before it has waned to any large extent we
might have delayed our start for many days, and, whilst considerably
shortening our journey, still arrived at Mars on the date we have
fixed."
Our chronometer was housed in a substantial non-magnetic cubicle, with a
very thick glass window, in order to protect it from the magnetism and
electricity which pervaded our vessel. On looking at the chronometer I
found the time was nearly eleven o'clock. We had, therefore, been nearly
two hours on our journey and had travelled some three hundred miles,
mostly in an upward direction from the earth; so if there were any of
the earth's atmosphere around our vessel it must be of the most extreme
tenuity, and we might safely increase our speed.
I accordingly gave M'Allister the order to switch on the power
gradually, up to our full speed, and it was not long before we were
rushing through space at the rate of over eighty-three thousand miles an
hour. At this rate, as I told them, we might expect to reach the moon in
a little over sixteen hours, allowing for loss in slackening down at the
latter part of the journey.
"It so happens," I said, "that the moon's present distance from the
earth is rather less than 226,000 miles, being its nearest approach to
the earth during this month."
John at once asked, "How it happened that, if the moon were only this
comparatively short distance away from us, I reckoned it would require
over sixteen hours to reach it at the tremendous speed we were now
moving"; and added, "I thought we should be there in about three hours."
"Ah, John," I replied, "you have forgotten that the earth is rushing
along and carrying the moon with it nearly as fast as we are travelling,
and you are reckoning as though they were standing still all the time.
As a matter of fact we are only gaining on the moon by a little over
fifteen thousand miles an hour, and we must allow for slackening speed
long before we reach the moon, so we cannot expect to cover the distance
in less than sixteen hours. You will see that if we did not travel
faster than the moon is moving away from us we should never catch it up
at all!"
"That explains it all, Professor," said John, "and I must confess I felt
rather puzzled at the length of time required to reach the moon, so was
altogether out in my calculations."
After we had been proceeding at this rate for nearly two hours,
M'Allister came hurrying into our compartment in a state of great
excitement.
"Professor," he exclaimed with a gasp, "something's gone wrong
altogether, and I don't know what to do!"
"Gone wrong!" I repeated. "Why, what is the matter?"
"Mon," he answered, "everything is the matter! A while back we were
rushing towards the moon, but just now when I looked ahead there wasn't
any moon to be seen. I happened to go round to the other window and look
back and, my word! if there wasn't the moon right behind us! We have
been travelling so very fast that we must have run past it without
knowing we had done so."
"Oh, we could not possibly have done that!" I exclaimed.
"But there's more to come, Professor," continued M'Allister. "When I
last saw the moon it was nearly full and not so very much bigger than
when we saw it at starting, but now this moon behind us is an enormous
thing; yet it is only a new moon, or rather what folks call a new moon
with the old moon in its arms!"
"Oh, now I understand," I replied. "It's all right, M'Allister, and you
can make your mind quite easy. You were not able to see the moon when
you first looked through the window because it was nearly in a direct
line with your course, and therefore just hidden by the prow of the
vessel. It's still ahead of us and still nearly full: if you had looked
out of the conning tower or used the periscope you would have seen it."
"Heh, Professor," he interjected, "I know I couldn't see the moon if it
was straight ahead of our course, but then what about that enormous new
moon that's behind us? I saw that right enough."
"That enormous new moon, M'Allister, is only our own little world which
we left a few hours ago," I replied.
He stared at me as though bewildered, and after pondering a while,
exclaimed, "Losh, mon, you surely don't mean to say that our own little
world changes about in the same way as the moon does--sometimes new and
sometimes full?"
Here John interposed. "Yes, M'Allister, you can take it from me that it
is just what our world does do. I think you are aware that, like the
moon, our world simply reflects the light it receives from the sun, and
does not shine by its own light. So one side is light and the other side
is dark, according to its position in regard to the sun. From our
present position we are only able to see a small portion of the lighted
side, the remainder being dark except for the moonlight shining upon it,
so it looks just like a large new moon. It really serves as a moon to
our moon, but its phases follow each other in reverse order. Thus, when
the moon is full, the earth's disc is all dark, and when the moon is in
its first quarter the earth, as seen from there, would be in its third
quarter, and so on through all its phases. Do you follow all that,
M'Allister?"
"Well, mon," replied M'Allister, with a sly grin, "I've just heard you
say it; but"--and here he turned to me--"is it all correct, Professor?"
"Yes, quite correct," I answered, greatly amused at his distrust of
John's statements.
"M'Allister, you're like the Apostle Thomas," commented John, evidently
a little nettled; "so you really doubted my word after all!"
"Heh, mon," he answered, "you're not the Professor, you know; and I
thought maybe you were pulling my leg!"
"Well," laughed John, "perhaps you _will_ get your leg pulled the next
time I condescend to give you a lesson in astronomy!"
After this little spar between my two colleagues we proceeded to the
machine-room, which John and I carefully inspected, to make sure that
all was working properly; and having satisfied ourselves on this point,
we gave M'Allister his instructions for the 'night'; though of course
there was no night now.
Mounting the steps of the conning turret, we then had a look at the
earth, from which we were so rapidly moving away. It appeared about
fifteen degrees in angular diameter, showing that we had travelled some
thirty thousand miles from it.
The full moon, as seen from the earth, appears just about half a degree
in diameter--sometimes a little more, sometimes rather less; so the
earth was apparently about thirty times the diameter the moon usually
appears to us. It was only a thin crescent where lighted by the sun, but
well might M'Allister describe it as "enormous," for it appeared still
larger to him when he saw it some thirty minutes earlier and mistook it
for the new moon.
When we came down again John, very thoughtfully, said to me, "Professor,
you have had a very long, tiring day; and when we reach the moon, we
shall probably stay up several hours to look at it, so you had better
take as long a sleep as possible. There will be no need to break your
rest, for I'm the younger, and will get about by six o'clock, and
relieve M'Allister, who can go on all right up to then, as he has three
hours less work to his credit than we have to-day. If your advice is
needed, I will call you at once; but, no doubt, we shall do very well
till we arrive within a few thousand miles of the moon. We will slacken
speed very gradually from about two o'clock in the afternoon, so as not
to approach the orb too rapidly."
I had, indeed, as he said, had a long, tiring day, having risen soon
after four o'clock yesterday morning, and it was now nearly 2 "A.M." by
terrestrial time; so, thanking him for his kind consideration, I bade
them both "good night," and gladly proceeded to bed, John following soon
after.
He was as good as his word, and actually allowed me to sleep on until
nearly half-past three in the "afternoon," when he roused me, and,
having dressed, I snatched a hasty meal and then at once proceeded to
the machine-room, where my first act was to look at the moon. There it
was below us, but still slightly ahead of the _Areonal_; and its
magnificence was so overpowering, that it almost seemed to take my
breath away, although I was fairly well prepared for the sight. Many
times when viewing it through the telescope I have almost lost myself in
admiration of the sublime spectacle it presents; but what I had seen on
those occasions could not be compared with the splendour of the view now
before us.
Here, without any atmosphere to dim or otherwise mar the view, the
brilliancy of the lighted portion of the disc was absolutely dazzling,
whilst the extreme delicacy of its varied tints and the subtle nuances
of colour, which we now saw to perfection, were most charming and
delightful to any one endowed with artistic perceptions. We were only
about four thousand miles from this beautiful orb, its angular diameter
measuring about thirty degrees, or nearly sixty times its apparent
diameter, as seen from the earth; thus it appeared to cover a very large
circle on the sky.
John and M'Allister told me they had both been gazing upon the splendid
scene for a very long time with astonishment and delight equal to my
own; and the latter went on to say, "Professor, did you ever see such a
sight in your life? I never did, and could never have imagined that
anything could be so beautiful! Mon, it's worth many a journey like this
to see such a bonnie thing!"
"You are quite right in saying that, M'Allister," I answered; "it is,
indeed, a grand and marvellous sight! I can assure you that when I have
been observing the moon in its full and glowing splendour, it has often
seemed to me the most exquisitely beautiful object I have ever looked
upon; yet now it appears far more beautiful than when seen through the
telescope!"
CHAPTER IV
CLOSE TO THE MOON--I GIVE SOME INFORMATION ABOUT IT
We were now moving at a comparatively slow speed, yet the size of the
moon's disc was very rapidly expanding as we approached nearer and
nearer to it. In the course of a little over half-an-hour we were within
ten miles of its surface, which now seemed to fill the whole space below
us; and its rotundity was most impressive. The shadows of the mountains
and other elevated portions near the terminator[4] were jet black, owing
to the absence of an atmosphere; and, seen contrasted with the brilliant
lighting of the parts exposed to the full glare of the sun, appeared
almost like deep holes in the lunar surface.
John now remarked, "Professor, you are aware that I have only a rather
vague general knowledge of astronomy, although I take an interest in the
subject, and that I know still less about the dimensions and physical
character of the moon and planets; so perhaps you will be good enough to
give us a little detailed information respecting this beautiful orb.
Most of it will be news to me, and probably it will all be fresh to
M'Allister."
"Heh mon," the latter replied, "just put me among machinery and I'll
tell you what's what, but I never learned anything about astronomy, so
will not pretend to any knowledge of it, but now I should be very glad
to hear what the Professor has to say about it."
"Well, friends," I replied, "it is not my wish to lecture you upon the
subject, so I will merely just run over a few of the bare facts.
"To begin with--the moon is very much smaller than the earth, its
diameter being only 2160 miles, while the earth's diameter is 7918
miles. Being a smaller globe its mass is much more loosely compacted
than that of the earth, so, although it would take nearly fifty globes
the same as the moon to make one globe as large as the earth, it would
require nearly eighty such globes to make one as heavy as the earth.
"The moon's distance from the earth is generally given as being about
238,000 miles, but this is its mean distance. When farthest away from
our world its distance is about 260,000 miles, but at its nearest it is
less than 220,000 miles distant. This difference of course arises from
the eccentricity of the moon's orbit, and it explains why we sometimes
see the moon a trifle larger than it appears at other times. By this I
mean that it really is seen larger, because it is closer to us. But you
have no doubt often noticed that when the moon is near the horizon it
seems to be very large indeed. This apparent increase of size is,
however, an illusion, owing to our unconsciously comparing it with the
apparent size of terrestrial objects.
"The surface of the moon shows evidence of very violent volcanic action
having occurred in every part of it, and astronomers in the past were
much puzzled to account for the excessive volcanic energy which was
indicated by what they saw, as such a small globe as the moon would not,
in the ordinary course of events, have ever possessed sufficient heat to
have developed such violent action. A theory of later years has,
however, provided a reasonable explanation. It is that the moon was at
one time a part of the same mass as the earth, which became separated
from it before the earth had quite cooled down and solidified into its
present form, and was then gradually driven farther and farther away
from the earth by natural forces. It was therefore originally as hot as
the rest of the mass which formed the earth, but being formed into a
smaller globe of much less gravity--only one-sixth of that of the
earth--volcanic action of the same intensity as that on the earth would
have a much more far-reaching effect. A force which on the earth would
project volcanic lava and scoriæ a distance of three miles would, on the
moon, project it a distance of eighteen miles. This accounts for the
very high mountains we see on the moon, some of which are comparatively,
for the size of the globe, much higher than those on the earth. It also
accounts for the vast size of the lunar craters, ring-plains, and
ring-mountains.
"These latter are formations quite unknown upon our earth, but on the
moon they are numbered by hundreds of all sizes, from a few miles up to
one hundred and fifty miles in diameter. They are large plains, roughly
circular in shape, and surrounded by mountains; in a few cases the ring
is in some parts a double range of mountains. Sometimes the plain (or
'floor,' as it is termed) is many thousands of feet below the general
level of the lunar surface; in a few cases it is raised considerably
above it, and in one or two instances, instead of being flat, the floor
is convex. Some of the mountain rings are comparatively low, but in
other cases the mountains are fifteen to twenty thousand feet in height,
or even higher. Frequently a mountain rises near the centre of the
floor, some rings containing more than one such mountain, whilst others
have none at all.
[Illustration: _Drawn by M. Wicks_ Plate II
IDEAL VIEW OF LUNAR SCENERY
As there is no atmosphere on the moon, the sky is a dense black, and the
stars shine brilliantly in the daytime. The view is a typical one,
showing numerous craters and cracks, and a small ring-mountain with
terracing. Ring-mountains and plains vary from a few miles to 150 miles
diameter, some mountains being nearly 20,000 feet in height.]
"There are numerous instances where one mountain ring has overlapped or
cut into another, thus indicating that it was a later formation; and in
many cases the mountains are 'terraced,'[5] as it is termed, either
owing to a series of landslips or to the rise and fall of a sea of lava,
which cooled as it sank down, thus forming terraces. Small craters
abound all over the surface of the moon and on the floors of the rings;
cracks in the lunar surface are also numerous.
"As regards the lunar mountains, it may truly be said that we have a
fairly accurate knowledge of peaks and mountains which would either be
too precipitous to be climbed, or quite inaccessible to us, if we could
actually land upon the moon; and the whole visible surface has been more
carefully and thoroughly mapped out and studied than is the case with
many parts of our own earth.
"If the moon has any atmosphere it must be so very attenuated indeed
that human beings could not possibly live in it at all; but nothing has
yet been detected which would enable us to say positively that any
atmosphere does exist there, although there have been some indications
observed which support the supposition that there may be an extremely
thin air.
"Nor does it appear possible that there is any water upon its surface at
the present; in fact, many astronomers are of opinion that the moon
never did have any water upon it. Personally, from a study of many of
the formations as seen through the telescope, it seems to me quite
impossible that they could owe their existence in their present state to
anything but the action of water. They present much the same appearance
as formations on our own earth which we know have been fashioned by that
means. There is no water upon the moon now, I think, though several
large depressions are still called oceans, seas, lakes, or marshes,
because at one time they were believed to be such. Probably in some of
those places, if not in all, water existed millions of years ago; but
ages since they must have lost it either by evaporation or by absorption
into the soil.
"I will not say any more just now, but as we pass above the lunar
surface I will point out a few of the natural features that may be of
interest to you."
M'Allister here paid me the compliment of saying, "Well, Professor, I
always thought astronomy was a very dry and difficult subject; but your
remarks were really very interesting, and quite easy to understand.
There is only one thing that seemed to me rather strange as coming from
a scientific man, and I would like you to explain that."
"Certainly; if there is anything you do not quite understand, you have
only to ask and I will try to clear the matter up," I answered. "What
is it you wish to know?"
"Well," he answered, "I noticed that when you were speaking about the
distance of the moon you always said it was _about_ so far away. Why
didn't you tell us the exact distance? I'm not a scientific man by any
means, but if any one were to ask me the length of a connecting rod on
one of my machines I should say '25 inches,' not 'about 25 inches,' for
that would not do for a practical man!"
"It's like this, M'Allister," I said. "You measure things with a
two-foot rule, which is something you can actually handle, and you know
it is made according to a standard measure and must contain exactly 24
inches. If, however, your rule was 24-1/4 inches long, yet still divided
into twenty-four equal parts, you could measure work with it just the
same, but would know that every measurement was just a little bit out.
If you had no possible means of obtaining another rule, you would have
to put up with a little inexactitude.
"That is just the position in which astronomers are placed; they have to
put up with a measure which they know is not perfectly accurate, yet it
is the best which can be secured.
"Their two-foot rule, so to speak, may be the distance from the earth to
the sun, or the length of the whole diameter of the earth's orbit, and
these cannot be handled like your rule; and although we know the
measurements of these are nearly correct, they are not quite so. Yet the
distances of the moon, planets, stars, &c., have to be measured by these
rules, so it is clear we can only know those distances with a near
approximation to accuracy.
"For this reason astronomers are always trying different means of
ascertaining the sun's exact distance from the earth in order to obtain
a perfectly correct measure; but there are so many difficulties and
complications which affect the result, that it will be a long time yet
before they succeed in their work.
"You will therefore understand that all these figures as to distances
and dimensions of planets and stars are only as near approaches to
correctness as is possible to attain in our present circumstances. They
must not be regarded as literally exact, although they are usually
sufficiently accurate for all general purposes. Astronomers know this
and allow for it; but general readers of books, when they find figures
which do not agree with others they have seen, are apt to regard them as
all being mere guesses, and in this they are doing an injustice to the
painstaking labours of generations of astronomers and mathematicians.
"I shall presently be mentioning the heights of mountains, the size of
ring-plains, craters, &c., but the same reasoning applies to them; the
dimensions given are averages of measurements made by different
observers, and, though not quite accurate, are as near the truth as the
difficult conditions under which they have to be measured will allow."
"Thank you, Professor," said M'Allister as I concluded. "I'm glad I
don't have to work with such rules as those you mention, for
measurements a little bit out of correctness would ruin any machine in
the world."
"Still, M'Allister," I said, "you would have the advantage over
astronomers with your two-foot rule, because you would know that it was
a quarter of an inch too long. Their difficulty is that they do not
know exactly how much their rule is out of correctness, so cannot obtain
absolute accuracy however they may try."
We now set the machines going very slowly and moved toward the northern
part of the moon, where I pointed out the position of the lunar north
pole, and explained that, owing to the very slight inclination of the
lunar axis, there can be but very little variation of seasons in any one
particular part of the moon. Thus, if at one place it were spring, it
would practically always be spring there, but with very cold nights all
through the lunar year. Where it was summer it would practically always
be summer, also with very cold nights, and so on.
I further explained that, as the moon revolves on its axis in the same
time that it takes to make one revolution round the earth, those on the
earth always see the same side of the moon, except when occasionally,
owing to inequalities in the lunar motions, they are afforded a peep
just round portions of the edges at different periods. The remainder of
the other side of the moon has never yet been seen from the earth by
human eyes, and in all probability never will be seen for millions of
years to come.
John, who as usual was smoking like a factory chimney, here removed his
pipe from his mouth and said, "Professor, you stated just now that the
nights on the moon would always be intensely cold, and I should like to
know whether there is any really reliable information respecting the
temperature of the lunar days and nights. I have seen so many
contradictory theories on the subject that I scarcely know what to
believe."
"In that respect," I answered, "I fear that my position is much the
same as yours, for I have absolutely no certain knowledge on the point,
but will just state shortly how the matter stands at present.
"During the past century many investigations have been made by
scientific men respecting the temperatures on the moon, and their
results have differed to an amazing extent. It would take too long, and
be too wearisome, to quote all the authorities, so a few must suffice.
Lord Rosse, who used a thermopile in his experiments, found that in
order to produce the results he obtained, the sunlit surface of the moon
must be heated to a temperature of 500 degrees on Fahrenheit's scale.
Sir John Herschel had previously concluded that the temperature must be
much greater than that of boiling water. On the other hand Ericsson and,
more recently, Professor Langley--who used a bolometer of his own
invention for measuring the heat of the sun's invisible rays--came to
the conclusion that even under continued sunshine the temperature would
rarely, if ever, rise above the freezing point of water.
"Professor Very, however, who has continued the delicate experiments
with the bolometer, and also made other experiments and calculations of
quite recent date, has obtained results more nearly in accordance with
those first quoted, for he found that near the end of the second week's
sunshine on the moon the temperature of the rocks, soil, &c., must rise
to at least 80 degrees Centigrade above the heat of boiling water."
"My word!" said M'Allister, "that's hotter than a ship's engine-room,
and I shouldn't care for such a very high temperature."
"As this is so recent," I proceeded, "and the work of one of our
highest authorities, I think we must accept it as being more correct,
especially as Professor Very has taken into consideration some factors
which had not previously been allowed due weight.
"In connection with this matter of temperature it is necessary to
remember that the days and nights upon the moon are both very long, for
the full lunar 'day' is equal to a month, so the actual lunar day is
equal to fourteen of our days, and the lunar night is of the same
duration. Our 'day' of twenty-four hours is divided into day and night
in unequal proportions, according to the changes in the seasons; but, as
I before remarked, the seasonal changes on the moon are very slight, so
the variations in the lengths of the days and nights are very small.
"But, whatever may be the difference of opinion as to the heat of the
lunar day, there seems to be a pretty general agreement that, owing to
the absence of an atmosphere, the nights must be so intensely cold as to
be almost beyond our conception--probably approaching nearly to the
absolute zero of outer space. Even with an atmosphere the long nights in
our polar regions are so cold that only very strong people can endure
them, notwithstanding every device for obtaining warmth.
"You will gather from this that although the moon appears so beautiful
from a distance, it must be anything but a desirable place of residence
even from a climatic point of view, for we should practically be fried
at midday, while at midnight--or even in the daytime when out of the
direct rays of the sun--we should soon be frozen stiff."
As I said this John chimed in with: "Professor, all things considered,
I think I could smoke my pipe more comfortably upon the earth than upon
the moon. I really don't like such extremes of temperature."
"I am of the same mind," I replied, "and it is because I prefer a more
equable temperature that I have carefully kept our martalium blinds
drawn over those windows of our vessel upon which the sun is shining."
CHAPTER V
WE VIEW THE LUNAR SCENERY IN THE NORTHERN HEMISPHERE
"Now, Professor," exclaimed M'Allister, jumping up with a shrug of the
shoulders, "you've given our friend John a considerable amount of
information on a wee bit dry subject, so, mayhap, you will now give us
something more interesting, and go on with the description of the
natural features of the moon down yonder."
"Yes do, please, Professor," said John; "M'Allister's own temperature is
evidently rising rapidly. Strange, isn't it, that a douche of cold facts
should make our friend so warm!"
"Well, not altogether," I replied laughingly; "there should always be a
healthy reaction after a cold douche. Much depends on the intensity of
the cold applied, and you know that if you touch extremely cold metal it
burns you like hot iron!"
"Professor," chimed in M'Allister, "maybe I _was_ a bit warm, but really
your facts were not so cold as to make me hot."
"I'm glad to hear you say so," I answered.
"At all events, Professor," continued John, "whatever may be
M'Allister's actual temperature, I'm simply burning to know something
about that very striking formation with the steel-grey coloured
flooring which is situated not very far down from the North Pole, and a
little to the east of the central meridian."
"That," I said, "is a large walled plain called Plato, and, being on a
receding curve of the moon, it is seen from the earth foreshortened, so
that it appears to be elliptical in shape. It is about sixty miles in
diameter, and encloses an area of 2700 square miles, which is just about
the area of Lincolnshire. The general height of the mountain walls is
over 3600 feet; one mountain on the east is nearly 7500 feet high, and
others on the north and west are but little lower.
"You will notice that there are several breaks in the walls, and a large
one on the south-west; whilst on the inner slope of the mountains you
can see where a great landslide has occurred.
"It is rather singular, John, that in your first selection you have
chosen a formation which is one of the lunar mysteries!"
"Ah! Professor," said John, smiling, "I always was lucky! What is this
dreadful mystery?" he asked, with an assumed expression of awe.
"Oh, it's not a ghost story, John, nor anything to make your flesh
creep," I said rather grimly. "Usually the floor of a walled plain
becomes brighter as the sun rises higher and higher in the sky, but
Plato actually becomes darker under a high sun. By some it has been
thought that this is merely the effect of contrast with the very bright
surroundings of this formation, and that there is no actual darkening of
the tint. This is certainly not the case, for I have examined it
carefully myself with the telescope--shutting out all the bright
surroundings from the field of view, but the floor still appeared
equally dark.
"Others have suggested that the hot sun causes the growth of some kind
of vegetation all over the plain, the ripening of which makes the floor
darker in tint. As regards this suggestion, it is the fact that upon
Mars the old sea-beds are the places where vegetation is most luxuriant
at the present time; so, if Plato were at one time an enclosed sea, it
might not be impossible that vegetation in some low form might grow and
be nourished by the crude gaseous remains of a former atmosphere. A
greenish tint has occasionally been noticed by some observers, also
several light streaks across the floor, as well as several small
craterlets, which have been duly noted on the maps.
"But before we go any further we will have a better means of seeing, for
it is rather uncomfortable looking directly down upon the moon. So,
John, just lend a hand and we'll fetch one of those large mirrors."
This was done, and the mirror suspended with the upper part projecting
forward, so that when adjusted at the proper angle we could sit and look
straight into the mirror before us and see the reflection of all that
was below. We could still look down at the objects, if we wished to do
so, without shifting our position.
"There, John," I remarked, as we completed this arrangement, "I have
already arranged mirrors in the proper positions at the windows in the
forepart of the vessel, so that in future M'Allister will be able to see
what is nearly straight ahead of him. Now you will understand that I had
a scientific use for the mirrors I provided, and did not require them
merely to admire my beautiful face in as you suggested."
John laughed as I recalled his suggestion, saying, "All right,
Professor, I know you generally have a good reason for what you do."
Now, being more comfortably seated, I drew their attention to some small
isolated mountains on the area to the south of Plato, pointing out Pico,
an isolated mountain over 8000 feet in height, and another with three
peaks not very far from it. To the north-east of these, some distance
away, are the Teneriffe and Straight Ranges; also isolated groups.
"You will remember," I remarked, "that I said there were several
formations which seemed to me to owe their present appearance to the
action of water. Now look well at all this district before us--does it
not seem to bear out my contention? Those numerous small mountains and
isolated groups were not, I think, originally isolated, but connected
with the adjoining ranges. If we assume that Plato was once an enclosed
sea, or lake, which burst through the mountain walls--possibly owing to
their being weakened or broken by volcanic action--there would have been
a tremendous outrush of water, which must have carried away a good deal
of the softer material of these hills and mountains; whilst, in after
years, the continual wash of the waters, combined with aerial
denudation, would gradually have worn away all but the hardest parts of
these formations.
"Most probably the whole of the surrounding area was also at some time a
sea, though volcanic action has since altered its surface conformation,
and in places it bears evidence of having been covered with lava. It is
not unusual on our world for volcanoes to burst up from under the sea,
so even the evidence of volcanic action does not, as some seem to think,
negative the possibility of water ever existing here; and it may not be
inappropriate to point out that our hydrographers have proved that our
ocean-beds are not always smooth, but are often diversified by high
hills and deep valleys."
M'Allister here interjected: "Professor, would you kindly tell us
something about that fine range of mountains over yonder, just to the
right hand?"
"Oh yes," I replied; "I was just about to mention that mountain range,
which is called the Alps after those in Switzerland; and that peak on
the front portion, just south of the great valley you see, is named Mont
Blanc, and is about 12,000 feet in height.
"You will notice a very large number of peaks in this and the other
neighbouring ranges--in fact, several thousands have been marked on our
large maps.
"Cutting diagonally in a north-westerly direction, completely through
the Alps, you will notice a long and deep valley. This is known as the
'Great Alpine Valley,' and is over eighty miles long, and varies from
about three miles to six and a half miles in width. At the eastern end
it is some 11,000 feet deep, debouching on to the plain in several
comparatively narrow passes, whilst at its north-western extremity it is
very shallow, and emerges on to what is known as the Sea of Cold, which
covers an area of about 100,000 square miles. This valley seems to
afford another example of formation by the action of water.
"Amongst the three thousand peaks comprised in the Apennine range just
below the Alps, are several mountains of considerable altitude," I
remarked, pointing out Mount Huygens, nearly 20,000 feet high, Mount
Hadley, 15,000 feet, and Mount Woolf, 12,000 feet in height. "This range
curves round towards the east, and finishes with a fine ring-plain
called Eratosthenes--some thirty-seven miles in diameter, with a floor
depressed 8000 feet below the lunar surface. It encloses a central
mountain, and on the east wall there is one peak which rises 16,000 feet
above the floor.
"The ranges in this part of the moon are, perhaps, more like those on
our earth than others to be found on its surface, but much more wild and
rugged.
"Eastward and northward of these ranges is the Sea of Showers, on which
there are several fine ring-mountains and walled plains--notably
Autolychus and Aristillus, two very perfect ring-mountains some 9000
feet high.
"One of the most striking, on account of its size and situation, is that
large one which is called Archimedes, and is about fifty miles in
diameter; and you will notice that a rugged mass of mountains and high
hills extends from it to a distance of over a hundred miles on the
south. The floor of this walled plain is only about 600 feet below the
general level, and the mountain walls average about 4000 feet in height;
but there is at least one peak some 7000 feet high.
"You will see a little below and westward of Archimedes the commencement
of a system of large cracks or crevasses in the lunar surface which are
known as 'rills.' Many such systems are found in various parts of the
moon; some of the cracks are comparatively shallow, but, according to
Professor Langley, others are known to be at least eight miles deep, and
may be infinitely deeper, though I cannot say I understand how these
great depths have been arrived at. The length of the cracks varies from
a few miles to over three hundred miles, and from a few hundred yards to
some miles in width. They are attributed partly to volcanic action, but
mainly to the contraction of the crust of the lunar globe as it became
cold. Being so much smaller, the moon would cool much more rapidly than
the earth, and the disruptive effects would necessarily be greater."
John here touched my arm, and pointing to some mountains on the borders
of a large elongated oval area, close to the north-western terminator
where the sun was setting, asked me what they were. I explained that the
dark area was known as the Mare Crisium, or Sea of Conflicts, and is
possibly the deepest of the large lunar depressions.
"It is about 280 miles long from north to south, and 355 miles wide from
east to west, but, owing to its position, the width is seen from the
earth very much foreshortened, so that it really looks nearly twice as
long as it is wide. It contains an area of about 75,000 square miles,
thus being as large as the combined area of Scotland and Ireland, and
the five largest northern counties of England. It is surrounded by
mountains, some being over 11,000 feet high, reckoning from the dark
floor."
I drew their attention to Proclus--a ring-mountain on the eastern side
of this sea--which is about eighteen miles in diameter, and the second
brightest of the lunar formations. "From its neighbourhood several
bright streaks diverge in different directions, two extending a long way
across the dark area, and there is a longer one striking towards the
north and another towards the south at an angle of about 120 degrees
with each other.
"Seen through the telescope, these ray-streaks often appear very
brilliant under a high sun, looking in fact very like electric
search-lights; though I notice that the Rev. T.W. Webb has rather
curiously remarked that these particular streaks are not very easily
seen. Similar ray-streaks, many enormously longer than these, are found
in various parts of the lunar surface, but their exact nature and origin
has never yet been definitely settled. They only come into view when the
sun is beginning to be high up in the lunar sky, and the higher the sun,
the brighter the rays appear. Some of the shorter ones are ridges, but
this is evidently not the case with the others, for they cast no
shadows, as ridges would when the sun is low. Very many radiate from a
large ring-mountain called Tycho, in the southern hemisphere; and one of
them extends, with some breaks, nearly three thousand miles, passing
northward over the Sea of Serenity and finally disappearing on the
moon's north-western edge, or 'limb,' as it is termed.
"Professor Pickering assumes that these rays were caused by volcanic
dust or other light reflecting material emitted from a series of small
craters, and states that they are really made up of a series of short
rays placed or joined end to end. What I have observed myself seems to
bear out this latter statement; but the opinion I have formed as to
their origin differs from the theory of Professor Pickering. It seems to
me more probable that the volcanic dust was carried by a strong wind,
split up into two or more separate currents by a succession of peaks.
The wind currents swept clean the area over which they actually passed,
but dust fell or drifted in the lines between the currents. Exactly the
same thing may be observed in connection with snow-storms on our earth
when accompanied by a high wind. One part of the earth's surface will be
swept clean by the wind current, whilst a long line of the adjoining
surface is covered with a thick deposit of snow. I have also noticed
that where the ray-streaks impinge upon a mountain, or ring, there is an
appearance of spreading out and heaping up of the bright material very
much as snow would be spread out or drifted up in similar situations on
the earth."
M'Allister here interrupted with the remark that, when we were
approaching the moon, he had particularly noticed that all appearance of
the face of the "man in the moon" had vanished. He said he had expected
to see that more distinctly as we got nearer.
"That would not be the case, M'Allister," I answered. "The resemblance
to a human face which we see from the earth is caused by the combined
effect of the bright and dusky areas on the lunar surface as seen from a
distance. The depressed dark areas, which we call seas, form the eyes,
nose, and mouth of the face, but when we had approached nearer to the
moon the details of the surface configuration stood out so much more
distinctly that they entirely obliterated the general effect of the
markings as seen from a distance."
"Professor," exclaimed John, "I have read that before telescopes were
invented it was thought by many that the markings seen on the moon were
really the features of our own earth reflected by the moon as in a
mirror. Is that correct?"
"Oh yes, John," I said. "It seems to have been a fairly general belief
in many parts of the world, and travellers tell us that, even within
very recent times, they have found in some of the more out-of-the-way
parts of the world that the same idea is still held by uneducated
people!"
Objects of interest being so numerous on the lunar surface we could only
give a comprehensive glance at many of them, and as we had so many
places to inspect, I now gave M'Allister the order to steer eastward.
He accordingly moved his switches and the _Areonal_ quickly passed over
the Sea of Tranquillity, which has an area of 140,000 square miles; then
over the Sea of Vapours, a smaller area, parts of which have a dusky
green tint, from whence to the northward we had a view over the Sea of
Serenity, another deep depression nearly as large as the Sea of
Tranquillity, and much of which is a light green colour.
Then we came again to the Sea of Showers, a large "sea" having an area
of 340,000 square miles; and, still moving eastward, the great lunar
"Ocean of Storms" soon came into view. This covers a very large portion
of the eastern and north-eastern part of the moon's surface, and, with
all its bays and indentations, is estimated to be two million square
miles in extent.
I, however, again reminded them that, although these areas are termed
seas and oceans, no water exists there now, whatever may have been the
case in the long distant past. They are now only large depressions, and
not often level but intersected by hills, ridges, and even mountains.
As we passed along I called their particular attention to the
magnificent "Bay of Rainbows" on the north-eastern coast of the Sea of
Showers. "From Cape Laplace (9000 feet high) on the western extremity,
to Cape Heraclides (4000 feet high) on the eastern extremity, this great
bay is about 140 miles across, the depth of its curvature being over
eighty miles. It bears a very strong resemblance to many large bays on
our sea-coasts in various parts of the world, but I am not aware of any
such bay which is bordered by a mass of such lofty mountains as this is.
"We are looking at it now under a high sun, but when the sun has only
just risen sufficiently high to illuminate all those high mountains,
whilst the lower surroundings are still in shadow, the great bay
presents in the telescope the appearance of a brilliant luminous arch
springing from the lighted part of the moon and extending far out over
the dark part of the disc.
"Farther eastward, and lower down on the Ocean of Storms, you will
observe what is admitted by all to be the very brightest large formation
upon the moon, viz. Aristarchus--a ring-plain nearly thirty miles in
diameter, the floor of which is 5000 feet below the surface level. It
possesses a central mountain, very difficult to measure on account of
the general brightness, but believed to be about 1300 feet high.
Well-defined terraces are seen on the mountain walls enclosing the area,
and many external ridges are connected with the walls, especially to the
south. This formation is evidently covered with some substance which
reflects light to a greater extent than that on similar formations;
indeed it appears so bright that when the moon is new and the whole of
this part of the disc is dark, Aristarchus can still be seen with a
telescope, and this gave rise in the past to the idea that it was a
volcano in actual eruption. The explanation is, however, more prosaic,
because the mountain is really brought into view by earthshine on its
bright covering. When the moon is new the earth is almost fully lighted
on the side toward the moon, and sheds a faint light on the dark portion
of its disc, thus producing the phenomenon known as 'the old moon in the
new moon's arms.'
"Close to Aristarchus you will notice another ring-plain, which is
called Herodotus, about twenty-three miles in diameter, with a floor
7000 feet depressed; but this formation is not nearly so bright as its
neighbour. That high plateau between them is notable on account of the
T-shaped cleft in it, which runs into that other long zig-zag cleft (in
some parts two miles wide and 1600 feet in depth), whose direction
changes abruptly several times in its length of over one hundred miles.
"Turning from this towards the south-west you will see the most majestic
formation to be found upon the moon--the great ring-plain called
'Copernicus,' after the founder of our present system of astronomy. It
is about sixty miles in diameter, only roughly circular in shape, and as
it stands isolated upon the great ocean-bed it is most favourably
situated for observation. A large number of very high ridges, separated
by deep valleys, radiate from it in all directions to a distance of
hundreds of miles, presenting the appearance of a grand system of
buttresses to the mountain walls. These walls are high, and contain a
very large number of peaks which, when seen through the telescope as
they catch the sunlight, look like a string of bright pearls shining on
the border of the ring. A peak on one side is 12,000 feet in altitude,
on the other side is one only 1000 feet lower, whilst, rising from near
the central part of the floor, are no less than five small mountain
peaks. Owing to its size, brightness, and isolated position, this
splendid ring-mountain can be seen from the earth without the aid of a
glass; but even a field-glass will reveal much in this and similar
formations which cannot be detected by the unaided eye.
"The Rev. T.W. Webb has termed Tycho, in the southern hemisphere, 'the
Metropolitan Crater of the Moon,' but, in my opinion, Copernicus is,
owing to its position and grandeur, much more worthy of that dignity.
Tycho is fine in itself, but is not so favourably situated, being
surrounded by other formations somewhat in the same way as St. Paul's
Cathedral is surrounded and shut in, for the most part, by other and
meaner buildings.
"How much more should we appreciate the splendid proportions and majesty
of our Metropolitan Cathedral if we could view it as an isolated
building with a fine open space all around it!"
"I quite agree with that, Professor," remarked John, "and I have always
thought it a great pity that Sir Christopher Wren was not allowed to
carry out his original plan in this respect."
We were looking at the Carpathian range of mountains just to the
northward of Copernicus, when M'Allister touched my arm, exclaiming,
"Look, Professor, at all those tiny craters near the western side of
Copernicus. Why, there are so many of them that the ground for miles
round looks like a honeycomb, and in some places there are straight rows
of them!"
"Yes," I said, "this part of the lunar surface is simply riddled with
tiny craterlets, and some of them are utilised as tests for the
definition of our telescopes. I have heard it remarked that a map of
this part of the moon presents almost the appearance of the froth on a
glass of stout when it has settled down, the very numerous tiny
air-bubbles of different sizes representing the craterlets; and really
it does bear such a resemblance.
"Almost due east of Copernicus is another bright and isolated ring-plain
named Kepler, after the celebrated astronomer. This is some twenty-two
miles in diameter and surrounded by very bright streaks of light,
extending in some directions over seventy miles, the whole nimbus of
light covering an area of nearly ten thousand square miles. These really
are streaks, not ridges, for, as you will see, nearly all the surface
surrounding this formation is flat and level.
"Some of the streaks from Kepler radiate in the direction of
Aristarchus, others towards Copernicus, cutting right through the rays
from those formations. From this it is gathered that Copernicus was
formed first, then Aristarchus, and Kepler still later on in the moon's
history.
"The surrounding wall of Kepler is comparatively low with respect to
the lunar surface level, but the depth of the crater is nearly ten
thousand feet below the mountain peaks. The whole formation is covered
with the same light-reflecting material as the streaks which surround
it."
CHAPTER VI
THE SCENERY OF THE MOON'S SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE
I now directed M'Allister to steer across the lunar equator into the
southern hemisphere, and our attention was soon attracted by a very
large walled plain on the eastward side of our course.
John asked me what it was called, and I explained that it was named
Grimaldi, being also well known to observers as the darkest tinted of
all the large lunar formations. As seen from the earth it appears a
narrow ellipse, but we could see its full width, which is 129 miles, the
length being 148 miles. It is also noteworthy as one of the few plains
which are convex in section, and it is so large that its area is equal
to the combined area of the whole of the counties of England south of
the line of the Thames, including Cornwall.
I showed M'Allister this formation on our map, where it appears only a
narrow ellipse in consequence of the moon's curvature, and pointed out
how very different was its appearance now we could see over its whole
extent. Other formations nearer to the moon's limb appear still more
foreshortened when viewed from the earth.
John here remarked that "these large ring-plains covered immense areas,
and, now that we could actually see them, their magnitude was more
impressive than anything we could have imagined from merely hearing or
reading about them."
"Yes, John," I said, "from our altitude of more than ten miles above the
lunar surface we command a much more extensive view and gain a better
knowledge of details than we could obtain even if we landed on the moon.
For instance, if we could stand down in the centre of one of those very
large rings, we should imagine we were in the midst of a boundless open
plain. The mountains all around us would be so distant that, owing to
the sharp curvature of the lunar sphere, they would all be below the
horizon, notwithstanding the fact that many of them are several
thousands of feet in height. So, for all we could see of them, those
mountains might be non-existent.
"In the case of somewhat smaller rings we might perhaps see, here and
there above the horizon, just the topmost peaks of some of the more
lofty mountains."
M'Allister was now struck with an idea, and exclaimed, "Professor, I
notice that many of these great walled plains are very flat, and I
should think they would make fine golf-links, for there would be plenty
of room to send the ball flying!"
"Undoubtedly," I answered, "you would have plenty of space for that; and
I can tell you that you would be able to send the ball flying six times
as far as you could on the earth with the same expenditure of force,
because the moon's gravitation is only one-sixth of that of the earth."
"That would be grand," said M'Allister. "I should like to have a few
turns at golf on the moon."
"Ah, but you would also have extra long tramps after your ball," I told
him, "so you would get plenty of exercise; but, for the reason already
mentioned, you would be able to get over the ground six times as
easily."
"Well, Professor, I should not mind the distance in those
circumstances," he answered jauntily.
"Perhaps you like jumping exercise too," I said. "Only fancy,
M'Allister, if you wanted to jump across one of those narrower cracks!
Why, if you could jump a distance of ten feet on the earth, you could
jump sixty feet on the moon just as easily! Some of our athletes have
jumped a length of twenty-six feet, so the same persons could with equal
ease jump 156 feet on the moon! What do you think of that for a long
jump?"
"Heh, Professor," he replied, looking rather bewildered, "what a jump!
Why, I should think the mon was never coming down again!"
"I say, though, M'Allister, after all I am inclined to think you would
not find golf on the moon altogether a pleasant game," said John.
"Why not, mon?" inquired M'Allister.
"Well," answered John, "I was thinking that if you sent your ball flying
into one of those cracks which are several miles deep you would find
yourself eternally 'bunkered,' for no niblick ever made would get you
out of that."
M'Allister laughed so heartily at this idea of John's that we both
joined in his mirth; then I recommended him to wait until we reached
Mars if he wished to enjoy a game of golf, for there he would be sure to
find enormous stretches of level ground.
[Illustration: _From a coloured drawing by M. Wicks_ Plate III
CHART OF THE MOON, SHOWING THE PRINCIPAL FORMATIONS SEEN ON ITS SURFACE
The dark areas are termed seas, though there is no water on the moon.
The many small rings are ring-mountains and ring-plains. (The North Pole
is at the top.)]
[Illustration: Plate IV
INDEX MAP TO CHART OF THE MOON
1. Bay of Rainbows
2. Plato
3. Sea of Cold
4. Alps Mountains
5. Great Alpine Valley
6. Cassini
7. Autolycus
8. Aristillus
9. Archimedes
10. Timocharis
11. Lambert
12. Euler
13. Sea of Showers
14. Aristarchus
15. Herodotus
16. Ocean of Storms
17. Copernicus
18. Apennine Mountains
19. Sea of Serenity
20. Haemus Mountains
21. Sea of Conflicts
22. Proclus
23. Sea of Tranquillity
24. Sea of Fertility
25. Hevel
26. Kepler
27. Grimaldi
28. Flamsteed
29. Bonpland
30. Gassendi
31. Sea of Vapours
32. Hipparchus
33. Albategnius
34. Ptolemæus
35. Alphonsus
36. Arzachel
37. Theophilus
38. Cyrillus
39. Catherina
40. Sea of Nectar
41. Langrenus
42. Vendelinus
43. Petavius
44. Schickard
45. Wargentin
46. Tycho
47. Maurolycus
48. Clavius
49. Newton
50. Straight Wall
51. Sea of Moisture
52. Sea of Clouds]
Proceeding on our tour of inspection, we crossed the Ocean of Storms to
a point near the central part of the lunar surface, and I showed them
the fine walled plain called Ptolemæus. This is 115 miles in diameter,
and contains an area as large as the combined areas of Yorkshire,
Lancashire, and Westmorland, its highest peak being 9000 feet in
altitude. It forms the most northerly of a line of walled plains, the
most southerly being Arzachel, which is sixty-six miles in diameter, and
has a very depressed floor; while one peak on the walls rises to a
height of 13,000 feet.
Passing farther west, we next examined another splendid group of three
ring-mountains, arranged in a line running nearly north and south, viz.
Theophilus, Cyrillus, and Catherina. The first is the most northerly,
and is about sixty-four miles in diameter, with several very high
peaks--one rising as much as 18,000 feet, and two on the opposite side
being 16,000 and 14,000 feet high respectively. Even the central
mountain is very large in area, and 6000 feet high. "That," I remarked
to M'Allister, "is nearly half as high again as Ben Nevis, the highest
mountain in Scotland, which is, after all, only 4400 feet high."
"Ben Nevis, Professor, is 4406 feet high!" corrected M'Allister.
"That's right, M'Allister," said John, clapping him on the back, "stick
up for bonnie Scotland, and don't let her be robbed of that six feet of
mountain!"
Proceeding, I then said that Cyrillus, the middle ring, was, as they
could see, very irregular in shape; and the walls were in some parts
very much broken and damaged.
Catherina is the largest of the three, being over seventy miles in
diameter, and its highest peak is 16,500 feet in altitude.
I should have liked to have shown them the splendid double-walled plain
called Petavius, which has a convex floor some 800 feet higher in the
centre than at the edges. We were, however, too late both for that and
Langrenus, another fine formation on the same meridian, for the sun had
set upon them and they were in darkness, so it was no use going any
farther in that direction.
We now directed our course over the Sea of Clouds till we arrived at
what is known as the "Straight Wall."
"M'Allister," I said, "that ought to interest you, for there is a
somewhat similar formation in Scotland. You see this is an escarpment,
or cliff, over sixty miles long, and varying from about 600 feet to 900
feet in height.
"This cliff is one of the best known examples on the moon of what in
geology is termed a 'fault,' indicating either that one part of the
general surface has been greatly elevated, or that the adjoining part
has been depressed. We have many examples of such 'faults' on the
earth--for instance, one runs a long way across Scotland, from
Stonehaven round to Helensburgh, between the Highlands and the Lowlands,
and is about 120 miles in length. That is about twice the length of the
Straight Wall; so you see that Scotland can beat the moon in that
respect!"
This brought M'Allister up to the scratch. "Scotland," he exclaimed
excitedly, "can hold her own in most things! Why, mon, the empire is
indebted to her for the finest statesmen, the cleverest lawyers, the
best engineers and scientists, and, allow me to say, the bravest
soldiers in the whole world! Scotsmen go everywhere, and can do
anything!"
"Oh yes, M'Allister," said John, with a laugh, "and a Scotsman has got
to the moon! but, please, do not forget that two Englishmen planned the
trip, and devised the means of accomplishing the journey!"
M'Allister smiled a rather wintry smile, and then subsided. John was a
bit too smart for him that time.
Passing on, we inspected the large cleft running parallel to the
Straight Wall, and the small mountain close by named after Birt, the
well-known selenographer. We then crossed the Sea of Clouds again, and
had a long look at the great system of straight clefts near Campanus and
Hippalus, together with the fine walled plain Gassendi, the floor of
which is at some parts 2000 feet above the lunar surface. I had often
studied this through the telescope, as it is a most interesting
formation.
"Well, Professor," remarked M'Allister, "I have travelled nearly all
over our own world, but in all my journeyings I have never seen such
wild and rugged scenery as I have during the few hours we have been
passing over the moon. The mountains seem to be split and rent in all
directions, especially where there are volcanic craters in the
neighbourhood--and, really, they seem to be everywhere; while landslips
are very numerous, and the mountain passes are extremely rugged and
gloomy."
"Yes," I replied, "my telescopic observations had prepared me for a
great deal, but the weird ruggedness of the lunar scenery exceeds all
my anticipations."
"What is the explanation of it all?" M'Allister inquired.
"I should think, M'Allister, that much of it was originally caused by
the extreme violence of volcanic outbursts," I answered; "but the
excessive expansion and contraction, resulting from the alternate spells
of intense heat and intense cold to which the moon is continually
exposed, will account for the formation of many of those tremendous
chasms and precipices which we see everywhere around us, as well as for
the huge mounds of dislodged rocks and _débris_, which are piled up in
such chaotic confusion on the ledges of the mountains and round their
bases.
"On the earth such _débris_ would very soon have become smoothed by
atmospheric erosion, the interstices would have been filled up with dust
and soil, while the growth of vegetation would have added a new charm to
the effect.
"You have seen the great landslip in the Isle of Wight! When it fell all
was wild desolation, but it has become covered with such a luxuriant
growth of vegetation that it now presents a scene of beauty.
"On the moon, however, there is neither atmosphere, rain, nor moisture
to produce weathering of the rocks or to encourage the growth of
vegetation; so the rocks remain just as sharp, rugged, and bare as they
were ages ago when they were first split off from the mountains.
"No doubt very large masses of rocks are still frequently being
dislodged, and if we could see them falling from the upper part of a
mountain, rebounding along the spurs, with fragments flying in all
directions and ultimately dashing to pieces at the base, it would seem
to us most uncanny not to hear the slightest sound arising from all this
apparent commotion. Without an atmosphere, however, no sound could be
produced, no matter how many thousands of tons of rock might fall to the
ground.
"Tremendous changes of this nature may be happening on the moon, but our
telescopes are not powerful enough to enable us to see the results. They
would have to cover an area of miles to be noticeable, unless they
presented some particularly striking configuration."
"Professor," exclaimed M'Allister, "how is it that all the shadows on
the moon are such a dense black and so sharply defined at the edges?"
"That," I exclaimed, "is entirely owing to the absence of the
atmosphere. On the earth, even at night time, some light is diffused by
our atmosphere, and shadows are never dense black even when thrown by a
bright sun. On the moon it is black darkness everywhere outside the
direct rays of the sun, and there is no gradual diminution of the
darkness about the edges of shadows such as we see on the earth. The
only mitigation of the blackness is seen where some light is reflected
across from the rocky walls on which the sun is shining.
"In those deep recesses down at the bases of the mountains the cold must
be most intense and the darkness truly awful. It all looks very nice
when the sun is shining, but appearances are often deceptive, and do not
improve on a closer acquaintance."
We could not have landed upon the moon if we had desired to do so, for
no provision had been made for a supply of air by means of helmets and
other apparatus. I kept my own counsel in this matter, as I had very
good reasons for discountenancing any proposal to investigate the lunar
scenery too closely.
By a curious coincidence, not long after this conversation we had ocular
demonstration of the fact that the moon is liable to changes from other
agencies than those of expansion and contraction.
We were looking at some distant mountains which were in the full
sunshine. Suddenly a dark shadowy looking mass shot across the sky and
struck one of the mountain peaks some distance down from the top. The
peak seemed to be immediately demolished, and vanished from our sight!
M'Allister gazed spellbound; but John excitedly exclaimed: "Did you see
that, Professor? One moment the peak was there, and the next moment it
was gone!"
"Yes," I said. "Undoubtedly that dark shadow was a large meteoric stone.
Many have fallen on our earth at various times, some being tons in
weight. Usually, however, they are so small that on entering our
atmosphere they become fused by the friction and changed to dust. Larger
ones are partially fused, and often split into fragments in the upper
air. The moon, having no atmosphere, is quite unprotected in this
respect; and meteorites moving at enormous speeds, probably over forty
miles in a second, travel unchecked and unaltered in character until
they strike the lunar surface. It is estimated that immense numbers
constantly enter our atmosphere and are destroyed; but the moon must be
continually exposed to bombardment by meteorites of considerable size.
"Many of our ships have been lost at sea in calm weather, and their fate
has remained a profound mystery; but it is not at all improbable that
some of them have been destroyed by large meteorites, for several
instances are recorded of ships having very narrow escapes from these
dangerous missiles from outer space."
Passing on towards the south-west, we had a long look at the magnificent
formation named Tycho. It is a ring-plain nearly fifty-six miles in
diameter, the mountain walls having some peaks over 17,000 feet in
height. I drew their attention to the long bright ray-streaks which
radiate in all directions for many hundreds of miles from the
neighbourhood of this formation, to which I alluded when we had been
looking at the rays from Proclus. Tycho and these bright streaks can be
seen from the earth when the moon is full without the aid of a
telescope, if one possesses good eyesight.
An enormous number of ring-plains and ring-mountains exists all over the
southern half of the moon's disc; in many cases there are rings within
rings, and others where they have overlapped or cut into previously
formed rings.
Moving almost due south, we passed the large but partially ruined walled
plain known as Maginus. This ring has a floor which is no less than
14,000 feet below the lunar surface. We then arrived at that favourite
object for telescopic observers which is named Clavius. This is an
enormous ring-plain, being over 142 miles in diameter, and encloses an
area of 16,000 square miles, thus being half the area of Scotland. It
has a very depressed floor, and some of the mountains are 16,000 to
17,000 feet in altitude.
Farther on, and close to the south pole, we saw the very deepest of the
lunar walled plains, which is named after Newton, who possessed probably
the deepest intellect of any of our astronomers. A smaller formation
south of Plato was originally named after him, but was not considered
worthy of a man of his scientific eminence, so the name was transferred
to the formation we were looking upon. It is about 143 miles long and
very irregular in shape, and its depth is about 24,000 feet--so deep, in
fact, that the sun's light never reaches to the bottom; thus, when we
look at it from the earth, the floor is always in shadow.
The Leibnitz Mountains, unfortunately, were not visible, as the sun had
set upon them. I, however, mentioned that this range comprises several
peaks which are believed to be the highest on the lunar surface,
reaching as they do an altitude of 30,000 feet, and, according to some
measurements, 40,000 feet. They are very difficult to measure, owing to
the fact that they are really situated on the farther side of the moon,
extending east and west of the south pole, and are only occasionally
brought into view by the moon's libration; even then they are seen in
profile, and so situated that they cannot be measured with certainty.
They are, however, so high that they blunt the southern cusp of the moon
when it is in crescent form.
I now directed M'Allister to turn the vessel in a north-easterly
direction, and we moved across to the last objects which I proposed to
examine. One was the large walled plain "Schickard"--about 135 miles in
diameter--which encloses several other rings; the other, which lies to
the south-east of it and close to the moon's south-eastern limb, is
probably the most unique object on the lunar surface. As we gazed upon
it I explained that the formation, which is known as "Wargentin," would
probably in the usual course of events have been a ring-plain about
fifty-four miles in diameter, but it really is a high plateau of that
size, with very low ramparts. It is evidently a ring-plain which became
filled to the brim with lava, or mud, that welled up from the interior
of the moon; and the mountain walls, being exceptionally strong and
without any breaks or gaps, withstood the enormous pressure of the lava,
which therefore solidified and formed the great plateau as we now see
it. The low ramparts, which we noticed here and there, are really the
isolated peaks and ridges of the mountains forming the walls. This is
the only known instance of such a formation; but probably others would
exist had not the walls of the rings given way under the pressure of the
lava. The walls of several ring-plains have been quite carried away,
and, in some cases so obliterated, that it is now difficult to make out
the original shape of the rings.
Having taken a last look at this unique object, I directed M'Allister to
set the machinery in motion and rise for the purpose of quitting the
moon.
"But," interposed John, "are you not going to have a look at the back of
the moon, Professor?"
"No, John," I answered, "only a small portion of it is now in the
sunlight, the rest is in the blackest darkness, so we should not be
likely to learn much more about it than we know at present."
"Do you think the moon is inhabited?" he then asked.
"No, I do not think it is; no sign of life has ever been discovered, and
we have seen nothing to indicate its existence here. The prevailing
conditions seem to preclude the possibility. Think, John, if there is
any life, what must it be! Without any atmosphere--therefore, not a
sound to be heard, for all would ever be in the most deathly silence--no
breath of wind; never a cloud nor a drop of refreshing rain, nor even
dew; intense heat in the sunlight and the most intense cold everywhere
in the shade! If any life does exist, it is most probably down in those
gloomy, dark and cold recesses at the bottom of the ring-mountains,
where there may possibly be some remains of an atmosphere. It would,
however, be life in such a dreadful and debased form that I would rather
not think about it at all.
"For a somewhat similar reason, I have directed M'Allister to keep the
_Areonal_ at least ten miles above the lunar surface all the time we
have been passing over it. When we saw it from a distance it was, as you
know, an object of surpassing beauty; and as we have seen it from here
it has still been pleasant to look upon. This is truly a case where
distance lends enchantment to the view; for, if we went down close to
the surface, we should find it a scene of the weirdest and wildest
desolation--more horrible than anything seen during a nightmare, and
more terrible than anything imagined by the insane!
"No, John," I concluded, "let us retain our memory of the moon as a
thing of beauty, and leave it at that."
"I quite agree with your view of the matter, Professor," John replied;
so I gave the signal to M'Allister, who was awaiting the result of our
discussion, and we soon left the moon far below us.
CHAPTER VII
WE RESUME OUR VOYAGE--THE SUN AND THE SKY AS SEEN FROM SPACE
All the time the _Areonal_ had been near the moon some of our machines
were storing up fresh power, and we had accumulated a supply amply
sufficient to meet any extra requirements in the event of our arrival
upon Mars being unduly delayed.
We now turned and looked back at the earth; and, as the moon was so near
to it at that time, the earth's disc appeared very nearly two degrees in
diameter, or nearly four times the usual apparent diameter of the full
moon as seen from the earth. The crescent of light on its right-hand
side was rather wider than when we last looked at it; but so many clouds
hung over it, that we could not see what countries were comprised in the
lighted portion of its surface. Owing to the light of the stars behind
the earth being diffused by the dense atmosphere--in the same way as it
would be diffused by a large lens--there was a ring of brilliant light
like a halo all round the earth's disc.
Having passed away from the moon, I now gave M'Allister the necessary
directions in order to keep the _Areonal_ on a course which would enable
us to head off the planet Mars at, as near as I could reckon, the point
it would reach in fifty days' time. The course having been set,
M'Allister was free to join us again, as the machinery required very
little attention.
When he did so, M'Allister at once asked me a question. "Professor, can
you tell me when it's going to be daylight? The sun has been shining for
hours and hours, yet it's still night; the sky is blacker than the
blackest night I ever saw, and the stars are all out!"
John laughed heartily, and said, "M'Allister, this is daylight! and all
the daylight you will get until we reach Mars."
M'Allister turned to me with a perplexed look on his face and asked, "Is
that right, Professor, or is he trying to pull my leg, as he said he
would?"
"Oh yes! It's quite right, M'Allister," I replied. "It is now full
daylight, and we shall have no more night until we reach Mars. That, as
you know, will be seven weeks from the present time."
"Well, Professor," he exclaimed, "then how is it the sky is so densely
black and the stars all shining so brightly? I never saw the stars in
the daytime before, yet these are shining brighter than they do on the
earth at night."
"Simply," I said, "because upon the earth we were surrounded by a dense
atmosphere, which so diffused the sun's light that the whole sky
appeared bright. The stars were there all the time, but their light was
so overpowered by the brilliancy of the atmosphere that they were quite
invisible to us.
"Now, we are out in space where there is no atmosphere at all, so the
sky appears a very dense black; and the stars, having nothing to obscure
their light, shine out more brilliantly than they do on the earth. They
appear as bright points of light, and even the sun does not shed a
general light over the sky, there being no atmosphere to diffuse it."
"Yes," he persisted, "but you said we should have no more night until we
got to Mars!"
"Certainly," I answered. "Surely, M'Allister, you must have forgotten
that night is brought about by the earth's rotation on its axis, and
that the part which is turned away from the sun is in darkness because
its light is hidden by the solid body of the earth, while the earth's
shadow darkens all the sky. When, by the earth's rotation, that part is
again turned to the sun then it becomes daylight. Remember we are not
now on the earth, but out in space!"
"Of course I did know all that, Professor," he exclaimed, "but, just for
the time, I had forgotten."
"Never mind, M'Allister, we all forget such matters sometimes, and this
is quite a new experience for you. But just take a good look at the
sun--have you noticed any difference in its appearance?"
"Yes, Professor, it doesn't look the same colour as when we saw it from
the earth; it seems to have a violet tinge, like some of the electric
lights in our streets. There are also long streamers of light around it,
and coloured fringes close to the sun!"
"Yes, that is so," I said; "and we can see all those things now because
there is no atmosphere. No doubt you have noticed that on the earth the
sun appeared red when low down in the sky, and during a fog it appeared
redder and duskier still."
"Oh yes, I've often noticed that," he answered.
"That was caused by our atmosphere which, when thick, absorbs all but
the red rays of light. On a clear day the sun appears an extremely pale
yellow, or very nearly white; still the atmosphere absorbs some of the
light rays, so we cannot see its true colour as we do now. Those
coloured fringes round the edges can only be seen from the earth by the
aid of a special instrument, and then they do not show all their true
colours.
"That pearly light all round the sun, and the long streamers that give
it the appearance of an enormous star with six long points, form what is
termed the solar corona, and this can only be seen from our earth during
the very few minutes when an eclipse of the sun is at its totality. It
is to see the corona and other surroundings of the sun, in order to
study them, that astronomers go such very long distances--often
thousands of miles--when there is a total eclipse expected, and not
merely to see the eclipse itself. They hope, in time, to learn much from
such observations; but if it happens that the sky is over-clouded during
the period of total eclipse, then all their expense, and the time spent
in preparations and rehearsals of their procedure, are, unfortunately,
entirely wasted.
"Now, M'Allister, if you will take my glass you will be able to look at
the sun and examine it without any risk to your eyesight, for it is
provided with a dark glass to shut out all the dangerous glare. You will
then see what the fringes and inner and outer coronas really are like."
He took the glass and looked for a long time at the sun, and, judging
from his exclamations of surprise and astonishment, he was extremely
interested and delighted with what he saw. John was also examining it at
the same time through his own glass.
Presently the latter turned to me saying, "Professor, I no longer
wonder that astronomers are prepared to travel long distances, and to
risk a great deal of discomfort, and even hardship, in order to view and
study the sun's surroundings. Of course to them it is not merely a sight
to be seen, but the only means by which they can acquire a knowledge of
solar physics. Merely as a sight, however, it is most wonderful. At many
places all round the edge of the sun's disc I can see what look like
coloured flames--pink, pea-green, carmine, orange, or yellow, all in
incessant movement--shooting out at times, or waving and shimmering in a
manner that is indescribable. The changes in form and colour are as
sudden, yet as definite, as the changes produced by turning a
kaleidoscope; while the intermingling of the various colours frequently
produces an effect which I can only compare to the iridescent colours on
mother o' pearl. Then all around and beyond the coloured fringe there is
the light of the pearly inner corona; beyond that are pearly and
violet-tinged rays curling away in both directions from the poles,
whilst outside all are the long, pearly, and violet-tinted streamers
which assume the shape of a large many-pointed star; and even these do
not seem at rest. Though astronomers cannot see all that we do now,
there must be sufficient visible to them to afford opportunity for a
most interesting study."
"That is indeed the case, John," I replied. "Those coloured flames, for
instance, form a study in themselves, which some observers make their
particular hobby. As seen from the earth, they all appear some tint of
red; and, normally, according to measurements, they seem to extend a
distance of some 20,000 miles above the sun. They shift their position
very rapidly indeed; movements at the rate of 100 miles a second are
quite moderate compared with some which have been noted, yet one can
scarcely realise such rapidity of motion. Frequently, however, these
flames are seen to rise in immense masses to tremendous heights above
the sun's surface, evidently driven upwards by explosions of the most
intense energy. In 1888, for instance, one was observed which, in the
course of two hours, rose to a height of 350,000 miles before it broke
up; that is, at the rate of 50 miles a second all the time; but, as the
force would become less and less as the distance increased, at the
earlier part of the time the movement must have been far more rapid.
When the impetus derived from the explosive force is quite exhausted,
the top part of the mass of flame often spreads out like the top of a
tree, then breaks up and falls back into the sun in large flakes of
flame.
"It is supposed that these violent explosions are the cause of the spots
we so often see on the sun when observing it with our telescopes; and,
when looking at them in their earliest stage, we are probably looking at
a mass of flame _end on_, instead of seeing it in profile, as is the
case when the explosion occurs near the edge of the disc. The flames, as
examined by the spectroscope, appear to be largely composed of hydrogen
gas; and no doubt many other gases--some quite unknown to us--enter into
their composition. They are termed flames, but are more probably immense
volumes of incandescent gases. The corona itself is never seen twice
alike; its shape and size vary at every eclipse, but the variation runs
in a regular cycle from maximum to minimum.
"You will also observe that all around the corona, and extending a vast
distance beyond it on both sides, is a fainter pearly light. This is
what is termed the zodiacal light, and is believed to be the thinner
portion of the sun's atmosphere. We can see it from the earth
occasionally after the sun has set, extending far up into the sky in the
form of a semi-ellipse, the base of which is over the place where the
sun is."
M'Allister here asked me to tell him "What was supposed to be the actual
size of our sun, and how far it was away from the earth?"
I answered that "The sun is about 865,000 miles in diameter; and that he
would have some idea of what an immense body it is if he remembered that
it would require 64,000,000 globes the size of the moon to make one
globe the size of the sun! Yet, notwithstanding this immense size, our
sun is quite a small body as compared with some of the fixed stars,
which, as perhaps you may know, are really suns at an inconceivable
distance from us. The bright star Sirius, which is visible during our
winter time, is not only very much brighter in reality than our sun, but
must be many times larger; and there are others known to be very much
larger than Sirius. It has been computed that Arcturus is in mass
500,000 times as large as our sun!
"The sun revolves on its axis in a little over twenty-five days, but the
exact period of its revolution is difficult to determine. The mean
distance of the sun from the earth is about 92,800,000 miles. When we
are farthest from it its distance is 94,600,000 miles, and when nearest,
91,000,000 miles--these differences, of course, arising from the
eccentricity of the earth's orbit.
"The sun's density is only about one-fifth of the earth's density; so it
is evidently mainly gaseous--at all events in the outer envelopes.
"The spots upon the sun often cover such an immense area, that if our
earth were dropped into the cavity, it would be like placing a pea in a
teacup! Some of the spots entirely close up in a short time, but others
last for weeks."
We now turned from the sun and looked at the stars. Such a multitude
were visible as we had never seen from the earth; for small stars, which
there required a telescope to bring them into view, could now be plainly
seen without any such aid, and their various colours were seen much more
clearly. They all shone with a clear and steady light; the twinkling and
scintillation of the stars, as seen from the earth, being caused by the
vibrations and movements in our own atmosphere. We also saw many nebulæ
without using a glass.
The Milky Way was a most gorgeous spectacle, and its beauty utterly
beyond description, as such an immense number of its component stars,
and their different colours, were visible to the unaided eye; besides,
we could trace wisps and branches of it to regions of the sky far beyond
the limits within which it is seen from the earth.
We noted that the planets were also much more clearly seen; and the
orange-red disc of Mars, of course, received our particular attention.
We had spent very many hours in viewing the moon, and a long time in
examining the sun and stars; so we now sat down to a hearty meal, and,
after a short time spent in conversation, we made our arrangements for
taking turns in attending to the machinery, and then retired to bed.
[Illustration: _DIAGRAM: showing the Positions and Movements of the
Planets between the 3rd of August and the 24th of September, 1909: and
the Course taken by the "Areonal" on the Voyage to Mars._
_The dotted line joining the Earth to Mars shows the course taken._
_The dotted Circles show the Orbits of the Planets. The thick arrows
show the distances travelled by the respective planets during the period
covered by the Voyage: the line at the back end of the Arrow being the
planet's position on the 3rd August, and the points of the Arrows the
position reached on the 24th September._
_The Orbits of Mercury, Venus, the Earth and Mars are drawn
approximately to scale, but those of the outer planets are not. On the
same scale, the radii of the Orbits of the outer Planets would,
approximately, be as stated below. These figures will afford some idea
of the enormous distances separating those planets._
_Jupiter_ _3_ _Inches_
_Saturn_ _5-3/8_ "
_Uranus_ _10-7/8_ "
_Neptune_ _17_ "
_Drawn by M. Wicks_
Plate V]
CHAPTER VIII
JOHN INSISTS ON GOING BACK AGAIN--A STRANGE, BUT AMUSING INCIDENT OCCURS
When we rose the next day the moon was a considerable distance away from
us, but not so far off as might at first be imagined if one only
considered the speed at which we were travelling; for, although moving
at our full speed, the earth was following us up pretty closely, as the
curve of its orbit would, for several days, run nearly in the same
direction as we were going. Still, 2,000,000 miles a day was sufficient
to make a diminution in the apparent sizes of the sun and Venus; and
there was a gradual increase in the size of the planets, Mars and
Saturn, towards which we were moving. As regards the fixed stars,
however, there was no change in our surroundings, as they are such an
immense distance away--the nearest being, at least, twenty billions of
miles from the earth, that a few million miles more or less make no
difference in their apparent size, or in their positions in regard to
each other in the constellations as we know them in our maps.
As we were now fairly on our way, and moving rapidly in the direction we
wished to travel, I thought it quite time to put into operation a scheme
which John and I had previously decided upon, so I told M'Allister that
he must be prepared to take a little change of air.
"Why, Professor," he exclaimed, "that sounds almost like a proposal for
going to the seaside!"
"We certainly are not going there," I replied, "for we are rapidly
moving away from all seaside resorts, and you are not likely to visit
any of those places for a very long time to come."
"Well, mon, where are we going to get our change of air then?" he
inquired; "you know there's no air at all outside of this vessel."
"Quite true," I answered; "so we must get our change of air inside the
vessel."
"Yes," interposed John, "and, Kenneth M'Allister, you will have to make
up your mind to have rather short commons of it; the same as we shall!"
"Whatever do you mean?" he inquired, now appearing really scared--for a
dreadful thought had crossed his mind. "Mon, you surely do not mean that
our machinery is giving out!"
"Oh no! not at all, M'Allister," I replied; "but perhaps I had better
give you a full explanation of the matter:--
"You know we are bound for the planet Mars, where the air is very much
thinner than that which we have been accustomed to breathe, and very
probably it is composed of somewhat different constituents. In these
circumstances you will understand that, if we landed upon Mars without
having taken proper precautions, such thin air might make us very ill,
even if it did not kill us.
"That little compartment next the store-room was arranged and fitted up
for the special purpose of supplying a thin air in which we could
prepare ourselves for the atmosphere of the red planet. So we are really
going into training. The machines in that room will generate an
attenuated atmosphere somewhat similar to our own, and this will be
automatically mixed in a cylinder with a little oxygen and nitrous oxide
gas, so as to make it as near as possible like what we expect to find
upon Mars. When we commence it will be only slightly different from our
own air; then gradually we shall reduce its density and change its
quality until it is as thin as we shall require. Each of us must spend
about eight hours a day in that little compartment, though it will not
be necessary to take the eight hours continuously, for we may spend a
few intervals in the other rooms.
"John and I will take general charge of the machinery in that room, and
he will also look after your machines whilst you are with me in our
Martian air-chamber. In addition to these arrangements, we have prepared
a concentrated air of the same kind which we can carry about with us in
bottles, so that by simply opening a little valve in the bottle we can
inhale some of the air now and then when we are in the other rooms. By
adopting this plan, I hope when we reach Mars we shall all have become
so acclimatised that we shall be able to breathe the Martian air without
much inconvenience."
"Heh, Professor," said M'Allister, "what a mon you are for planning
things out; I would never have thought of that!"
"John had quite as much to do with the planning out as I had," I
replied; "and as you now understand what we propose to do, we will at
once commence our training, but we shall not feel much difference in the
air for the next day or two."
We accordingly put our plan into operation, each of us making up at
least eight hours' time every day in the Martian air-chamber, with the
result that we gradually became accustomed to the thinner air, and could
breathe it without any feeling of inconvenience.
As the days went on I began to notice that John was becoming very
irritable; and so was I, though to a lesser extent. The closer
confinement to one room was evidently beginning to tell upon us, and day
by day the effects were more apparent on both of us, especially in the
case of John; but, strangely enough, whilst we were becoming more
depressed and irritable, M'Allister's spirits seemed to be rising every
day!
It has often been remarked that if two or three people are shut up
together for a considerable time, with no other companionship or change,
sooner or later they are bound to fall out with each other.
Up to the present we had all agreed splendidly, but now John's
irritability seemed to increase hourly; and as regards myself, I often
found it necessary to exercise very great self-control to avoid giving
very sharp and snappish answers to John's peevish and querulous remarks.
But the inevitable explosion came at last, and, like all explosions, was
very sudden and unexpected when it did happen.
All the morning of the 2nd of September John had been wandering in and
out of the various rooms, and frowning as though very displeased about
something. I gave him a hint or two that he ought to put in more time
with me in the air-chamber, but he took no notice of my suggestions.
Presently, whilst I was in there alone, he came through, but, without
speaking to me, went on into the store-room; and I heard him in there
opening and shutting the lockers and cupboards, generally closing the
doors with a loud bang, as persons do when in a very bad temper.
These bangs became more frequent and more violent, and at last succeeded
each other with such rapidity that it seemed almost as though a vigorous
cannonade were in progress.
I was wondering what could be the meaning of all this commotion, when
suddenly the door opened, and John rushed into the room looking very
cross indeed.
"I'm sorry, Professor," he cried, "though it's no use saying so; but we
must go back to England again at once!"
"Good gracious, John!" I exclaimed, "what do you mean, and whatever has
happened to upset you so and cause you to change your mind in this
extraordinary way?"
"The deluge has happened," he replied, very crossly. "Professor, _I've
left all my stock of tobacco behind_!"
"Never, John," I replied. "Why, you packed it up yourself; and I
remember that when we overhauled the stores on our departure I saw the
large tin of tobacco in your cupboard."
"I thought I packed it up," he answered, "but it's nowhere to be found
now. As my tobacco supply had nearly run out I went to the cupboard this
morning to get some more, and took down the big tin of twenty-six pounds
labelled 'Tobacco.' I opened it, and what do you think it contained? You
would never guess--well, it was tapioca!
"I've looked everywhere I can think of, without finding a trace of the
weed."
Just then M'Allister came into the room, and, noticing John's vicious
frown and my troubled look, asked what was wrong. We told him the news,
but he only laughed, and, turning to John, exclaimed, "Heh, John, don't
fash yourself about the tobacco, mon; we'll find you a substitute.
There's more kinds than one."
"Substitute, indeed!" said John snappishly, "no substitutes for me!"
"Well, John," I interposed, "you can have as much of my tobacco as you
like; it's a good brand, you know, and I shall not mind a shorter
allowance, for it does not mean much to me."
"No," he exclaimed sharply, "I can't take yours, Professor; it's your
own special brand!"
"Well, John," said M'Allister, "you're as welcome to mine as if it were
your own, and it's fine strong stuff too. And you can have some of my
Navy plug as well," he added with a grin; "you'll find it rare good
chewing."
"I simply cannot take the Professor's tobacco," said John; then, angrily
turning upon poor M'Allister, he cried, "And as for your filthy stuff,
it's a downright insult to offer it to me!"
"John! John!" I implored, "do be reasonable; it's not at all like you to
talk in this rude way, and you must know we really cannot go back now!"
"Reasonable!" he sneered. "Do you call it reasonable, Professor, to ask
a man who is a lover of his pipe to go all the way to Mars and stay
there for months without any tobacco!"
"Well, you will not accept mine, although you know perfectly well that
you are heartily welcome to it. It's not your own particular brand, it
is true, but it is a real good one. However, most likely you will find
some on Mars; there's plenty of vegetation on that planet, without a
doubt."
"Vegetation be hanged!" he angrily exclaimed. "What am I to do in the
meantime? As for tobacco growing upon Mars--why, sir, I'd bet my bottom
dollar that, outside our own world, there's no place in the whole
universe where anything equal to my superb mixture can be produced. It's
no use talking, Professor; as I said before, we must go back."
"We cannot go back," I replied sternly, for by this time I was becoming
very irritated at his obstinacy. "The idea of going back so many million
miles merely to fetch tobacco! Remember, we have travelled at least
57,000,000 miles on the way to our destination!"
John strode up and down, becoming more and more excited every minute,
and was soon quite raging; yet it seemed most singular that the more
John raged the more M'Allister laughed. I looked from one to the other
in amazement and the most utter perplexity at this extraordinary change
in their behaviour. Then all at once I saw a gleam of light, so to
speak, and the solution of the mystery became clear to me.
The air we had so long been breathing when in the air-chamber, and when
we made use of our air-bottles, was very similar to what is popularly
known as "laughing-gas"; and undoubtedly we were all more or less
experiencing the cumulative effects of the constant mild doses we had
inhaled. Laughing-gas acts in a different manner upon persons of
different temperaments: some will keep laughing, moderately or
immoderately; others will become irritable, angry, or even pugnacious;
whilst others again will weep copiously.
M'Allister was now talking rapidly and quietly to himself, laughing all
the while, his eyes shining and twinkling merrily as though something
intensely amusing were being enacted.
This seemed to react upon John, who apparently was irritated beyond
control, and presently he roared out, "Kenneth M'Allister, stop that
infernal grinning and chattering like a monkey! Stop it, I say! stop it
directly!" But M'Allister took no notice and laughed louder than ever.
"Why, you confounded baboon," shouted John, "you're worse than any
laughing hyena! Stop it, stop it at once, or I shall do you some
mischief!" And he advanced towards M'Allister in such a menacing
attitude that I had to rush between them to keep them apart.
He was now raging up and down the room, looking as angry as a hungry
lion which has just had a long expected dinner suddenly snatched away
from it; but the worse he became the louder M'Allister shrieked with
laughter. The latter was now simply rolling about the room--for it could
not be termed walking, it was so erratic--holding his sides and
laughing, whilst the tears were chasing each other down his cheeks. He
kept trying to speak, but had no sooner stuttered out the words, "Heh,
mon! heh, mon!" than he was off again into another wild paroxysm of
laughter, and was rapidly becoming exhausted.
Things were really becoming very serious indeed, and I saw that
something must be done at once to put an end to this disturbance. So,
going over to M'Allister, I took him gently by the shoulders and pushed
him out of the room, saying quietly, "Go to your own room at once; but
for goodness' sake don't touch the machinery until the air has had time
to put you right again. Leave me to deal with John." He rolled off
through the doorway, still laughing "fit to split" as people say.
Returning to John, I tried to calm him down; but it proved a long and
difficult task, though at last I succeeded in persuading him to go with
me into our living-room and sit down quietly.
After sitting there some time, puffing away at his pipe, the fresher air
began to have its effect; and soon I judged that he was calm enough to
talk the matter over and discuss the situation more reasonably.
Then I said: "John, my dear fellow, please listen to me. You know we
have now travelled quite 57,000,000 miles on our journey, and that all
our arrangements have been made with a view to reaching Mars not later
than the 24th of September, because it will then be at the point where
it is in opposition to the sun as seen from the earth. It is merely a
sentimental reason so far as the opposition is concerned, but there are
substantial reasons for not delaying our arrival.
"You say we must go back, but please consider all that such a course
must involve. Though the earth has been following us up pretty closely
on a slightly different course it is at the present about 13,000,000
miles away from us. You will see it out there on our left hand towards
the rear of the _Areonal_; but we cannot go direct across to where it is
now, for by the time we reached that point the earth would have gone
ahead several million miles. Our only course is to head it off, and,
taking the shortest line, that means a journey of over 12,000,000 miles.
Therefore, we cannot reach England until the 8th of September at the
earliest, and as we shall require at least a week to lay in fresh
stores, it will be the 15th before we can start again.
"Starting on the 15th September we should have to travel at least
54,000,000 miles before we could catch up Mars, and as that will take
twenty-eight days, we could not arrive there before the 13th of October.
(See the chart.)
"Thus, we must sacrifice our chance of being upon Mars on the date of
opposition, and also the opportunity of catching the first glimpse of
our earth a few days later. If we continue our journey now and reach
Mars on the 24th of September the earth will then be only 37,000,000
miles away; but by the 13th October it will be over 40,000,000 miles
distant. There is the further objection that to get back again in
reasonable time we must leave Mars by the 1st of December, and the loss
of three weeks' time will deprive us of many opportunities of learning
what there is to be found on the planet.
"Now, John, like a good fellow, just think over the matter quietly and
reasonably; you will then realise that it is quite impossible to
interrupt our journey and return to England as you suggest."
"I have thought it all out again and again," he replied, "and can only
repeat, Professor, that it is quite impossible for me to go on minus my
tobacco!"
"Was there ever such an obstinate and unreasonable man!" I thought to
myself. "What can I do to put an end to this absurd difficulty?"
[Illustration: _DIAGRAM showing the relative positions of the Earth and
Mars at the various Oppositions of Mars, from 1892 to 1924._
_Past Oppositions are shewn by the firm lines with the dates outside the
Orbit of Mars. Coming Oppositions are indicated by the dotted lines with
the dates inside the Orbit._
_The distance between any two consecutive Oppositions represents the
distance in excess of one complete revolution in its orbit passed over
by the planet since the last preceding Opposition. These distances are
greater on the left hand side because of the planet then being nearer
the Sun and consequently travelling more rapidly._
_Drawn by M. Wicks._
Plate VI]
Resuming the conversation, and keeping as calm as I could in the
circumstances, I placed the matter before him in all its aspects, and
after we had been talking together for a long time, he seemed to be able
to take a more reasonable view of the position. In order that something
might be done to keep his mind from dwelling upon his proposal to return
to England, I suggested that we should go to the store-room and
thoroughly overhaul it.
He agreed to this, accompanying me to the store-room and pointing out
the different places he had searched. The tins were in several sizes,
but all were made square in order that not an inch of the available
space might be wasted. We looked into a large number of tins which had
not previously been examined, but without finding what we wanted.
At last a thought occurred to me, and I said: "You tell me, John, that
you are quite certain you put up the tobacco and labelled the tin
yourself, yet the tin so labelled was found to contain tapioca! Do you
remember where the tapioca was stowed away?"
He pondered awhile, with his chin resting upon his fingers, then
suddenly replied, "Yes, I think I know where it is," and, taking me over
to another cupboard at the far end of the room, we made a further search
and at last found the tapioca tin, opened it, and lo, there was the
missing tobacco!
"Well, I'm blest!" said John, very slowly drawing out the words; then
all his ill-humour suddenly vanished, and he burst into a most hearty
laugh, in which I joined. Our laughter, indeed, was so mutually
contagious, and so often renewed, that we had to sit down to finish it
and recover ourselves.
Then John remarked, "Now, Professor, I think I can explain it all. You
see I prepared and labelled those confounded tins before loading them
up; so I suppose that when stowing away the parcels of tobacco I just
glanced at the label on the tin and saw the letter T followed by the
right number of other letters, and, taking it for granted that it was
the tobacco tin, placed the tobacco in it. The only other tin left to
pack was the one I supposed to be labelled 'Tapioca,' and no doubt,
without troubling to look at the label at all, I put the tapioca into
it; but, of course, it must really have been the tin labelled
'Tobacco.'"
Thus the matter was satisfactorily cleared up. John, having found his
beloved weed and recovered from the effects of our patent Martian air,
was now quite himself again, seeming very contrite, and apologising
repeatedly for his rude conduct.
"That's enough, John," I said, as I laid my hand on his arm; "it is
quite clear that what you did was mainly the result of the peculiar air
you had been breathing, so I cannot blame you much. If I had not taken
so many intervals in the purer air, I might perhaps have been equally
affected; as it was, my temper was none of the sweetest."
M'Allister had also quite recovered by this time, and bore no ill-will
towards John; indeed, I doubt whether he had any very clear recollection
of what had occurred.
So that ended the matter; and this little explosion having cleared the
air, we all settled down to our old amicable relationship. We, however,
took the precaution of reducing the amount of nitrous-oxide gas in our
mixture of air, with a view to preventing any similar untoward results
in future.
CHAPTER IX
A NARROW ESCAPE FROM DESTRUCTION--I GIVE SOME PARTICULARS ABOUT MARS AND
MARTIAN DISCOVERY
Things now went on quietly and, in fact, rather monotonously for several
days; and then we met with another rather startling experience.
We were all sitting together in our living-room on the 9th of September,
whiling away the time in a game of whist, and, as it was the final
rubber and we were running very close together, we were quite absorbed
in the play; although, of course, it was a dummy game.
Suddenly we heard a most tremendous crash, apparently from the
right-hand side of the air-chamber, the vessel giving a violent lurch
sideways, then shivering and trembling from end to end. The crash was
immediately followed by a sharp rattling on the top and side of the
_Areonal_, just as though a fusillade of good-sized bullets had been
fired at us.
"My word! whatever's that?--one of the cylinders must have exploded,"
cried M'Allister, jumping up in alarm and running into the air-chamber.
We followed him, and looked all round the room at the different machines
and apparatus, but could find nothing wrong.
John, chancing to look up, however, at once noticed a large bulge on
the inner shell of the vessel, high up on the right-hand side; and then,
turning to me, pointed it out, saying, "I think, Professor, it is pretty
clear now what has happened."
"Yes, that huge bulge explains itself," I replied; "undoubtedly a
fair-sized meteoric stone has collided with our vessel. It is very
fortunate that the stone was not much larger, or there would have been
an end to the _Areonal_ and to us as well. These meteorites travel at
such tremendous speed that, on entering the earth's atmosphere, they
become incandescent owing to the friction of the air, and, unless very
large, are entirely consumed and dissipated into dust before they can
reach the earth. Those that do fall are always partially fused on the
outside by the tremendous heat generated by the friction of our
atmosphere. These meteorites are what people call 'shooting stars,' and
many are under the impression that they really are stars, until the
difference is explained to them."
John said, "We ought to congratulate ourselves upon such a lucky escape
from annihilation; for had our vessel been constructed of any metal less
hard and tough than our 'martalium,' and without a double and packed
shell, it must have been wrecked and entirely destroyed by the shock of
the tremendous concussion it had sustained. Even the very metal of the
casing might have been completely melted by the intense heat generated
by the impact of the meteorite."
"Heh, mon!" exclaimed M'Allister; "it's all very well talking about our
lucky escape, and putting it all down to your own cleverness in
designing and constructing the _Areonal_; but you should rather give
thanks to Providence for saving us, and for enabling you to take the
precautions you did. I say, 'Thank God!'" he remarked, and he solemnly
raised his right hand as he spoke.
"Quite right, M'Allister," replied John: "we are all too prone to credit
ourselves with more than we are entitled to. At the same time,
M'Allister, you must remember that we Englishmen recognise as fully as
you do the over-ruling power of Providence, although we may not be quite
so free in speaking about it in ordinary conversation."
"Yes," I added, "you may be quite sure, M'Allister, that we are equally
as grateful as yourself for the mercy which has preserved us all from an
awful death. My very first thought on realising our extremely narrow
escape from destruction was to say 'Thank God!' but I did not say it
aloud as you did. It is in matters like these that people differ
according to their temperament and training; and it is not safe to judge
another because, in any particular circumstances, he does not act in
precisely the same way as we ourselves would."
Thus we travelled on and on, each day bringing us more than two million
miles nearer to our destination. Mars was apparently increasing in
diameter the nearer we drew to it, and the dark blue line around the
south polar snow-cap, indicating the lake of water from the melting
snow, was very conspicuous. The snow-cap had recently decreased rapidly,
being now near its minimum and irregular in shape, for in the southern
hemisphere it was now late in June. Pointing to the planet, I remarked,
"There is our destination! We see it now as the poet pictured it for us,
and the words of Dr. Oliver Wendell Holmes are very appropriate to the
present circumstances:
'The snow that glittered on the disc of Mars
Has melted, and the planet's fiery orb
Rolls in the crimson summer of its year!'"
On the 18th of September we passed between the earth and Mars, nearly in
a line with the sun. On that date Mars was in perigee, or at its nearest
point to the earth during the present year. Its distance from the earth
was then 36,100,000 miles, and it will not be so close again until the
24th of August 1924. We could not see the earth, as its dark side was
turned towards us, and it was also lost in the brilliancy of the sun.
At this date we had travelled 88,000,000 miles since we left the earth,
yet we knew it was there, level with our vessel, and only about
29,000,000 miles distant on our left hand, whilst Mars was only
7,000,000 miles from us on our right-hand side.
Our position now was as follows:--Taking an imaginary line drawn from
the _Areonal_ to Mars as the base line of an isosceles triangle, we were
moving along the left side of the triangle, and Mars was moving in a
slightly curved line along the right side. Our paths were therefore
converging, and if all went well we should both meet at the apex of the
triangle on the 24th September, as we had originally intended.
We therefore had six clear days to cover the distance of less than
12,000,000 miles, so we should have sufficient time to slacken speed at
the end of the journey. (See the chart.)
Mars was rapidly growing in size and brightness, for the distance
between the planet and the _Areonal_ was quickly diminishing as our
paths converged, and the various markings on its almost full round disc
formed the subject of continual observation and conversation. We had
noticed on several occasions a mistiness on some parts of the planet,
which I attributed to the vapours raised from the canals by the heated
atmosphere.
On the 21st of September, when we were all enjoying a smoke in the
"evening," and conversation had dragged somewhat, John started us off on
a fresh tack and gave us something to talk about for a very long time.
He winked at M'Allister and, looking at me with a knowing smile, said:
"Professor, as we are nearing our destination it might perhaps be well
if you now gave us some detailed information respecting the planet,
similar to that which you gave us when we were approaching the moon. It
would be both interesting and useful; for we should learn much more from
an orderly statement of the facts than we should from several long but
desultory conversations."
"Yes, Professor," chimed in M'Allister, "I'm quite ready to learn
something definite about Mars, for I can't say I really know much about
it at present."
"Very well then," I replied, "it is upon your own heads, and if you are
willing to listen to a rather long story, I am prepared to do the
talking. Please remember, however, that it will require some time to
make matters clear and understandable."
"Fire away, mon," cried M'Allister, "we will listen as long as you care
to talk."
So I began--"Mars, as no doubt you are aware, is a much smaller planet
than the earth, its diameter being only 4220 miles, which is a little
less than twice the diameter of our moon.
"It would require nine and a half globes the size of Mars to make one
globe the size of the earth; and even then it would not be so heavy,
because the average density of Mars is only about three-fourths of that
of the earth. Mars is the next planet outside the earth's orbit, so is
the fourth from the sun. The orbit in which Mars moves in its journey
round the sun is very much more eccentric than the earth's orbit; in
fact it is more eccentric than the orbits of any of the larger planets.
As a consequence, the planet's distance from the sun varies greatly
according to the particular part of the orbit in which it may be moving.
Its mean distance from the sun is 141,500,000 miles, its greatest
distance over 154,000,000, and at its nearest approach to the sun, or
'perihelion,' as it is called, its distance is only 129,500,000 miles.
Mars travels in its orbit at a mean rate of 15 miles a second.
"As its orbit is also eccentrically placed in relation to the earth's
orbit, it follows that its nearest distance from us in any particular
years may vary greatly. The nearest possible approach it can make in
regard to the earth is a little under 35,000,000 miles; when at the
opposite point of its orbit its nearest approach is about 62,000,000
miles from the earth. As the years of Mars and the earth differ greatly
in length, and the two planets move at different speeds, the very
favourable oppositions can only occur about once every forty-five years;
though a comparatively near opposition occurs about every fifteen years.
Such a close approach we have just witnessed, and it will be fifteen
years before Mars is again so near to the earth!
[Illustration: _CHART: showing the Orbits of the Earth and Mars, and
the relative positions of the two Planets, during the years 1909-10.
Mars passed over the dotted portion of its Orbit in the year 1910._
_The Outer Circle is the Orbit of Mars, and the inner Circle is the
Orbit of the Earth. The Seasonal points on both Orbits show the Seasons
in the Northern hemisphere. In the Southern hemisphere the Seasons are
reversed, "Summer" occurring at the point marked "Winter," and "Spring"
at the point marked "Autumn," &c. &c._
_The dotted downward line on the left-hand side shows the course taken
by the "Areonal", which left the Earth on the 3rd of August and
arrived at Mars on the 24th of September. * Shows the point reached
when John wished to turn back; and the lower dotted line, the
alternative course then suggested._
_The long dotted line running upwards to the Spring Equinox of the Earth
shows the course taken on the homeward Voyage._
_Drawn by M. Wicks._
Plate VII]
"The Martian year is equal to 687 of our days, but as the Martian days
are slightly longer than ours, this really represents 668 Martian days.
"The entire surface of Mars contains an area of about 56,000,000 square
miles, which is about one-fourth of the area of the earth's surface.
"Its gravity is only three-eighths of the earth's gravity, thus
everything upon Mars would weigh proportionately lighter than on the
earth, and the amount of labour required to do such work as digging or
lifting would be lessened. There would, for the same reason, be greater
ease of movement in walking, jumping, or running, and large bulky
animals like our elephants could move with almost the same ease and
freedom as our goats.
"Theoretically, we should expect to find the atmosphere upon Mars very
much thinner than our atmosphere, and actual observation proves this to
be the case. We are able to see details on the surface of Mars with very
much greater distinctness than would be the case if its atmosphere were
as dense as ours. Moreover, clouds are comparatively rarely seen; and
the majority that are observed present more the appearance of clouds of
sand than rain clouds. Usually, also, they float very much higher above
the planet's surface than our clouds are above the earth's surface; ten
miles high is quite an ordinary altitude, and some have been estimated
as quite thirty miles above the planet.
"Many theorists have attempted to prove that, owing to the planet's
distance from the sun, and the thinness of its atmosphere, the
temperature of Mars must be very low, probably below freezing-point even
at the equator. Dr. Alfred Russel Wallace has gone further than this,
and suggests that the temperature must be eighty degrees Centigrade
below freezing-point; that there is no water or water vapour on the
planet; and that it is quite impossible for life to exist there!
"However, as the result of delicate bolometric experiments, careful
calculations, and consideration of conditions affecting the result which
have not previously received so much attention, Professor Very has
arrived at a different opinion; and actual observation has shown that
there is very little indication of frost outside the frigid zones. Even
in the polar regions it is at times evidently warmer than at the earth's
poles, because during the spring and summer the snow-caps upon Mars not
only melt more rapidly, but melt to a much greater extent than our polar
caps do. In 1894 the southern polar snow-cap of Mars was observed almost
continuously during the melting period, and it was actually observed to
dwindle and dwindle until it had entirely disappeared. It is rather
strange to think that we know more about the snow-caps of that
far-distant world than we do about those on our own earth.
"Owing to the lesser gravity on Mars the snow and ice which forms the
caps would certainly be lighter and less closely compacted than the snow
and ice upon our earth; but it is quite clear that it could not melt to
any extent unless the temperature remained above freezing-point for a
considerable length of time.
"It has, however, seriously been contended that the Martian polar caps
are not snow at all, but frozen carbon dioxide--the poisonous dregs of
what once was an atmosphere. Carbon dioxide, however, melts and becomes
gaseous almost suddenly, but these polar snow-caps melt gradually,
exactly as frozen snow would; so this theory fails altogether to fit the
circumstances.
"Moreover, the water which accumulates all round the base of the melting
snow-cap has been carefully observed on many occasions, and in the early
stage of melting it appears blue in tint, but later on, as upper layers
of snow dissolve and those nearer the soil are reached, the water
presents a turbid and muddy appearance; exactly what might be expected
when water has been contaminated by the surface soil.
"Dr. Alfred Russel Wallace declines to accept the blue tint as any proof
that the liquid is water, and contends that shallow water would not
appear that colour when viewed from a distance. You will, however, have
observed that the water in all our shallow reservoirs appears intensely
blue when observed from any distant and elevated point of view. It seems
to me that when, as in the case of Mars, we have a very thin atmosphere
laden with sand particles, we have exactly the conditions which would
produce a very blue sky, and cause the water to appear a deep blue
colour when viewed from a distance.
"It is also contended that water cannot be present on Mars, because none
of our skilled spectroscopists has yet been able to demonstrate by the
spectroscope that there is any water vapour in the Martian atmosphere.
"This, however, is generally acknowledged to be a very difficult and
delicate operation; and, in any case, it is purely negative evidence,
and cannot be accepted as final. I feel quite confident that sooner or
later a means will be found of definitely proving the presence of water
vapour upon Mars by the aid of the usual lines in the spectrum. There
are too many evidences of its presence, such as clouds, hoarfrost, snow,
and seasonal changes in vegetation, to warrant the rejection of the idea
of its existence merely because it has not been detected by the
particular means hitherto used by the spectroscopists.
"Mr. Slipher, of Flagstaff Observatory, has made many experiments with
specially sensitised photographic plates. He has taken several
photographs of the spectrum of the moon and others of the spectrum of
the planet Mars. The plates of the lunar spectrum show a darkening of
the 'a' band, which indicates the presence of water vapour, and we know
that is due to the water vapour in our own atmosphere. The plates of the
spectrum of Mars show a much more definite darkening of the 'a' band,
and Professor Lowell contends that this can only be due to water vapour
in the atmosphere of Mars.
"Professor Campbell has, however, made similar experiments, and is of
opinion that Professor Lowell has been deceived by the water vapour in
our own atmosphere. Thus the matter stands at the present time, and we
must await the result of further investigation before we can consider
the matter settled.
"I, however, regard it as a certainty that improved means will
definitely show that water vapour undoubtedly exists in the Martian
atmosphere, and it is not unlikely that other constituents of that
atmosphere may also be identified, and possibly even the relative
quantities may be ascertained."
John here remarked that he had read of it being contended that life
could not exist on Mars because as water would boil at a temperature a
hundred degrees lower than it did on the earth, it would be impossible
to boil a potato properly, or make a good cup of tea. He thought,
however, that if water boiled at such a low temperature, then the
proportion of water vapour in the air would be increased, as evaporation
would be more rapid than on the earth.
"Undoubtedly so," I replied. "The first argument, however, is very weak.
For many thousands of years the people on the earth not only managed to
live, but attained a high state of civilisation, yet we have no reason
to believe that they ever ate potatoes or drank tea! Even in England we
have only known and used these articles for about three hundred years!
The inhabitants of any world would be suited to their environments.
"The polar-caps on Mars are shown on very early drawings of the planet;
but, up to the year 1877, little was known of the general surface
details beyond the fact that the general colour was orange-red,
diversified by dark patches of blue-green in some parts, and some
narrow, serpentine markings here and there. All these markings are now
much more accurately drawn, as the result of more careful and continuous
observation. Sir William Herschel suggested that the red colour was
attributable to the vegetation of Mars being red, instead of green as on
our earth; but it was generally considered that the red areas indicated
land and the dark areas water. The work of our modern observers has,
however, resulted in a general revision of our ideas on these points.
"It had long been reasoned that, as the earth was accompanied by a
moon, and Jupiter had at least four, Mars, the intermediate planet,
might be expected to possess a satellite. The planet itself being small,
its moon would probably be very small, and likely to be overlooked when
observing with the telescope, because its light would be overpowered by
the light of the planet, which would make the telescopic field of view
very bright. Up to the year 1877 the most powerful instruments had been
used without success in the search for the supposed satellite.
"In that year Mars made an exceptionally near approach to the earth, and
Professor Asaph Hall, of Washington Observatory, took up the search,
using a splendid refracting telescope having an object-glass 26 inches
in diameter. The methods he adopted were rewarded with success, for he
discovered not only one, but two satellites of Mars, and they were given
the names of Phobos and Deimos.
"Both these satellites are very close to the planet and extremely small,
Phobos being less than 4000 miles from the planet's surface, and Deimos
only 12,300 miles from it. As seen in the telescope, they are very faint
points of light which cannot be measured by ordinary means, and the
estimation of their size was a matter of great difficulty.
"Professor Langley gives an interesting account of the endeavour to
estimate their size by the amount of light reflected, as compared with
the light afforded by our own moon when full. It was a most difficult
task, as the comparison had to be made by means of tiny holes drilled in
metal plates; and for a long time it was impossible to find a workman
who could drill a hole sufficiently small for the purpose, although one
of those employed had succeeded in drilling a hole through a lady's thin
cambric needle from end to end, thus converting it into a tiny steel
tube. One would have thought such a feat impossible; yet what was now
required was a hole smaller than the one thus made through the tiny
needle."
"My word!" said M'Allister, "I would like to see the mon who did that
piece of work, and shake hands with him; he must be a rare clever
fellow!"
"Yes," said John, "and I would like to see the drill he used; for such a
long and extremely slender tool, to be effective, must be as clever a
piece of work as the steel tube."
"I may tell you," I proceeded, "that success was at last attained; and
as a result of the comparison of our moon's light with that of Deimos,
it was shown that if the general surface brightness of the latter were
equal to that of our moon, then Deimos must be only 18 miles in
diameter, or about a 15,000th part of the area of our moon's disc.
"To state the matter in another way--supposing our moon were only 18
miles in diameter, and was removed to the same distance as Deimos is
from us, then it would appear only the very faint point of light that
Deimos appears when viewed through the telescope.
"By the same means Phobos, the satellite nearest to Mars, was estimated
to be about 22-1/2 miles in diameter. These dimensions, however, depend
on the brightness of these satellites being exactly the same as the
general brightness of our moon; and later experiments have fixed the
sizes as 36 miles for Phobos, and 10 miles as the diameter of Deimos.
"I will not detain you much longer on this subject, as we shall be able
to discuss it further when we arrive upon Mars; but I may now mention
that, in one respect, the little satellite named Phobos is unique. It is
the only satellite we know of which revolves round its primary planet in
less time than it takes the planet itself to make one revolution on its
axis.[6]
"Mars revolves on its axis in 24 hours, 37 minutes, and 22 seconds, thus
the 'day' on Mars is nearly 38 minutes longer than our 'day.' Phobos
revolves round the planet in the very short period of 7 hours, 39
minutes, and 14 seconds, and therefore makes more than three complete
revolutions round the planet in the course of a single Martian day. The
peculiar phenomena to which this very rapid motion gives rise, and the
numerous eclipses which occur, will be matters of great interest to us
all when we reach Mars. Our moon, as you know, takes a month to make one
revolution round the earth."
"Professor," said John, "when we get to Mars, it will be rather a
curious experience for us to see two moons shining in the sky at the
same time!"
"My word!" exclaimed M'Allister, "two moons shining at once! If I go out
and see such a sight as that, I shall think the whisky has been a wee
bit too strong for me!"
"Well," replied John, "if your usual drink has the effect of making you
see double, take good advice, and leave the whisky severely alone when
you are on Mars, or else you will be seeing _four_ moons all at once,
and receive such a shock that you will never get over it!"
M'Allister laughed pleasantly as John said this. He is a real good
fellow, and takes all John's chaff with the utmost good-humour; but, in
justice to him, I must say that, although he sticks to his national
drink like a true Scot, I have never once seen him any the worse for it.
He knows his limitations, and always keeps within them.
CHAPTER X
THE DISCOVERY OF LINES UPON MARS--THE GREAT MARTIAN CONTROVERSY
After the little interlude with M'Allister, I resumed my remarks by
saying that "The year 1877, so memorable for the near approach of Mars
and the discovery of its two tiny satellites, was also the year in which
a still more important discovery was made--a discovery, in fact, which
has much enlarged our knowledge of the planet, and has also resulted in
an entire revision of our conceptions respecting it.
"An Italian astronomer, Signor Schiaparelli, took advantage of the
favourable position of Mars to observe it very carefully, and some time
afterwards announced that he had seen upon its surface a number of very
fine lines which had not previously been noticed, and these he had
carefully charted upon his drawings and maps.
"This announcement started one of the most acrimonious discussions that
the astronomical world has ever known; and although it is now over
thirty years since it commenced, astronomers are still divided into two
parties--one accepting the lines as demonstrated facts, the other either
denying their existence, or endeavouring to explain them away by various
more or less ingenious or fanciful theories.
[Illustration: _From a Globe made by M. Wicks_ Plate VIII
MARS. MAP I
In all these maps the south is at the top. The dark shaded portions are
vegetation, mostly on old sea-beds. The fine lines are the canals, and
the round dots the oases. The light areas are deserts. Longitude "0" is
seen on the Equator between the two forks of the "Sabaeus Sinus."]
"When Signor Schiaparelli's statements and drawings were first
discussed, it was declared by some to be quite impossible that these
fine lines could really have been seen by him: either his eyes must have
been overstrained, or he claimed to see more than he actually did see.
So warm did the discussion become that he soon withdrew from it
altogether, but devoted himself to his work. As time went on, he not
only verified his previous discoveries, but found numerous fresh lines,
all of which appeared to run straight and true over many hundreds of
miles on the planet.
"Milan then had a good clear atmosphere which was favourable for the
observation of delicate planetary markings, and other observers who were
well situated were able to see and draw many of the lines which
Schiaparelli had discovered.
"It was, however, contended that such lines could not have any real
existence, as it was asserted that they were too straight. It is quite
true that straight lines on a rotating globe would appear curved when
seen from some points of view, but if the objectors had carefully
studied complete sets of drawings, they would have seen that the lines
did assume a curved form in certain aspects of the planet.
"Then the very same people who denied the actuality of the lines because
they were too straight, eagerly took up a suggestion that they were not
actually narrow lines, but the edges of diffused shadings on the planet,
apparently quite oblivious of the fact that the same objections must
apply to them. Moreover, if there was difficulty in accepting the
actuality of narrow lines, there must be immensely greater difficulty in
believing that shadings could, in such a very large number of cases, all
end in straight lines many hundreds or thousands of miles long, and
always appear uniformly true, no matter upon what portion of the disc
they might be seen, and whatever might be the angle of illumination.
"Besides, only a small proportion of the lines are connected with
shadings. The shadings are more likely to be the result of the canals
than the cause of the formation of illusory lines in so many cases.
"I have listened to many of these discussions, and have often been much
amused at the tangle of inconsistencies in which some have involved
themselves, by taking up fresh theories without regard to their previous
contentions.
"As time went on each opposition of Mars brought the discovery of fresh
lines, and numerous observers confirmed the reality of Schiaparelli's
work.
"Professor Lowell, the well-known American astronomer, took up the study
of Mars in a most thorough and systematic manner, and has since
practically made it his life's work. An observatory was built at
Flagstaff, Arizona, far away from towns and smoke, at an altitude of
over 6000 feet above the sea-level, the site being specially selected on
account of the clearness and purity of its atmosphere; while the
observatory, being high up above the denser and more disturbed strata of
air, afforded the most favourable situation possible for the proper
observation of delicate planetary detail.
"There he continued the work which Schiaparelli had commenced, and,
together with the colleagues with whom he has been associated, has, by
long-continued and most systematic work, added greatly to our knowledge
of Mars. Year after year has seen the addition of more lines on our maps
of the planet, whilst many interesting discoveries have been made--one
being that some of the fine lines were double, the second line always
being equidistant from the first one throughout its whole length, no
matter whether the lines were straight or curved.
"This caused a further outcry of objection. The observers were told that
they had been overstraining their eyesight so that they 'saw double,'
and also that they had been using telescopes not properly focussed. Such
objections seem almost beyond argument, for no practical observer could
use an improperly focussed instrument without at once discovering the
defect.
"Besides, if the double lines were the result of eye-strain, or any
other defect which might cause such illusions, all the lines would have
been seen double, or at least all the lines running at the same angles;
but as a matter of fact only a very small proportion of the lines were
so seen, and it made no difference what position they occupied on the
disc, or at what angles they were presented. Some of the doubles were,
in fact, curved lines; and another point was that in some cases they
were only doubled at certain seasons of the year.
"Other observers who saw the lines were charged with having studied the
maps of Schiaparelli and Lowell until they had become obsessed with the
lines, and when they looked through the telescope simply fancied they
saw them!
"In England our atmospheric conditions are seldom really favourable to
the proper seeing of the finer detail, and the very faint lines cannot
be seen at all. The lines that are visible do not appear thin and sharp
as they do to observers in more favoured climes, but rather as diffused
smudgy lines, and so they are drawn by the observers. On a few
occasions of exceptionally good seeing they have, however, been seen and
drawn as finer and sharper lines.
"The visibility of the lines was, however, confirmed by so many
observers of known integrity, and from so many different parts of the
world, that the objectors were at last compelled to abandon the position
they had occupied. Then a new theory was started, viz. that the lines
were actually seen but did not actually exist, being really optical
illusions arising from the apparent integration, or running together in
linear form, of various small disconnected markings which were viewed
from beyond the distance of clear seeing.
"The manner in which it was sought to prove the correctness of this
theory appeared to me at the time (and still does so) as most weak and
fallacious, and certain experiments I made only strengthened that
opinion. However, scientific people accepted it as proof.
"In making this experiment schoolboys were seated in rows at different
measured distances from a map of Mars, which they were told to copy. The
map showed all the well-known dark patches and markings, but no fine
lines. About the places where some of those lines should have been,
dots, curls, wisps, &c., were inserted at irregular distances, and not
always exactly where the lines should have been shown. The inevitable
result was that the boys who were too far away to see clearly saw these
small markings as continuous straight lines, and so drew them. In the
circumstances they could not do otherwise; for if sufficient marks were
inserted nearly in alignment, they would necessarily produce the effect
of lines.
"These drawings were then acclaimed as _proving_ that the lines seen on
Mars were only discrete markings viewed from beyond the distance of
clear seeing, and that the network of lines seen and drawn by so many
skilled and careful observers of Mars had no actual existence upon the
planet. Thus all their work was completely discredited.
"Experiments like these could not possibly prove any such thing, because
it would be easy to insert in a map various markings which, when viewed
from a distance, would appear to form almost any design that one might
choose to depict. Any desired effect might thus be obtained; and I have
seen many pictures so formed in which the illusion was perfect. When
viewed from a distance each appeared to be a picture of something
entirely different from what was seen when it was viewed from a near
standpoint.
"The linear illusion could not arise from a mere multiplicity of faint
scattered markings, but all the more conspicuous markings must be in
alignment. It seems impossible to imagine that so many hundreds of lines
on Mars could thus fortuitously be formed by illusion, and _every_ line
be connected to some definite point at each end.
"To argue that because illusory lines can be formed as in these
experiments proves that the Martian lines are also illusions is claiming
far too much. For instance, if I drew what was actually a map of South
Africa, and was so seen at close quarters, yet in consequence of the
insertion of numerous small marks and shadings formed a portrait of Lord
Blank when viewed from a distance, it would be very far indeed from
proving that every map of South Africa was a portrait of the noble lord,
or that his portraits were all maps of South Africa.
"Moreover, as I myself saw, some of the boys were so unskilled that they
had not even drawn correctly the outlines of the dark patches about
which there was no dispute.
"It is obvious that such erroneous and unreliable work as this could not
be regarded as evidence upon which truly scientific argument could be
founded for the purpose of deciding such a contentious question; yet
mainly upon this very slender and unreliable evidence meetings of two of
our leading astronomical associations endorsed the illusion theory, and
for a long time it held the field.
"M. Flammarion made some similar experiments in Paris, and even inserted
spaced dots along the sites of canal lines on the map put up as a copy,
yet not one boy drew a canal. M. Flammarion evidently was rather too
sparing with his dots and marks.
"A long series of experiments was carefully carried out by Professor
Lowell and his colleagues, from which it was deduced that if in any line
on Mars there was a gap of sixteen miles in length, our present
telescopes would suffice to discover it. It is most improbable that in
so many hundreds of lines, several of which are over two thousand miles
in length, there would not be numerous gaps over sixteen miles long if
the lines were made up of separate markings.
"Yet it is found that every line is perfect in its continuity, and not
only so, but uniform in width throughout its whole length, which would
be impossible if the lines were made up of separate markings not in
alignment.
"The illusion theory may, however, to a certain extent be correct, but
this will prove exactly the opposite of what its supporters contend. It
appears to have been quite overlooked that as there are so many
thousands of miles of canals it is utterly impossible to suppose that
the vegetation, which is all that we really see, is continuous and
without breaks. It would indeed be most extraordinary if there were not
very many long stretches of land which, for some natural or utilitarian
reasons, were either bare of vegetation or so sparsely covered as to
appear bare when viewed from the earth through a telescope. Some parts
of the canals in hilly or rocky ground may pass through tunnels, and
thus cause apparent gaps in the lines; or ground may be incapable of
bearing vegetation, or purposely left fallow.
"It would, therefore, be no matter of surprise if more powerful
instruments should, in moments of perfect seeing, reveal numerous
apparent gaps in the lines. So far from proving they were not canals,
such gaps are exactly what we should expect to find in connection with
canals; and the lines would probably appear as irregular light and dark
patches in alignment, because we do not see the canals themselves, but
only the vegetation on the land which they traverse. Probably there are
also many oases yet to be discovered along the canal lines.
"As I have already stated, it was asserted that the double lines were
illusions arising from the causes already mentioned, with the probable
addition of eye-strain and bad focussing. Assuming that the single lines
are, as it is declared, illusions, we are confronted with the
assumption that the doubles are illusions of illusions, and this is more
than I can follow, it seems so improbable.
"Professor Lowell has devoted some sixteen years to close and continuous
observation of Mars whenever it has been in a position to be observed,
and many thousands of drawings have been made, the results being plotted
down on a globe. In reply to the statements of occasional observers that
the lines cannot be seen, he testifies that they are not difficult to
see; and that any one who saw them in his exceptionally good atmosphere,
and through his instruments, could have no doubt of their actuality. He
rather caustically, but very justly, remarks in one of his books that
his many years of personal experience in viewing these lines almost
entitle him to an opinion on the subject equal to those who have had
none at all!
"The proof of their existence, however, no longer rests only on the
corroborative evidence of other observers, for, after years of
experiment, Professor Lowell and his staff have succeeded in taking
direct photographs of Mars, which show several of the disputed lines.
One would have thought that would settle the question, but, although
some of the more reasonable of the objectors have been convinced by the
evidence of the photographs, many others still maintain their attitude
of scepticism, especially those who have not themselves seen the
photographs. They declare it to be quite impossible for any such
photographs to be taken, because our atmosphere would prevent any
photographic definition of fine detail on such small pictures; yet about
ten thousand of these tiny photographs were taken during the near
approach of Mars in 1907.
"As I possess a number of these photographs I can testify that they do
show some of the lines, and persons who disbelieved have expressed
surprise at their excellence. Success was only obtained by means of
specially sensitised plates, for the ordinary photographic rays and
ordinary plates were found useless, whilst the process of photographing
so small and distant a planet is surrounded with difficulties.
"Even when attached to a telescope giving an equivalent focal length of
nearly 150 feet, the camera only gives a very tiny image of the planet.
The lighting of the small image is faint, but if additional power were
used on the telescope to obtain a larger image, then its light must be
still fainter, and thus a longer exposure would be required to obtain a
picture on the plate. As Mars moves in its orbit and rotates on its
axis, and our atmosphere is subject to continual movement and
disturbance, any long exposure would result in a blurred picture, which
would show no fine detail. So, as a short exposure is essential, only a
small picture can be taken. Nothing is gained by any subsequent great
enlargement of the picture, because the grain of the film of a quick
plate is coarse; and, if enlarged, this also blurs out the detail.
"Having regard to all the difficulties which had to be surmounted, it
was a great and undoubted triumph to secure detail on such tiny
photographs of this distant world. As time goes on improvements will
probably be effected and still better pictures secured; but enough has
now been accomplished to prove that the lines cannot be illusions, but
really exist upon the planet. If the eye can be deceived in this
respect, the camera cannot.
"When Professor Lowell first took up the work of Martian observation
only 113 lines had been discovered by Schiaparelli, but the number has
gradually been added to from time to time, as the result of the work
done at Flagstaff Observatory and elsewhere, and has now reached a total
of considerably more than 600, the lines forming a fine network
extending all over the planet.
"Mr. Slipher, who accompanied Professor Todd's expedition to Alianza in
Chili, at the opposition of 1907, together with the observers at
Flagstaff, discovered no less than 85 new canals, including some
doubles, nearly all being in the more southern portions of the southern
hemisphere.
"In addition to the discovery of so many fine lines, we also owe to the
acumen of Professor Lowell a reasonable explanation of what they really
are. Schiaparelli termed them 'canali,' an Italian term for 'channels,'
but, popularly, this soon became corrupted into the term 'canals,' and
this has turned out to be a much more appropriate word than such
corruptions usually are.
[Illustration: _From a Globe made by M. Wicks_ Plate IX
MARS. MAP II
The Solis Lacus is seen as an oval patch near the top, and many long
canals, some double, are shown. A very large proportion of the area on
this map is desert land.]
CHAPTER XI
THE GREAT MARTIAN CONTROVERSY (_continued_)
"As the result of very long continued and systematic observation of the
lines on Mars, together with carefully plotting them down on a globe, it
was found that every line was continuous, uniform in width, and went
straight from one definite point to another, not one breaking off in
open space. Moreover, on being tested, nearly all were found to be arcs
of great circles, and therefore the shortest possible lines which could
connect any two points on a sphere. This fact strongly supports the idea
that they are not natural but artificial formations. For a long time the
lines were only seen on the red, or lighter, parts of the planet, but in
1892 an expedition was sent from Harvard Observatory to Arequipa, in
Peru, for the purpose of observing the planet under very favourable
conditions, and this resulted in important discoveries. Professor W.H.
Pickering, who accompanied the expedition, was fortunate enough to
observe that the canal lines extended over the dark or blue-green
portions of the disc; and later observations have proved that this is
the case all over the planet, and the lines are visible from pole to
pole.
"These observations also led Professor Pickering to the important
conclusion that all the dark areas were covered with vegetation, and
that the bright or red areas were deserts, the colour of the latter
being exactly that of our deserts when viewed from a great distance.
Herschel's idea had been that the red areas were land covered with
vegetation of a red colour, and that the dark areas were seas.
"It was, however, now quite clear that permanent lines in such numbers
and length could not exist in seas; and other observations have
demonstrated that, instead of appearing smooth and uniform as water
would, these areas are full of detail and variations, and that they pass
through all the changes of colour, according to seasons, that land
covered with vegetation does upon our earth. In the winter time, when
the land is fallow, it appears brown or chocolate colour; in the spring,
the time of early vegetation, it becomes a pale blue-green tint; as the
season advances the blue-green becomes darker; whilst in the autumn it
tends to a light brown, and at length changes into chocolate colour in
the winter. This has been carefully noted time after time when the
planet has been in a position to be observed; and the same sequence of
change--which can only be associated with vegetation--has always
occurred.
"It may, therefore, now be accepted as a proved fact that the dark areas
are land upon which vegetation grows, ripens, and dies away according to
the seasons of the Martian year.
"Professor Pickering also made another discovery, viz. a large number of
isolated, round, darkish spots, most of which occurred where canal lines
joined or crossed each other. Some of these had been seen much earlier
by other observers, but Professor Pickering was the first to see them in
large numbers and call attention to them. He termed them 'lakes,' but
later discoveries from continued observation showed that they were not
water, and they were then given the name of 'oases.' Some are seventy or
eighty miles in diameter, and nearly two hundred are now marked on the
maps. They mostly occur in certain definite positions--in the point
where single canals join or cross each other, or, in the case of double
canals, between the two lines. It has been noted that they undergo the
same seasonal changes as the dark areas do, but only as regards the
outer portion of the circle, which gradually fades away in the latter
part of the Martian year; whilst the central portion becomes fainter but
does not disappear.
"Of course it was at once declared that these oases were illusions which
would naturally be seen where two lines crossed each other and were
viewed from a great distance. But they only occur in some cases at such
crossings, and there are many junctions without any oases. Moreover,
they are also seen between the double canals where there are no
junctions nor anything which could give rise to illusion.
"At Flagstaff Observatory it was also noted that the canal lines
themselves underwent seasonal changes. Those viewed during the winter
season were always so faint as to be scarcely discernible, but at the
period when vegetation would naturally begin to grow they became more
easily visible, and still more distinct as the season advanced.
"Then Professor Lowell announced his great conception, which has given
rise to so much controversy, and has also been much misunderstood and
misrepresented.
"Briefly, his conclusions were as follows:--'Science teaches that a
small planet will become cool and develop life much sooner than a large
one. Similarly a small iron casting will become cool in a few days,
whilst a large one will be many weeks or even months in cooling. A small
planet will also develop more rapidly, and reach its final stage when it
will be incapable of supporting life, very long before a larger planet
like our earth will have reached that stage. Applying this to Mars, a
much smaller planet than our earth, it is scientifically reasoned that
Mars has passed through nearly all its stages and is approaching its
last. It has lost much of its atmosphere, all its large bodies of water,
such as oceans or seas, and, as regards the land, that has become
levelled by erosion, and about five-eighths of the whole area has become
desert.
"'Science also shows that in such circumstances rain would cease to fall
over the larger part of the planet, but the water vapour in the air
would be carried by natural circulatory currents of air to the polar
regions, and there deposited in the form of snow or hoarfrost, thus
forming a large snow-cap at the north pole in one season of the year,
and a still larger snow-cap at the south pole in the opposite portion of
the year.
"'These snow-caps would begin to melt in the spring as soon as the tilt
of the planet brought the pole to the position where the sun would take
effect, and would continue during the early summer. As there is no
permanent glaciation on a planet which has lost its water, the snow-cap
would melt to a very large extent, and the resultant water must go
somewhere.
"'The inhabitants of the planet could not exist without water, and
their land would become entirely desert unless supplied with moisture.
It will, therefore, be seen that the only thing possible, as a means of
self-preservation, would be for them to make channels to carry the water
in the most economical way from the poles to the parts where it was
needed. Unless they found a means of doing this death stared them in the
face. What greater incentive could there be!'
"This is what Professor Lowell is convinced has actually been
accomplished upon Mars, with the result that there is a network of
canals all over the planet by which water is conveyed from each pole and
carried across from one hemisphere into the other. The lines seen show
where the canals are, but not the canals themselves, because they are
too narrow to be seen. The lines really are broad bands of vegetation
irrigated by the canals which run through them, hence the seasonal
changes which have been noted in their colour.
"All this seems very reasonable, deduced as it is from scientific fact
and from the many different things which have actually been seen and
confirmed by many thousands of observations, but it has met with the
most bitter opposition on the part of many astronomers, both
professional and amateur. Theory after theory has been brought forward
with the object of disproving the existence of the canal lines; some of
these, such as eye-strain, diplopia, bad focussing, illusion, and
imagination, have already been mentioned.
"Proofs of the reality of the lines having become too strong for most of
the objectors, they then turned their endeavours to the overthrowing of
the theory that the lines were canals, suggesting that they were all of
natural origin.
"Amongst these suggestions it was stated they were edges of shadings,
natural growths of long lines of trees and vegetation, cracks in the
surface of the planet or foldings caused by contraction, trap-dykes,
&c., but not one of these suggestions will bear investigation. I have
already pointed out the impossibility of shadings having straight edges
for thousands of miles in so many hundreds of cases. It is equally
impossible to imagine natural growths of trees and vegetation in bands
of uniform width and thousands of miles long, and nearly all forming
arcs of great circles.
"They cannot be cracks, for they are of uniform width throughout their
length, and always run direct from one definite point to another, no
matter how distant apart they may be.
"Cracks, such as we see on the moon, though sometimes straight, are
usually wide near the centre of disturbance which caused them, and
narrow off to a fine point, and often end anywhere out in open space;
moreover, they are usually very irregular in width, and take a zig-zag
course instead of a straight one. This, as I have said, is not the case
with a single canal line on Mars. If they were cracks, some at least
would be irregular and end in open space. The same remarks apply in the
case of foldings or ridges.
"The oases, once declared to be illusions, were then said to be large
openings in the soil at the junctions of the cracks; or they might be
craters, and so on. But this does not account for the appearance of the
oases between twin canals, or the systematic manner in which the canals
effect a junction with the oases. Again, therefore, the theory fails to
fit the known circumstances of the case.
"Dr. A.R. Wallace rather favours the idea of natural cracks or faults in
the surface of the planet; and suggests that the outer crust of Mars may
be a crystalline or similar formation which would lend itself to the
production of numerous cracks in the surface. He points to a few cracks
and faults in the earth's surface, all of small size, as confirming this
idea; but the cases he adduces only seem to prove that there is on our
earth absolutely no natural formation which can in any way properly be
compared with the lines seen on Mars. Moreover, there seems to me no
ground whatever, beyond the needs of the theory, for supposing that the
crust of Mars is of a crystalline nature, or such as would predispose to
the formation of cracks. On the contrary, all the evidence is against
it--the existence of vegetation in some parts, the general appearance of
the red portion, and the large clouds of sand which have been observed,
all being indicative of a sandy formation, in the red portion at least.
"The theory also fails to take into consideration the most important
point of all, viz. that every canal runs direct from one definite point
to another, perhaps over two thousand miles distant. In very many cases
numerous lines connect with one small area, or even with one point. The
Lucus Ascræus has no less than seventeen of these canals connecting with
it, and appears to be a kind of Martian Clapham Junction.
"The deserts on Mars serve the same purpose as our seas, as lines of
communication may be established anywhere across them. A map of Mars,
showing the canals converging towards some one part, bears a great
resemblance to our maps showing the courses taken by vessels from
different parts all converging upon one seaport.
"Much has also been said about the widths of the canals as rendering
them impossible of construction, so let us consider how wide they are.
"The lines seen vary from two or three miles up to nearly thirty miles
in width; but there are only one or two of the latter, and the majority
are five to ten miles wide. Notwithstanding Professor Lowell's repeated
statements that they represent bands of vegetation, these widths are
often referred to as the widths of his canals. I have frequently seen
them described as 'fifty miles,' a 'hundred miles,' and even as
'hundreds of miles' wide. These exaggerations usually appear in
newspapers and journals, and evidently arise from insufficient knowledge
on the part of the writers.
"Owing to the small gravitation upon Mars, the work of digging canals
would be extremely easy upon that planet (even assuming the Martians to
be without machinery) as compared with the same work on our earth; but
there is neither necessity nor reason for the construction of such
enormously wide canals as those mentioned. Moreover, it seems to me that
very wide canals would defeat the object for which they were
constructed; and Professor Lowell does not regard the widest lines as
being canals. They may be remains of natural channels or arms of the
seas, as they do not run so straight as the canal lines proper.
"Our people," I remarked, "have argued both against the possibility of
constructing such canals and of forcing water along them, because, as
they say, none of our engineers would be able to accomplish such work. I
certainly have more confidence in the skill and capabilities of our
engineers, and doubt not that if they were required to solve a similar
problem they would overcome all difficulties and carry out the work
successfully."
"I'm with you there, mon!" exclaimed M'Allister.
"I may remind you," I proceeded, "that when steam navigation was first
mooted, it was confidently asserted that no steamship would ever succeed
in crossing the Atlantic Ocean, and I can remember when it was learnedly
demonstrated that it would be quite impossible to construct a canal
across the Isthmus of Suez! How small the prophets must have felt when
the work was accomplished!
"I am afraid it is usual to take a very limited view of all such
matters, and we judge of them entirely from what we know ourselves,
never looking ahead, as it is considered unscientific to go beyond our
own knowledge. Because something may be quite impossible to us, it does
not follow that it is impossible to more advanced people.
"Think how many great scientific facts which are quite commonplace at
the present time were unknown and undreamed of even so recently as our
grandfathers' time! Who then can forecast what may be possible five
hundred years, or even a century hence; and who will be bold enough to
fix a limit to the possibilities of science! I freely admit I am an
optimist in these matters."
"I think, Professor," said John, "that your view is really the more
scientific of the two. While it may not be possible accurately to
forecast all the facts, intelligent anticipations may logically be
formed from a survey of our own past history."
Proceeding, I then remarked, that "Another discovery made at Flagstaff
Observatory was that at the ends of certain canals, where they joined
the dark areas, were small V-shaped dark markings which Professor Lowell
has termed carets. From their occurrence in these positions only, and
from his observations of the peculiar and extremely systematic manner in
which the canals, especially the double ones, run into the carets, he
has concluded that they must serve some special and important purpose.
"We have been told upon high authority that the carets are illusions,
and could not possibly be seen, as the planet is so distant from us. But
the fact remains that they have frequently been seen and drawn; they
always appear the same, and are never seen except in connection with
canals which join dark areas. These dark areas, I may say, are believed
to be the beds of ancient seas, from which the water has long since
departed.
"In connection with all these disputed lines and markings it has often
been urged that though they are seen through comparatively small
telescopes they are not seen when a very large instrument is used; and
it has also been said that observers, knowing what they wished to see,
simply imagined they did see it. We have, however, abundant proof that
both these arguments are unreliable and incorrect.
"It is a well-known fact that when a faint object has been once seen
through a telescope, others are able to see it through a smaller
instrument. This was the case with the satellites of Mars, which have
been seen with much smaller instruments than that used to discover them.
"The fact that such objects are really seen is proved by the observer
marking them on his drawing in their correct position, although they may
have moved from the point at which they were originally seen.
"I will give you an illustration of the ease with which it is possible
to overlook something that should be clearly visible to you, yet it is
not seen by you until your attention is called to it by some one else.
Almost every one has had some such experience:--
"You may have on the front of your coat a small stain, or grease-spot,
in a position where you could plainly see it, yet might wear the coat
for days or even weeks in complete unconsciousness of the existence of
the stain until some one pointed it out to you. After that you cannot
look at the coat without seeing the stain, and it becomes so
persistently obtrusive that you are compelled to have it removed. There
is, however, no imagination about your seeing the mark."
John here said to me: "Professor, I noticed you said that many who do
not believe in the actuality of the lines and markings on Mars
frequently refer to the fact that, while they are stated to be seen
through small telescopes, they are quite invisible through a very large
instrument, and they regard this as proving that the lines or markings
do not exist. Is there not something in this argument?"
"Well, John," I replied, "the argument sounds not only plausible, but
reasonable, and inexperienced persons might use the argument, believing
it to be a sound and good one. I must, however, confess that I have
been surprised to see this argument used by persons who must surely know
that there is no weight in it at all.
"It is well known to all practical observers, and indeed to all who have
studied optical matters, that, for several reasons, very large
telescopes are quite unsuited for the observation of fine planetary
detail.
"The real advantage of these enormous instruments lies in their great
'light-grasp,' which enables observers to see very faint points of
light, such as small satellites of planets, faint stars, double stars,
distant comets, or nebulæ, which could not be seen with a smaller
instrument necessarily having less 'light grasp.' Yet this very excess
of light, which is the great advantage of a large instrument, is one of
the things that spoils the definition of faint planetary details; it
drowns them all out, or 'breaks them up.'
"Again, these large instruments are much more liable than smaller ones
to what is termed 'chromatic' and 'spherical' aberration; and this also
is detrimental to definition. No very large refractor is entirely free
from these defects.
"Another objection is that, in using such large and long-focussed
instruments, a much higher power must necessarily be employed than in
the case of smaller instruments. This high power magnifies all the
little movements and disturbances in our atmosphere to exactly the same
extent as it magnifies the object looked at, with the result that these
disturbances blur out all fine detail. The canal lines on Mars could
never be seen in such circumstances. If the object were looked at
through a smaller instrument, with lower power, it might be fairly well
seen, for the atmospheric disturbances would not be magnified to such
an extent as to spoil definition.
"There are very few nights in the year when these immense instruments
can be used to advantage on the planets, whilst a smaller instrument
might define well three or four nights out of every six. It is on record
that the user of Lord Rosse's great reflector stated that there were
only about three nights in the year when its best definition could be
obtained; and its use has produced very meagre results, compared with
what had been anticipated.
"It is also almost universally recognised that in using these great
instruments, whether for photography or for the visual observation of
fine detail, it is absolutely necessary to stop down the aperture to a
very large extent, by reducing it to about 12 inches in diameter or even
less. The big telescope is thus really converted into a small one of
long focus.
"There is, in addition, the acknowledged fact that nearly every
discovery of new detail on planets has been made with a comparatively
small telescope, although the same objects may have been under constant
observation for years with big telescopes. The new detail was never
noticed until after it had been seen with a smaller instrument, and
perhaps only then when atmospheric conditions were unusually good.
"As an instance, I may mention that the faint 'crape ring' of Saturn was
seen by Dawes when using an 8-inch aperture to his telescope; yet it had
never been discovered with the large instruments, although the planet is
one that is under constant observation when in a position to be seen.
"I could give innumerable instances of similar cases, but enough has
been said to show that because some object cannot be seen in a very
large telescope, it is no proof at all that the object does not exist.
* * * * *
"Amid the chaos of varied, and often self-contradictory, theories
respecting Mars--some abandoned by their own authors; others in which
facts and conditions had to be assumed for which there was not only no
evidence, but actual disproof by many recorded observations--Professor
Lowell's conceptions stand out clearly and boldly.
"They are all founded on the results of prolonged and systematic work in
the observation of the planet, not only by himself but by numerous
colleagues--work in which many of his critics have had little or no
experience under favourable conditions. His conceptions fit in with
observed facts with all the accuracy of the pieces in a child's picture
puzzle; whilst his logical deductions are supported and enhanced by his
wide knowledge of physical science and planetology.
"Yet, as I have both heard and read, his views and discoveries have been
described as 'sensational,' 'fanciful,' 'fairy tales,' and by other
terms which I would rather not quote.
"Underlying some of these objections there seems to be an idea that some
reason _must_ be found for opposing anything and everything which would
tend to indicate the possibility of intelligent life existing upon any
other planet than the earth; although it is difficult to understand why
such a possibility should be so abhorrent. It is a view that does not
commend itself to me, but I need not say more on that point.
"Nicola Tesla, the great electrician, is, however, convinced of the
existence of life upon Mars, and he has expressed in very emphatic terms
his opinion of the opposite view, which, however, I refrain from
quoting. He says that Mars must have passed through all terrestrial
changes and conditions, and that the whole arrangement of the canals, as
depicted by Professor Lowell, would seem to be artificially designed. He
then goes on to state that he has discovered electrical disturbances on
the earth which must have come from Mars and no other planet.
"In the treatment he has received from some of his smaller critics
(whose vehemence is usually in inverse proportion to their knowledge of
his work and writings) Professor Lowell has had an experience similar to
that of many other observers who have done good work.
"If an observer be blessed with the happy combination of good eyesight,
a good instrument, and favourable atmospheric conditions, and publishes
writings and drawings showing that he has seen something which has not
previously been observed, he at once becomes a target for captious
critics who seem to be under the impression that all astronomical
knowledge begins and ends with themselves, and that anything they cannot
see does not exist. It matters not that the observer attacked may have
given months to particular observations where his critics have only
spent a few hours: he is told that his drawings are incorrect and do not
represent the planet; that they may be works of art, but do not
represent facts; that he possesses a very vivid imagination, and so on.
This procedure may be persisted in until at last the victim either turns
and rends his critics or ceases to publish his drawings or records, to
the great loss of many others who take an intelligent interest in his
work.
"Professor Lowell's telescope is over 32 feet in focal length, and has
an object glass of excellent quality 24 inches in diameter, the work of
the celebrated Alvan Clark. Thus, whilst not one of the giants, it is
not exactly what would be termed a small instrument, and few indeed of
the critics have anything approaching it in capacity, while none enjoys
the advantage of such ideal conditions in the situation of his
observatory.
"I was therefore much amused in reading an effusion by one critic who,
in discussing the question of the canal lines, remarked that he could
not accept 'these one-man discoveries,' oblivious of the fact that they
are the discoveries of many observers. He then very naïvely gives the
illuminating information that his astronomical experience is confined to
the 'observation' of the _moon_ for about six months, by the aid of a
1-1/4-_inch hand-telescope_! Surely, when confronted with a critic of
such vast experience and so wonderfully equipped, Professor Lowell must
retire discomfited from the field!"
At the conclusion of my remarks both John and M'Allister expressed their
thanks, saying that "Now they were informed as to the points on which
our scientists were not agreed, they would look forward with still
greater interest to our arrival at our destination, for they were as
anxious as I was to solve the mysteries of the red planet."
CHAPTER XII
WE ARE MYSTERIOUSLY PREVENTED FROM APPROACHING MARS
The days then passed uneventfully until at last the long-looked-for day
arrived, and on the 24th September we were so close to Mars that we
hoped to be able to land on the planet by two o'clock in the afternoon.
We made ourselves a little sprucer than usual, as we wished to do credit
to our own world; and M'Allister wore his overalls to protect his
clothes, although our machinery was not nearly so messy to handle as
steam-engines usually are.
We had already examined our three machine-guns so that they might be in
readiness for any emergency, if some of the ideas of which we had read
as to the probable ferocity of the Martians should prove correct. It
had, however, been definitely agreed between us that the guns were only
to be used as a last resort to defend our lives against a wanton attack,
and were to be kept out of sight until they were really required. My own
conception of the Martians was, however, a very different one, though I
thought it quite right to be prepared for anything which might happen.
As Mars was only about twenty-five miles distant, its surface details
could be fairly well seen through the clear thin atmosphere; and, with
the aid of a glass, one question at least was definitely settled--the
numerous lines of vegetation were fairly continuous; but there were no
large canals to be seen, though we thought we could trace some narrow
ones.
We could also see several rapidly moving specks in the sky, which, we
suggested, might be air-ships of some kind; but they were so far off and
indistinct, that we were unable to arrive at a definite conclusion.
Our speed having been gradually reduced, we were now only moving at the
rate of twenty-five miles an hour, and it was therefore time to decide
on a landing-place. John and M'Allister pointed out a conspicuous spot
not very far from the centre of the visible surface of the planet, John
remarking that we should be about right if we landed there, because
several canals converged to it, and it must, therefore, be a place of
some importance. On looking at the map we found that it was marked as
the Nodus Gordii, or "Gordian Knot"; so, really, it seemed an
appropriate landing-place for travellers who were desirous of solving
mysteries.
"Very well, then," I said, "we'll land there if you like, but I had
rather a fancy for a different spot, which is on the Sinus Titanum. It
is that place over there, near the point where the vegetation curves
down in both directions," I remarked, as I pointed out the spot.
"Your place is rather nearer to the equator, and is probably pretty
warm; but really it does not matter where we land so long as we arrive
on the planet. Your votes are two to my one; so, as you have a thumping
majority, go ahead, M'Allister, for the place you have chosen! We will
see whether we can cut the Gordian Knot, if we cannot undo it!"
[Illustration: _From a Globe made by M. Wicks_ Plate X
MARS. MAP III
"Sirapion," the landing-place of the "Areonal," is shown just above the
point of the shaded portion near the top. The "Nodus Gordii," where John
wished to land, is seen between the double canal just above the Equator,
on the left-hand side of the map.]
He accordingly directed his course towards the chosen spot; but we had
not proceeded very far before everything below us suddenly disappeared,
being quite blotted out by something of an ochre tint, which entirely
obscured our view of the country.
"Professor," exclaimed M'Allister, "what is the matter? I cannot see
where we are going!"
"I can guess what it is," I replied; "we have run into one of those
sand-clouds I told you of the other evening, and until we get through,
or it passes away, we shall see nothing else. Perhaps we had better go
on very slowly."
We went on accordingly, but instead of our getting through it, the cloud
seemed to become denser and denser. However, we still pressed on, and,
after what seemed quite a long time, we emerged into somewhat clearer
air, although there was still a thin yellow cloud below us. Our course
had been well maintained, for we seemed to be within ten miles of our
destination, which we could just make out through the thin dust-cloud.
Presently M'Allister called out to me, "Professor, I don't know what is
wrong, but the machinery is slowing down so much that I am afraid we
shall soon come to a dead stop! I have switched on more power, but it
does not seem to make any difference!"
"Well, try a little stronger current," I suggested; "but be careful not
to overdo it, or we may land upon Mars more suddenly than we shall
like."
He tried this, but we had not moved more than a hundred yards when he
found that farther progress was impossible. So here we were, only a few
miles from our destination, yet prevented by an impalpable and unknown
obstacle from reaching it!
We consulted together, but could find no solution of the mystery of this
invisible barrier to our progress. Then John suggested that, as we could
not go straight on, we should try a different course. So M'Allister
altered our course a few points, and once more put on the speed power,
only to be brought to a standstill again after a very short spurt.
"My word!" he exclaimed, "I'll not be beaten like this. I've driven an
old iron tramp-steamer through scores of miles of thick seaweed out in
the tropics, although the machinery was almost worn out and the engines
leaking at every joint. Here goes for full speed ahead!" he cried; and,
so saying, he switched on full power, quite heedless of my shout of "Do
be careful, M'Allister, or we shall all be smashed to pieces!"
"She's got to go!" he replied grimly, "smash or no smash! I never was
beaten yet when pushing my way through obstacles, and I'm too old a hand
to be beaten now!"
However, he found he was beaten this time, for although he switched on
the utmost power, it refused to give any evidence of its existence, and
we had to rely on our neutral power in order to maintain our position in
the air; though, as events proved, we could not have fallen.
The excitement and tension of the work had thrown M'Allister into a
profuse perspiration; and, as he stood moodily mopping his brow with his
handkerchief, I heard him muttering and swearing softly to himself. His
blood was evidently up, for he made another desperate attempt to get
the _Areonal_ to move forward, wrenching his switches with angry jerks,
but it all proved labour in vain.
"Well, what is to be done now, John?" I asked; "we have tried two
courses without any effect!"
"I would suggest, Professor, that we should go up higher," he replied,
"so as to enable us to try again from another altitude, then, perhaps,
we may pass above the obstacle."
"A good thought that, John!" I cried. So up we went, the machinery
working all right now, and our spirits rose as we soared higher; but,
alas! after rising a few hundred yards, the machines began to slow down,
and soon stopped altogether.
"The de'il himself must be taking a hand in this business!" exclaimed
M'Allister, "for this beats the worst experience I ever had! We can't go
up, we can't go down, and we can't go forward! Whatever can we do,
Professor? You're a scientific man; can't you suggest something which
might help?"
"It's a profound mystery to me, M'Allister," I replied, "but we
certainly do not want to remain hung up in space, so I suggest you
should try several different courses. Surely, in some direction we shall
find a way out of this, and get to our destination."
This plan was tried, M'Allister doggedly setting his course first in one
direction, then in another, and trying to put on enough power to force
the vessel along; but time after time we came to a standstill after
moving very slowly for a short distance.
"It looks as though we were to be hung up here indefinitely," said John.
"We do not seem able to get through this mysterious obstacle, whatever
it may be, or whatever course we may try."
"Oh, we've not tried all points yet," I said. "We must not give up now
we have got so close to the object of our trip. Take a fresh course,
M'Allister."
He took a fresh course, and another after that, but with exactly the
same result.
I had never seen M'Allister in such a perturbed state before; he
actually trembled all over with the intensity of his feelings, and his
face had an expression of grim determination such as I should imagine
might be seen on the face of a soldier at bay with his back to a wall,
and fighting for his life against overwhelming numbers of assailants.
"My word!" he exclaimed, "yon's Mars, and here's us, but it doesn't seem
as if we should ever come together. Losh mon, bonnie Scotland for ever!
Here goes for another try!" and he switched on the current again with a
vicious pull.
We watched the machines with intense anxiety, wondering whether this new
course would be any better than the others we had tried--whether the
machines would keep moving, or slow down and stop as before.
No, we kept moving; and soon it was evident we were gaining speed
rapidly.
"Hurrah, hurrah!" I cried in exultation. "We are doing it this time.
Slow down, M'Allister, we are going too fast now!"
"Scotland for ever!" he shrieked. "That did it, Professor!"
Strangely enough, John, usually the most excitable member of our party,
was the calmest of the three, and simply remarked quietly, "We've done
it this time."
Yes, we had indeed done it this time, but our attention had been so
taken up with our anxious watching of the machines that none of us had
noticed the direction we were taking.
We had passed entirely through the last remnant of the sand clouds, and
it was now beautifully clear, the thin air enabling us to see over a
very large area of country. For the first time since leaving the earth I
now opened one of the doors very slightly indeed, and tested the effect
of the real Martian atmosphere.
It seemed to us rather sharp, with a taste something like that of a
tonic medicine, but we were all able to breathe it without any serious
inconvenience, though at first it made us gasp.
Being assured there was no danger, I stepped out on to the platform and
looked down, then started back in utter astonishment, exclaiming to the
others, "Why, look! look! See where we are!"
CHAPTER XIII
WE ARRIVE ON MARS AND MEET WITH A STARTLING SURPRISE
On hearing my excited exclamation, John and M'Allister at once stepped
on to the platform and, having looked down, were as much surprised as I
was, for lo! we were heading direct for the very spot which I had
previously told them it was my fancy to land upon, and we were not three
miles away from it. We also saw a large town or city close by our
proposed landing-place.
"One would almost imagine you were a magician, Professor," said John,
"and that this affair was all your work, and intended to secure a
landing only where you thought proper."
"No, John," I answered, "I had nothing to do with our coming to this
spot, and it is still a mystery to me how it was we were not able to
continue on our original course. The Gordian Knot was too much for us
after all."
"Well," John said, "it does not matter so long as we succeed in landing
somewhere.
"By Jove!" he exclaimed suddenly, "look through the glass over there,"
pointing forwards as he spoke. "I can see enormous crowds of people
evidently watching our vessel."
It really was so, for, as we drew nearer and nearer, we could plainly
see an enormous multitude of people who seemed to be drawn up along the
four sides of an immense square open space, and they were all looking
upwards towards the _Areonal_.
"Go and have a wash," I said to M'Allister, who had become quite grimy
from the perspiration occasioned by his exciting work just previously.
"We will see to the machines, if necessary. You must not descend amongst
such an assembly of the natives with dirty hands and face."
"No," he replied, "Kenneth M'Allister will not disgrace old Scotland by
doing such a thing as that."
"Look sharp, then, M'Allister," John called after him; then, peeping
down again, he pointed to the farther side of the square, saying, "Look,
Professor, I can see some pavilions over there, and a large daïs affair,
with a canopy over it! Look at the flags and banners too!" he cried;
"and there seems to be a large number of officials round the daïs.
Perhaps that's the Emperor of Mars sitting there!"
"I doubt that, John," I replied; "but probably he is some very important
personage. How singular," I added, "that this spot which I selected
should be the only one toward which we were able to steer our vessel!"
"Well, we shall soon know something about that, I expect," replied John.
"Heh, mon!" exclaimed M'Allister, who had now rejoined us, looking spick
and span, and with his face shining from the fresh application of soap
and water, "I believe they are all down there watching for our arrival."
"It really looks like it," I said; "but how could they have known we
were coming? So many scores of thousands could not have been gathered
together at a few minutes' notice. Well, you can see to the machines,
and take us gently down into that square."
"Professor," remarked John, "those people are not the big, ugly giants,
nor the strange animals which some of our folks have imagined the
inhabitants of Mars to be. They appear a bit tall; but, so far as I can
see from here with the glass, they are a fairly good-looking lot. They
seem quite friendly too," he added, "and we shall not require those guns
after all."
"No, certainly not," I replied, for now we were close enough to see that
the people were waving their hands towards us, and that children were
waving bright-coloured flags. Just then a welcoming shout came up to us
from below, and we made friendly signs to the people in response. Then
they cheered us again and again, so we knew we could safely descend
amongst them.
With skilful manoeuvring M'Allister soon brought our vessel down near
the centre of the square, and we were all ready to step out. John
judiciously, but rather reluctantly, ceased smoking and put away his
pipe, not knowing what kind of reception he might have if he appeared
amongst these strangers with a pipe in his mouth.
A line of officials was arranged in a curve on each side of the daïs,
and three of them came towards us from either side, making signs of
friendliness and welcome.
Seeing that we had nothing to fear, we at once stepped on to the ground
and advanced to meet them. In spite of weighted boots, which we had
taken the precaution to wear, we had some difficulty in walking
properly; the gravitation being so much less than on the earth we had an
irresistible tendency to lift our feet much too high at every step we
took.
As we met, each official made a very graceful and courteous inclination
of his body, and we all bowed in response. The first couple of officials
then conducted me towards the daïs, and I could now see that they were
very much taller than myself, being quite seven feet nine inches in
height. They were, however, so splendidly proportioned that at first
their stature had not impressed me as being much above our ordinary
standard; whilst their features were most beautifully formed and
regular, their complexions being very clear and fresh-looking.
One great peculiarity I noticed in all around us, and that was a
peculiar soft and liquid glow in their eyes, which seemed to light up
the whole of their features, adding greatly to their beauty and nobility
of appearance.
As we approached the daïs, its occupant rose and came down the steps to
meet us on the level ground. Whatever his rank, he was a most
magnificent figure, his whole bearing being serenely dignified, majestic
and impressive; whilst the expression upon his radiantly glowing
countenance was benign and intelligent beyond anything I had imagined or
anticipated, though I had expected much.
What followed, however, was surprising beyond measure, and it was
startling and electrifying in the suddenness with which it came upon me;
for, as this splendid being moved towards me with stately steps, and
both hands outstretched in greeting, he said to me in _English_,
"Welcome to Mars! welcome to my country, oh stranger from a far-off
world! In the name of the whole people, I bid you welcome to _our_
world, which we call 'Tetarta,' and to this city of Sirapion!"
CHAPTER XIV
I MAKE A MOST AMAZING DISCOVERY
I was so utterly taken aback at this most unexpected greeting in my own
native language by one who was apparently the chief inhabitant of this
other world that I found it very difficult to collect my thoughts and
make a suitable reply.
I know I stammered out something; but, really, the more I tried to speak
coherently the more confused I became. This was indeed a very bad
beginning for a visitor from a distant world who wished to show to the
best advantage in such an august presence, and before such a great
assemblage of the people; but it is useless to attempt to conceal the
truth, however humiliating it may be. Observing my embarrassment,
however, the high personage smiled upon me pleasantly and, after saying
a few reassuring words, he gave a signal to the two officials, so we
moved aside for John and M'Allister to approach him.
The people, who had remained perfectly silent during this interview--if
it can be dignified by that term--now burst out into a volume of
acclamation; but I must say that never upon our earth had I seen a
multitude so orderly. Everything seemed to be arranged and carried out
with military precision, yet I saw no one with arms or weapons nor
anything indicating the presence of either military or police. A few
individuals, indeed, seemed to be giving some directions; but whatever
movements were made by the people were accomplished without crowding,
pushing, or jostling.
The Martians, too, evidently possessed fine artistic tastes and ideas,
as well as excellent judgment for colour effects. Colour was apparent in
great variety in the dresses of both sexes, yet nothing looked tawdry or
overdone; for the whole mass presented a perfect and harmonious blending
of tints; while the designs on the banners were most artistic and
effective, many of the devices being of an astronomical character.
Whilst I was thus engaged in observing the people, one of the officials
respectfully saluted me and made a sign that I was to accompany him. I
bowed and turned in the direction he indicated, when he conducted me to
one of the pavilions near the daïs, motioned me to pass through the
doorway, then, gravely saluting again, turned and went away.
On entering I found the pavilion fairly large and chastely decorated,
but it had only one occupant, who rose and saluted as I entered. He was
a splendidly built young man, with a radiant countenance, and when he
advanced towards me with both hands outstretched, as the other high
personage had done, I noticed the same peculiar soft and luminous glow
in his eyes that I had observed in the other Martians.
As he took my hands within his, the young man looked straight into my
eyes, his own beaming with pleasure: then said in English, "Welcome,
sir, most welcome to Mars!"
As he stood gazing at me and I at him, something in his features struck
me as being familiar. Where had I seen a face like that before? Then
suddenly my thoughts flew back to a long-buried past. Gracious heavens!
I must be dreaming--it can never be! Still he gazed intently into my
eyes, seeming to penetrate my very soul; then I saw his expression
change into one of ineffable tenderness, and a beautiful smile rippled
over his face.
All doubt was now at an end; this was indeed no dream, no hallucination.
I had seen that face before--seen those features in a less glowing and
glorified form than that in which they now shone upon me, and _I knew
where I had seen them_!
Something, which I had vaguely imagined might just be within the bounds
of possibility, was now proved to be not only possible, but an
accomplished fact.
Memories of the past rushed over me like swelling waves, and I seemed
swept away by their surging billows. I gazed and gazed, in almost
incredulous wonder, at that glorious being who stood there regarding me
with an expression of ineffable affection; and my heart seemed to melt
within me as the re-awakened love for a long-lost form stirred every
fibre of my body and thrilled me through and through. Then, overwhelmed
by the intensity of my emotions, I threw myself into his arms, crying
aloud, "Oh, Mark! my boy! my boy!"
CHAPTER XV
WHAT IS IN A NAME!--THE STORY OF MERNA
Yes, this glorious being was indeed the son whom I had lost on the
earth! It would be utterly impossible for me to describe the pathos and
affection of that meeting with one whom I thought had passed for ever
out of my present life, or the intensity of my emotions and the
overflowing gratitude with which I gazed once more upon the face of my
lost loved one, now so unexpectedly and wonderfully restored to me. Such
emotions as I then experienced are beyond description by any pen or any
tongue.
Whilst I was thus overwhelmed with emotion, my son exhibited the most
dignified calm; yet his words and sympathy were as tender as those of a
mother soothing a suffering child. Having at last brought me into a
calmer state of mind, he said: "Yes, I, who am now called Merna, am
indeed he who was once your son upon the earth; and I am indeed he who
in heart and soul is at this moment as truly and affectionately your
son, though living in another world, possessing another body, and called
by another name!
"Oh, how I have yearned for this meeting, and through what long years
have I studied and striven to bring it about!"
"You have brought it about, my boy!" I cried in amazement. "Why, how was
that?"
"It is too long a story to narrate now," he replied, "for we have a
duty to perform, and must not stay here. We must now show ourselves to
the people outside, who have long waited to greet you! You shall hear
more to-night; but, in the meantime, do not make known my identity to my
old friend, John, until after I have left you. You may tell him then and
prepare him for our meeting to-night."
I noticed when he was speaking that sometimes he lapsed into a phrase or
two of the Martian language, and that his English was spoken as it would
be by a foreigner not fully acquainted with our language.
Before we left the pavilion I asked him to tell me what office was held
by the high personage who had occupied the daïs on our arrival, and he
explained that "he was Soranho, the present ruler of Mars!"
"Emperor or King?" I inquired.
"We have neither of those dignitaries here," he answered. "He is the
Chief of the General Council of the entire world of Mars, elected to
that office for a certain term by the whole body of the people. But now
we must not keep the Chief waiting any longer."
So we passed out together to join the Chief of the Council on the daïs,
and, standing near it, we saw John and M'Allister, who were gazing
around with intense interest upon the assembled multitude.
The Chief advanced to meet us, and greeted me with even more cordiality
than at first, if that were possible; then he said a few words of
congratulation to Merna, and conducted us to the front of the daïs.
The people were now all massed together before the daïs in long parallel
lines, or ranks, and, as the Chief brought me forward, there came a
tremendous shout of welcome from the multitude.
The Chief made a brief speech in the Martian language (which of course
neither I nor my two companions understood), in which, as Mark
afterwards explained to me, he gave a short account of how I had arrived
there from the earth with my two colleagues--the first inhabitants of
that world to set foot upon Mars! He told them that my coming was all
owing to the devoted love and influence of Merna, who in a former life
upon the earth had been my son.
What Mark did not tell me was that the Chief had spoken in terms of very
high appreciation of the talents Mark had displayed, and of the success
which had attended his great endeavour to exert his influence over that
immense distance of space which separated the two worlds, and
practically compel me to obey his wishes by undertaking a journey to
Mars.
I learnt this afterwards from others, and found that a similar modesty
and reticence was a general characteristic of the Martians.
The acclamations of the people at the conclusion of the Chief's speech
were almost deafening, and I frequently distinguished the name of
"Merna" amongst their ejaculations. Whatever was the purport of the
Chief's statement, it undoubtedly afforded the most intense satisfaction
to all those who heard it.
The assembly now began to disperse in the most orderly manner, many of
the people gathering round the _Areonal_, and apparently discussing with
interest its construction and equipment, but none pressed upon our
little party. There was neither rude curiosity nor any embarrassing
attentions bestowed upon us, such as would have been so unpleasantly in
evidence in any similar circumstances upon the earth.
"Merna" asked me to be good enough to excuse him for the present as he
had something to attend to urgently; then he took leave of us for the
time, remarking that we need have no anxiety about the _Areonal_, for it
would be perfectly safe and well looked after.
The Chief, and some of the officials to whom he now introduced us, then
accompanied us to another pavilion, where we partook of a little light
refreshment. The chief then took his leave, after promising that we
should meet again to-morrow.
One of the officials informed me that a residence was in readiness for
our occupation, and that it was situated within a very short distance
from where we stood. He asked whether we would proceed there in an
electric carriage, or whether we would prefer to walk; and, as we wished
to get accustomed to walking on our new world, we decided to go on foot.
We saw around us in every direction large numbers of flying machines of
all descriptions, also electric and other motors, which had conveyed the
people to our landing-place. Most of the motors were very light and
elegant in appearance, and those intended for conveying only a single
person were but little larger than our motor tricycles. There was not
the slightest noise from the machinery, nor any fumes emitted like those
we had found so great a nuisance on the earth. The Martians had
evidently overcome all such difficulties, if they had ever experienced
them; and their methods were doubtless far in advance of the use of
evil-smelling petrol.
We noticed that very many of the people were walking in a manner which
suggested that they had a long journey before them; and, on mentioning
this to the official in attendance, he told us that walking was so easy
on Mars, both on account of the small gravitation and the generally
level surface of the country, that most Martians preferred walking
unless much pressed for time, or the distance to be traversed was very
great.
Though the sun was shining brilliantly the heat was not at all
oppressive. As we passed along we noticed that the buildings all stood
separate from each other, open spaces or trees, flowers or shrubs being
around each of them.
We saw no evidence of overcrowding of buildings on small areas of land
like there was in the world we had left. Plenty of air and open space
seemed to be the general rule, at least upon this part of Mars.
After a very short walk we arrived at our dwelling, an elegant little
building of white stone, and only two storeys in height. There was such
a general appearance of comfort and homeliness about it, both inside and
out, that M'Allister exclaimed: "Professor, I never thought coming to
Mars meant a reception like this. I rather expected to have had a fight
when we landed!"
John, too, expressed his delight at the kind manner in which we had been
received, then asked me, "Who was that splendid young fellow who came
out of the pavilion with me, and stood by my side on the daïs?"
"I'll tell you presently, John," I replied, "after we have had some
solid refreshment, and are quite alone."
"One would think there was some mystery about him, Professor, by the way
you speak," he answered.
"Perhaps there is a little more mystery in the whole affair than you
dream of," I remarked.
"Anyhow," said John, "you seem very pleased over it, whatever it may be,
Professor; for I never saw you so delighted in your life as you have
appeared during the last hour."
"Yes, John, I am indeed pleased," I replied, "and so will you be when
you know what I know."
"You quite arouse my curiosity," he said; "still, I suppose I must wait
a little longer to be enlightened; but we came to Mars to find out
secrets."
Just then we had to cease our conversation, for we were conducted into a
room where we found a most tempting looking repast ready for our
delectation, and the attendants showed us to our respective seats.
All the comestibles were fruits, nuts, or vegetables of various kinds,
and I saw nothing there in the nature of flesh meat. Some of the fruits
and nuts resembled the products of our own world, especially some of our
eastern products; but most of them were entirely unknown to us, though
they all looked tempting and good.
We certainly did full justice to them, and were particularly attracted
by some large bunches of what were evidently Martian grapes, each grape
being as large as one of our egg-plums. We tried some of these, and
found them most delicious, as indeed were all the other eatables we
consumed.
Though used to a meat diet, we found this meal most satisfying; the
fruits being so refreshing that we had neither desire nor need for
drink, though it stood there ready for us if we wished to take it. The
attendants waited upon us assiduously, bringing us the various dishes
in what was apparently their regular order of courses.
Both John and M'Allister appeared to enjoy their first Martian meal as
much as I did, and when we adjourned to another room at its conclusion,
were loud in their expressions of appreciation.
When this topic had died down, I thought the time had arrived to make
the important disclosure of the first results of our visit to the red
planet.
They listened to my story in amazement, and with many exclamations of
surprise; whilst, as for John, he was almost beside himself with delight
on learning that he would once more meet his long-lost friend, and he
rose and shook hands with me, at the same time warmly congratulating me
on my wonderful reunion with my son.
"Professor," said M'Allister, also rising and shaking my hand, "I'm as
glad for your sake as if I had found a son of my own!"
I thanked them both very heartily for their kind congratulations. Then
John said to me--
"Professor, it is, without exception, the most extraordinary thing I
ever heard of in my life; but what strikes me as most singular about it
is the strange coincidence connected with your son's name!"
I did not understand this allusion to Mark, so asked what was the
strange coincidence to which he referred.
"Well, Professor," he said, "excuse me if I answer your question by
asking another one. How was it you gave your son the name of Mark, and
what was the particular reason for your doing so?"
"No particular reason, John, so far as I am aware," I replied, "except
that it always seemed to me a good, plain, and honest sort of a name."
"Do you know the meaning of the name?" he then asked.
"Well, yes, I think so; for one thing, I believe it means 'polite,'" I
said; "and another meaning I have read is a 'hammer.' But really, John,
I had no thought of meanings at all when I chose that name for him."
"That only makes it all the more strange," John answered. "I have seen
those meanings you mention as attached to the name; but you seem to have
quite missed the most important one of all, for I can tell you,
Professor, that the name 'Mark' means 'Son of Mars!' Now don't you see
the coincidence, when you find that he really has become a son of Mars!"
"Really, John," I answered, "I assure you that I never heard of that
before; the coincidence is, as you say, most singular and extraordinary;
but, taking all things into consideration, I am inclined to think there
must be something more than coincidence when they work out like this.
You know your Shakespeare, John, and he says most truly: 'There's a
divinity that shapes our ends, rough-hew them how we will.' I will not
repeat the hackneyed phrase about 'more things in heaven and earth----'"
Just then Merna (as I suppose I must now call him, though he will always
be "Mark" to me) arrived amongst us, and I at once introduced him to
John and M'Allister.
The meeting between the two old friends was delightful to witness, for
both seemed over-joyed; and they had so much to say to each other--so
many questions to ask.
When the excitement had passed I asked Mark--you see I cannot help
calling him by his old name--if he could now furnish me with the further
information he had promised, for I was longing to hear all he had to
tell.
"Yes," he replied, "I am quite ready, sir;" and then he proceeded to
give us details of his life upon Mars. It is too long a story to tell
exactly as he told it--and sometimes he was at a loss to express himself
appropriately in English--but, shortly, it was as follows:--
His birth upon Mars, as we found from a comparison of dates, must have
followed almost immediately after his passing from the earth; and he
said he thought that his two previous seizures were probably abortive
attempts of his spirit to depart earlier.
His Martian father was the brother of Soranho, the present Chief of the
Council; both his father and mother, however, had died when Merna was
quite a child, and the Chief had since brought him up like his own son,
and was very much attached to him.
When Merna was still very young he was extremely fond of looking at the
stars in the clear Martian skies, being especially attracted by the
earth, which was a very brilliant star in those skies when the planet
was in the most favourable position for viewing it. He used to watch the
earth pass through its various phases, the same as we see Venus; and as
time went on he had a strong feeling or intuition that, at some unknown
period, he had been upon, or in some way connected with, the earth!
This feeling became more and more intense, so that his thoughts were
constantly directed towards our world, and ultimately he became firmly
convinced that he had once lived upon the earth.
He told us, amongst other things, that the Martians possess senses and
powers which we do not possess, and know nothing of. For instance, he
said that any Martian of ordinary intelligence always knew what was in
the mind of any one with whom he was speaking; therefore any attempt to
prevaricate or mislead was folly and useless. In some cases this power
extended over a long distance, and the thoughts of others could be read
as easily as when they were close at hand. So for this reason, and not
only because it is considered wrong, prevarication is never practised on
Mars.
Again, a Martian can transmit his thoughts over any distance upon the
planet, and influence thereby any one whom he could influence in
ordinary conversation.
Some, who had given especial attention to the training and development
of this faculty, could even transmit their thoughts to other worlds; but
the influence exercised in such cases depended entirely upon whether the
inhabitants of other worlds had attained not only a sufficient degree of
intelligence, but also the power to assimilate and make use of such
outside influences, either consciously or unconsciously.
Having become convinced that he had once lived upon the earth, his
interest in it was greatly intensified, and he felt a consuming desire
to know more. He therefore used his utmost endeavours to train and
develop his faculties, with a view to finding out something more
definite. His uncle was informed of his desires in this respect, as well
as of his reasons for them; and he placed Merna under the tuition of
two Martians who had developed these special faculties to the highest
degree then possible.
After pursuing this course of instruction and training for some time,
Merna found that he was gradually becoming more and more acquainted with
details of his former life, and was also gradually relearning the
language he had spoken upon the earth.
Soon he was able to recall from his sub-consciousness the names of
persons, and also of places and things, with which he had been
acquainted in his previous life; and what he thus learnt he imparted to
his uncle, his two teachers, and to a few other Martians.
The knowledge thus very slowly acquired and gradually built up led to a
thirst for still further knowledge; so he then tried to transmit his
thoughts to the earth, and, if possible, to influence me, his father,
whom he felt certain was still living.
He paused in his statement, and then asked me to tell him "When I first
thought of making a trip to Mars, and also whether I had not, long
before then, constantly been in the habit of thinking about the planet?"
I told him the date when I first made the suggestion of our trip to
John, and added that he was quite right in supposing I had long
previously been occupied with thoughts about Mars.
"Yes," he replied, "the date you give is quite correct. I had for years
been trying to influence you to take a deep interest in this planet, and
after that to influence you to build a vessel which would bring you
here; and, on the very day you mention, I felt quite certain I had
succeeded."
"My two friends then joined me in transmitting further influences to
enable you to conceive the proper kind of vessel and machinery, and how
it should be constructed. These latter influences seem, from what you
have told me, to have been assimilated by John to a larger extent than
by yourself; and this, no doubt, was owing to his higher development of
engineering and mechanical genius. The result, however, has been most
satisfactory. You, whom I had so long yearned to see, were brought to
embark upon this long voyage through space; I knew when you had done so,
and also that John and another accompanied you. I also knew exactly when
you would arrive here, for mentally I saw your chart and knew many of
your thoughts."
"But," interposed John at this stage, "was it not rather a risky and
dangerous experiment to influence inhabitants of another world to make
what was practically an invasion of Mars? Even if it were possible, we
should be afraid to do such a thing upon our earth, for fear of
disastrous developments later on."
"There was no danger at all," he replied. "I think you found you could
not land here just where you pleased!"
"Ah, that we did," said M'Allister; "and we were never so mystified in
our lives."
"So, Mark," I said, laughing as I spoke, "that was your work, was it?"
"I certainly helped in doing it," he replied smilingly. "We have the
means of electrifying a very large area of space anywhere, either upon
our planet or at any required height above it, in such a manner as to
neutralise the power of any vessel that could possibly come here, and
thus stop its progress entirely when we so desired. We let you go on a
short distance and then stopped you, again and again; and when we
stopped you, we took care to arrange the forces so that you could not in
any event fall to the planet even if the whole of your machinery failed
to act. You were, as you know, compelled to descend exactly where we
wished you to; and, in fact, exactly where we had previously decided you
should land!"
"Well," exclaimed M'Allister excitedly, "if this doesn't beat all I ever
experienced! To think now that all our movements and impulses have been
engineered and controlled from Mars; not only just recently, but for
months and years past. Mon, it's marvellous!"
"Marvellous to you, no doubt," said Merna, "but only a commonplace
happening here. It is very satisfactory to us that our endeavours to
influence you to come to this planet have proved successful in the main
essentials. The influence does not, however, appear to have been quite
effective as regards your steering to the landing-place we had decided
upon. We had hoped there would have been no necessity for interfering
with your movements by means of the electrical waves."
"Well, Merna," I answered, "you certainly succeeded in imbuing me with a
desire to land at Sirapion, but my two companions were more attracted by
the 'Gordian Knot'; and it was only because I subordinated my own
inclinations to theirs that you were compelled to use force to make us
proceed in the right direction. However, it has resulted in our having
one of the most exciting and mystifying experiences of our lives; and,
now all has ended happily, I do not think any one of us regrets that the
incident occurred."
"Certainly I do not," John remarked.
"Neither do I," said M'Allister; "although I must confess I never felt
so entirely beaten in my life."
"Well, now you understand that it had to be done," said Merna. "As I
remarked, there was no danger to us in your coming here; for, if we had
desired it, we could have utterly destroyed your vessel before it
reached the planet, just as easily as we stopped your progress; or we
could have destroyed it with equal ease and without any risk to
ourselves after you had landed."
"My word," said M'Allister, "I'm right glad we did not come here as
enemies!"
"Yes," replied Merna; "it was just as well you did not. We do not make
war, but we have full means of protecting ourselves against attack if it
should ever be necessary to do so. So you will understand that no
invasion of Mars from outer space is possible."
I then turned to Merna and said, "There is one question I should like to
ask you before we part this evening: Can you tell me the meaning of the
word 'Tetarta,' which Soranho, your chief, told me was the name by which
your world is known to its inhabitants?"
"Oh yes, sir," he answered; "'Tetarta' means 'the fourth world,' and
thus indicates our position in the solar system. Sometimes, however, the
name 'Tetartoecumene' is used; but this does not find general
acceptance amongst us, as it means 'the fourth _inhabited_ world,' and
therefore assumes rather too much.
"We know the earth is inhabited, and have some reason to believe that
Venus is also; but with regard to Mercury we have no knowledge at all
upon this point. Mercury, as seen from Mars, is always too close to the
sun for us to learn much about it by optical investigation; and we have
never been certain that we have either received influences from there or
been able to transmit influences to the planet."
"Thank you, Merna," I replied, "that clears up the matter; and it seems
to me that your names are much more appropriate than the one by which
your world is known to us on the earth; for, on account of its red
colour, we have, as you are aware, named it 'Mars,' after our mythical
god of war. I gather from what you have told us that war is now quite
unknown upon your planet, so our name is quite inappropriate."
"Yes, that is so, sir," he answered; "and, later on, I hope you will
learn much more concerning our social conditions, and that you will find
we are a fairly developed and civilised people."
He then took leave of us, promising to see us again in the morning for
the purpose of showing us about our new world.
It was now rather late, so, after discussing for a while the events of
this most exciting day, we retired to rest. My thoughts, however, were
so many and so tumultuous that it is scarcely a matter of wonder that a
very long time elapsed before sleep came to me.
CHAPTER XVI
WE LEARN SOMETHING ABOUT THE POWERS OF THE MARTIANS
The next morning Merna arrived early, and breakfasted with us; and, as
soon as the meal was over, we started out. The air was bracing and
exhilarating, and we felt so extremely light and buoyant that we almost
seemed to want to run, skip, and jump, as we did in our early
childhood's days.
We went first to have a look at the _Areonal_, but, on arriving at the
open space where we had left it, were unable to see it! The daïs had
been cleared away, also the pavilions; whilst in the centre of the open
space there was a large building.
We felt rather puzzled at this change, for we were sure no such building
stood there yesterday. Merna, however, led us across to it, and touched
a switch, which swung open a pair of large doors so that we could see
into the interior of the building.
There we saw our own good ship, the _Areonal_, safely housed in a
substantial-looking building, which had apparently sprung up in a single
night.
We all looked at Merna inquiringly, and he smiled, saying, "Ah, you are
not used to the Martian way of doing things! This seems to you very
quick work, no doubt; but the erection of the building was not such a
heavy and laborious task as it would have been upon the earth. Owing to
the lesser gravitation here, and to the larger physical development of
our people on Mars, one man can accomplish in the same time what it
would require many men to achieve upon the earth. Besides, we have
labour-saving machinery and apparatus which your scientific men have not
yet even dreamt of.
"Thus, what seems to you an extraordinary piece of work to be finished
in so short a time, is really nothing out of the common here, especially
as the structure is only of a temporary character."
"Mon," said M'Allister, turning to John, "if our earth had been like
Mars we wouldn't have taken so many months to build our vessel and its
shed!"
John answered him, and turning to Merna, said, "There is something I am
very anxious to ask you about, as it concerns myself and my relations
with the inhabitants of this planet. I do not wish to infringe any of
their regulations here, or to give any cause of offence, but----"
Then Merna held up his hand, and smiling, said, "You need not say any
more, John; I know exactly what you wish to ask me; and, without it
being said, can reply to you. You may smoke as much as you like when
out-doors, without fear of offending any one here; but in public or
private assemblies, notice what others do, and act accordingly. It is
true only a small proportion of our population indulge in smoking,
except in the colder regions; but please understand that amongst us
Martians there are few restrictions as to conduct or custom, and,
provided that nothing really dangerous or annoying to the community is
done, every one can please himself.
"We leave all such things to the good sense of the individual, and a
Martian can be trusted to regulate his habits and conduct without
needing penalties to compel the observance of regulations or
restrictions."
We looked at each other significantly, but without saying anything; for
we all realised the truth of Merna's statement of the previous evening
to the effect that the Martians were able to divine what might be in the
mind of another without his having to speak. Not one of us had mentioned
smoking before Merna, yet he knew exactly what John had upon his mind
and was about to ask him.
I thought it was my turn now to obtain some information, so said to
Merna, "There is also something which I am very anxious to ask you
about."
"Oh yes, sir," replied he, again smiling; "you are anxious to know
whether we really possess an elaborate system of canalisation upon Mars,
and I can soon set your mind at rest upon that point. Indeed, it was in
order to make arrangements for conducting you to inspect some of the
canals that I left you yesterday after parting with the Chief.
"Our seas and other large bodies of water have long ceased to exist, and
we are therefore dependent upon the water arising from the dissolving
snow of our polar snow-caps for a supply of that prime necessary of
life. Our canal system is, therefore, the most supremely important work
which we have to maintain and develop, so that every part of the planet
may be supplied with water, and also kept in touch with the rest of the
planet. You must clearly understand that upon the adequacy and perfect
working of the canals all life here is dependent; so every other matter
is regarded as of lesser importance."
I may here say that we afterwards learnt that the positions of the
higher officials connected with the administration of the canal system
are regarded as amongst the highest and most honourable offices that a
Martian can aspire to; and, moreover, that Merna himself held a very
responsible position in the engineering department connected with the
canals.
Merna then went on to say: "You will see for yourselves, presently, what
our canals are like; for I am about to take you across to a point where
you will have a good view over the country.
"As our canals are such conspicuous features upon our planet, especially
where they cross the deserts, our experts have long been endeavouring,
by various means, to transmit influences to the earth, in order to
direct your people's attention to the regular lines they form, and thus
convince them that Mars is inhabited by intelligent beings. Probably it
is the case that very few of your scientific men are endowed with
intelligences both sufficiently advanced, and sufficiently adaptable and
receptive of new ideas, to enable them to assimilate and make use of the
influences thus transmitted; but still we know that some must have
grasped the situation."
"Merna," I answered, "that is quite true; but, of course, I cannot say
whether it has been the result of Martian influences. Thirty years ago
one of our great observers saw and mapped many of the canal lines; and
years before that, others had seen them imperfectly, and drawn portions
of them on their maps. Our first and greatest exponent of the idea that
they were really canals was, however, Professor Lowell, an American
astronomer, whose fame has spread all over our world. He has not only
been a constant observer of Mars for many years, but has mapped out
your canal systems from observations made by himself and his colleagues.
He has also formulated a reasonable and, as it now appears, true
explanation of their object and purpose; as well as demonstrating their
existence to be a prime necessity for the well-being of your people.
"It is true he has met with much opposition; not only from those who
have but limited knowledge, and refuse to believe anything they cannot
see themselves, but from the older school of astronomers, who are not
very receptive of new ideas; and who are, perhaps, naturally reluctant
to admit the inadequacy or inaccuracy of their early theories. This is a
very common failing with experts of all kinds, and we have had many
instances of it in connection with astronomy all through our history;
but we have amongst us many intelligent persons who are open to
conviction, being unfettered in regard to particular theories. They are,
therefore, not only willing, but eager to examine the evidence which has
been collected, and to form their own opinions on the subject."
"I am very glad to hear you say so, sir," replied Merna; "and now I
would like to ask you whether, during the last thirty-five years or so,
there has not been an extraordinary advance in knowledge amongst your
people in connection with such sciences as electricity, telegraphy,
light and engineering, as well as in astronomy?
"I ask because our experts have been most earnestly endeavouring during
that time to transmit some of their knowledge on these subjects to your
scientific people on the earth, and we have some reason to believe that
their efforts have been, at least, partially successful."
I assured him that our advance in regard to these subjects had really
been phenomenal during the period he mentioned. Probably during no
previous period in the history of our world had so many useful,
important, and even amazing discoveries been made during such a short
space of time.
I gave particulars of the great discoveries and rapid developments in
connection with electricity, wireless telegraphy, the telephone,
Hertzian waves, X and N rays, spectroscopy, colour-photography, and
telectrography. I also mentioned the discovery of radium, helium, and
argon; the medical use of light and bacteriology; together with the
invention of the turbine engine, motor cars, flying machines; also
phonographs and other kinds of talking machines.
Merna expressed himself as very gratified at this information; and
remarked that our progress would be still more rapid in the future, as
it was quite evident that there were terrestrial intelligences which
were readily receptive, and capable of high development. He promised
that what I had told him should be made known in the proper quarters;
and added that the Martians would be encouraged to persevere in their
efforts to impart such knowledge as would aid in the general advancement
of science in our world.
He then asked me, "Whether, in connection with new discoveries, it had
been found that more than one person had developed the new ideas about
the same time?"
"Yes, Merna," I replied; "it has often been observed that similar
inventions have been made by several people at the same time: although
they have worked quite independently, and were totally unaware of what
was being done by each other."
"That," said Merna, "is a natural consequence of these influences; for
they are in the air, so to speak, and have only to be brought into
connection with the appropriate intellects to be assimilated and carried
into effect."
I then asked him if he could explain how the influences acted; and he
replied that in most cases they formed a sort of mental picture, which
would be mentally seen and understood by a person sufficiently endowed
with the necessary knowledge; but if he were not so endowed, or not
receptive of new ideas, then he would learn nothing from the influences.
Thus a mental picture of some new and unknown piece of machinery would
mean nothing to an unmechanical mind, or even to a mechanical mind which
was not endowed also with the inventive faculty. In other cases only
thoughts in the abstract could be sent, and these were more likely to
remain unassimilated than the mental pictures, as a very high order of
intellect was required to receive such thoughts.
I then informed him that our greatest and most daring electrician,
Nicola Tesla, was firmly convinced that he had discovered planetary
disturbances of an electrical nature which had reached our world. This
occurred as far back as the year 1899; and, in the course of later
scientific investigations, he found that the disturbances could not have
come from the sun, the moon, or Venus. Further study has, he says, quite
satisfied him that they must have emanated from Mars.
I added that Tesla was at work perfecting an apparatus which he was
convinced would be the means of putting him into communication with
other planets, by means of a wireless transmitter. This, he states, will
produce vibrations of enormous power, and he has devised a means of
producing oscillations of the most tremendous intensity. He states that
he has actually passed a current round the earth which attained many
millions of horse-power, and feels assured that he has already succeeded
in producing electrical disturbances on Mars by the aid of this current.
"Those disturbances," he adds, "are much more powerful than anything
which could be obtained by means of light reflectors, no matter how
large such reflectors might be, or how wide an area they might be made
to cover."
At the same time I pointed out that these are Tesla's own statements,
and not mere second-hand reports or newspaper inventions!
Merna said that this information was really very gratifying, and gave
him the greatest satisfaction; for it showed that the Martians'
endeavours to communicate with us would ultimately be successful,
because there was at least one man upon the earth capable of devising
the necessary apparatus for receiving and transmitting such
communications. He further remarked that it was quite true that
electrical disturbances had reached Mars from another planet, but added
that no effective communication was possible by means of light rays, as
the two planets were never so situated in regard to each other as to
render such a mode of signalling practicable.
I was just about to speak when Merna held up his hand to enjoin silence,
and stood as though he were listening attentively to some
communication.
After a minute or so he told us he had just received a mental
communication from Soranho, stating that he had despatched a messenger
to us with an urgent letter. Then he added, "We had better wait here
until the messenger arrives."
"So," I said, "your wireless telegraphy is evidently much in advance of
ours, for you seem to dispense with apparatus altogether!"
"Yes, sir," he replied; "you see this is one of the senses I told you we
Martians possessed; but some of our people who are somewhat deficient in
this sense still use the small pocket receivers and transmitters which
have long become obsolete amongst the generality of our population.
"I have already given you two illustrations of the truth of my
statement, that we are able to divine what is in each other's mind
without it being necessary to speak. Still, I wish you to understand
that we never allow this power to spoil conversation. You might,
perhaps, think that because we know what each was about to say, the
words would remain unsaid, and we would, therefore, be a rather taciturn
people. That is not so. The faculty is a very useful one to us on many
occasions; but, as I remarked, we never allow it to spoil conversation."
"That seems to me a very sensible and practical arrangement," remarked
John.
"Well," replied Merna, "I hope, and I think, you will find us a very
sensible and practical nation."
At this moment an official came up to us, and after saluting, handed
Merna a packet. Having opened and read the communication it contained,
he turned to us and gave each a document which had been enclosed; at
the same time saying that it was a formal invitation for our attendance
at a banquet in the evening, for the purpose of meeting the Chief of the
Council and other high personages, and for social intercourse.
We all expressed our thanks, and, of course, accepted the invitation.
The official, having received the requisite reply from Merna, again
saluted, and then retired.
CHAPTER XVII
WE VISIT THE CANALS AND DISCOVER THEIR SECRET--MARTIAN VIEWS OF LIFE AND
DEATH
On Merna's suggestion we walked through the town with the object of
inspecting the canals on the outskirts; and we needed no pressing, as we
were all eager to see what the canals were like.
We again noted how every house, and almost every building, was isolated
from its neighbours. Many of them were very large and exceedingly
handsome specimens of architecture, and the streets were wide, straight,
and remarkably clean and well kept. The official and administrative
buildings were near the centre of the town; their general arrangement
and design appearing most excellently adapted to the special
requirements of their respective purposes.
Most of them were built of white stone, resembling our marble, which was
very hard, and appeared clean and unaffected by weather, although some
of the buildings were of considerable age. Others were built of stones
of various colours, which added a pleasing variety to the general
effect; whilst many were adorned with noble and beautiful domes, towers,
and airy-looking minarets.
As we did not propose to inspect these in detail now, we passed on to
the outskirts of the town, soon reaching the air-ship station, where we
found a vessel in readiness for our trip. We all entered; the ship was
at once started, and we proceeded swiftly on our journey.
Merna then told us that all public means of transit, over the whole area
of the planet, were provided and maintained by the State, for the free
use of all who needed to travel. The passengers neither paid fares nor
received tickets; they simply stepped into the proper conveyance and
went wherever they desired to go. A record was kept of the number of
passengers carried; for, as each passenger entered, a number was
automatically registered by a small machine under the footboard, the
exit being by another door.
Small air-ships, motors, and boats could be engaged by single persons or
small parties who did not wish to travel in the larger public
conveyances; and any person was at liberty to provide a private
conveyance for his own use, but the public ones were so numerous and
convenient that very few people kept their own.
"Hey, mon!" said M'Allister, "the Martians can teach us something. I
would like to see such a system at work in our own country!"
"I am afraid you are not likely to see that," said John, "while we have
to spend so much upon warlike preparations. If war could be abolished,
all the millions of money thus expended could be made available for
purposes which would be of real and permanent benefit to the people."
We travelled a distance of some miles, and then the vessel was brought
to a standstill.
What a splendid view we then had over the country all around us! the air
being so thin and clear that there was very little dimming of the
objects in the far distance. Across the country, in line after line,
were the canals which we had been so anxious to see, extending as far as
the eye could reach! With our glasses we made a detailed examination of
several.
Our sensational newspapers have had paragraphs about Martian canals a
hundred miles, or even hundreds of miles, wide! Scientific men have also
similarly exaggerated, and made remarks about the absurdity of the
supposition that such canals really existed.
There is very little excuse for such statements, because Professor
Lowell has always been careful to point out that the lines represented
broad bands of vegetation, and not the width of the canals.
Now the secret was out! What we actually saw was this: not a single wide
canal but a series of comparatively narrow canals, running parallel to
each other, with a very wide strip of vegetation between each. Usually
the canals were linked together in pairs by smaller cross canals running
diagonally from one canal to the other in alternate order. These were
the irrigation trenches. Thus from one of a pair of canals an irrigation
trench would branch out at an angle of about fifty degrees, and enter
the second canal. Higher up, on the same side, another trench would run
from the second canal at a similar angle, and enter the first canal, and
so on--_ad infinitum_. In the case of single canals curved loops
branched out and re-entered higher up, these loops being made on either
side, and similar loops were made on the outsides of paired canals.
As a result of this arrangement it did not matter whether the water
passed up the canal at one season of the year or down it at another
season, it could always move straight ahead; the irrigation trenches
were thus constantly flushed by one or other of the pairs, and there
could be no stagnation anywhere. Merna also told us that some canals are
provided with a network of trenches, whilst others are embanked so that
the water can be let out through sluices when necessary, and thus flood
the surrounding land. Thus every requirement can be met.
So far from being a hundred miles wide, it was exceptional for the
canals to have a width of more than two hundred yards. Most of those we
were looking at were only about sixty feet wide! and only the wider ones
are used for navigation purposes. Merna explained why this was so,
saying that as the main use of the canals was for irrigation purposes
very wide ones were not required; for not only would they be wasteful,
but as it was necessary to force the water along by artificial means, it
could more conveniently be accomplished in the case of narrow canals, as
the wider the canal the more difficult it became to force the water
along.
We also observed many splendid wide motor-roads running between the
single canals, as well as others running straight across the system,
being carried over the canals by the most beautiful and fairy-like
bridges that we had ever seen. They were all constructed of a metal
identical with our "martalium," which we had used in the construction of
the _Areonal_; so that was undoubtedly another invention which we owed
to Martian influences transmitted to us across space!
Nothing more beautiful or graceful than these bridges could be
imagined, so light were they in construction, so elegant and varied in
design, and every part shining in the sun like burnished silver; they
looked like structures composed of rays of light rather than substantial
metal! They were a perfect dream of beauty, and we stood a long time
examining their elegant construction through our glasses.
"Well," remarked John, "some of our millionaires would give half their
fortunes to have such lovely bridges as these in their private parks!"
"Heh, mon!" replied M'Allister, "it's very clear the Martians could
teach our engineers something about bridge-building, if nothing else!"
"Wait and see our water-lifting and water-propelling machinery," said
Merna; "I think that will be something which will suit you as an
engineer!"
I noticed that many of the lines were apparently groves of trees, and
asked Merna whether they were canals or not.
"Yes," he replied, "they are canals. You will understand that in the
hotter parts of our world it is necessary to protect the water from too
rapid evaporation, or else the canals would be almost run dry long
before the need for their use ceased at the end of the season. Some are
arched over entirely, but in most cases it is sufficient to plant trees
along each side. Would you like to examine one?" he asked; "we can do so
very soon, if you wish?"
I said I should be glad to do so, and our course was accordingly
directed to one of the groves, which appeared to be about two miles
distant. It, however, proved to be more than six miles away, for we had
not yet become accustomed to the effect of the clear Martian air in
making distant objects appear much closer than they really were.
However, it did not take long for our air-ship to reach it; and we
descended in the space between the canals and then walked over into the
grove. When we turned into it, we were greatly surprised at the charming
effect of the trees over the canal.
The trees were something like our willows, but taller than elms, and had
a multitude of very long, thin, and supple branches, with very little
bare trunk. They were planted rather close together, all along each side
of the canal, with their trunks sloping slightly towards the water. The
long branches thus met at the sides and high overhead, intertwining
together, and forming a high leafy archway extending all along the canal
in both directions as far as the eye could see. The thick, soft Martian
grass along each side of the canal was like a velvet-pile carpet to walk
upon; the sunlight filtering between the green leaves of the trees cast
bright flecks of light on the clear shimmering water which ran beneath
them; whilst water-fowl swimming here and there gave a bright touch of
colour and the animation of life which so adds to the general charm of
such scenery. Some of the water-fowl were very large birds, with
brilliant coloured plumage.
"What a delightful place for a quiet walk on a hot day like this," I
exclaimed; "plenty of air and no excess of heat!"
"Yes," Merna replied; "these embowered canals are very popular with the
Martians, as they furnish such cool and pleasant walks in the summer
time. I must also tell you," he added, "that those water-fowl are looked
after with extreme care, because most of our aquatic birds have become
nearly extinct since our natural areas of water failed us, and unless
they were preserved would die out entirely.
"You will understand that these canals are not liable to excessive
evaporation; but, at the same time, it would not do to prevent
evaporation altogether, because we should then fail to obtain a
sufficient and fresh supply next spring."
"I quite see that, Merna," I said; "but one of our scientific men has
said that it would be madness to construct canals on Mars, because the
water would all quickly evaporate, especially in the warmer regions, and
thus be wasted."
"Well, as you see, sir, we manage to prevent evaporation to any extent
we may desire," replied Merna with a smile; "and even scientific men
seem liable to omit some important matters from their theories and
calculations."
"How do you manage the irrigation?" I inquired; "the trenches seem
rather wide apart to supply such a large area!"
"The upper layer of soil is very porous, and the water soaks along it,"
he answered; adding that "where necessary it was assisted by porous
pipes laid beneath the surface.
"Besides," he proceeded, "we have small portable electric engines, with
which water from the trenches can be distributed in the form of spray
over wide areas. Our vegetation, too, has adapted itself to the
conditions of the planet in the course of the changes which have taken
place during past ages, and now requires very little water or moisture
to maintain it in vigorous and healthy growth."
One more question was put to him by John, who asked, "Do these canals
constitute your whole supply of water for drinking, as well as for all
other purposes?"
"Oh no, John!" exclaimed Merna. "We draw all our pure water from deep
wells. The soil of Mars, being much more lightly compacted than that of
the earth, has absorbed an immense proportion of the water which was
formerly upon its surface. Instead of having lost it by evaporation and
radiation into space, we still have it below the surface, stored up
ready for use in our time of need.
"For this reason, and also in consequence of the small amount of our
planet's internal heat, the water has not undergone chemical change, and
mostly lies at great depths; but, of course, well-boring is much easier
work than on your world, and I expect our methods are rather in advance
of yours.
"Your scientists seem to have overlooked some of these points
altogether. You need not pity us for lack of water, as I have heard you
doing, for we have an ample supply for many centuries to come;
especially as we can purify water which has been used for general
purposes, and store it up for use, over and over again. Our canals are
only drawn upon for purposes connected with irrigation, or when
absolutely pure water is not needed."
"Well," M'Allister exclaimed, "it doesn't seem that the Martians are so
badly off for water as some of our clever people imagine! Why, I've read
that the need of water here must be so great that the people, driven to
desperation, must be fighting each other to extermination in order to
get it."
"That is an entirely erroneous idea, sir," replied Merna; "and you may
be quite sure that such a state of affairs will never be witnessed upon
this planet. We know the time must come when our water supply will
cease to be, but your people are needlessly pessimistic, and imagine
terrors where we see none.
"In actual time, the end of Mars is still far distant; but, as compared
with that of your world, it is very near. It will be possible, later on,
to forecast, by means of our records of the rate of decrease, the time
when our water supply will come to an end; but even now it is well
understood how the crisis will be met. As the final period draws nearer,
families will become smaller and smaller, and in the last Martian
century no children will be born; so the diminishing water supply will
suffice for the needs of the dwindling population. Thus the race will
gradually die out naturally, and become extinct long before the
conditions of our world can make life a terror. There will, therefore,
be no self-slaughter, nor murderous extermination, amongst ourselves--we
shall simply die out naturally.
"The planet will roll on, devoid of all life, so the loss of water and
air will then be of no consequence. It will be a dead world; until,
perhaps æons hence, a collision with some other large body may transform
both into a nebula; and thus once more start them on the way to develop
into a world capable of sustaining life. Thus nothing in the Universe
really dies; the apparent death is only the preparation for a newer and
higher life.
"We Martians have no fear or dread of death, such as I have heard you
say is so prevalent in your world even amongst religious people. With us
death, in the ordinary way, is merely like going to sleep; and it is
only the portal through which we pass to another life on another
planet. Why, then, should we dread it? It is simply a removal to another
dwelling-place!"
"I quite agree with that view, Merna," said John; "and our religion
teaches us a somewhat similar idea; yet few of its professors look
forward with anything but dread to the time when they must pass from
their present life."
"Yes, John," said Merna. "What your people really only profess to
believe we Martians accept as an actual certainty, for we know it is so;
and, as you are aware, sir, I am a living witness of the truth of what I
say.
"You know I once lived upon the earth. I died; or, as I prefer to say, I
'passed' from thence, and was born again upon Mars. Some day I must also
pass from here; whither I know not, but to another life in some other
world; and the Great Father of All will provide for me!
"There are many other planets which are worlds capable of sustaining
life at the present time, or which will develop into such worlds. Some
of them, which we can see, are planets belonging to our own solar
system, but doubtless there are myriads of planets which revolve round
those millions of distant suns which we call fixed stars. If we have
made good use of our talents and opportunities for development we shall
no doubt pass to a world where that development may be continued on a
higher plane. If, however, we have made bad use of them, it is possible
that we may have to purge ourselves by a life on a planet where the
conditions are the reverse of pleasant; and so on through eternity, each
rising to a higher and higher plane according to the manner in which he
has worked out his own salvation.
"Amongst those myriads of planets, probably there is not one which is
identical in all respects with any other, and there must be an infinity
of variety; some excelling to an incalculable extent the conditions of
our present world, and others where the conditions are very much worse!"
"Yes, Merna," I replied. "There are some upon our world who hold very
similar ideas, notably a great French astronomer named Flammarion; but
in his view only those who have developed their intelligence in the
proper direction will pass to other worlds and enjoy what he terms the
_Uranian_ life.
"I may also say," I proceeded, "with reference to your remarks
respecting the infinite variety of planetary worlds and of their
conditions, that one of our great poets has stated the matter very
logically, for he says:
'This truth within thy mind rehearse,
That, in a boundless universe,
Is boundless better, boundless worse.'"
"Sir," said Merna, "that is really very much as a Martian would state
the case; and what I have told you is our faith, our hope, and our
certainty."
As we passed along on the area outside the grove we noticed that the
vegetation bordering the outermost canal did not show a mathematically
straight edge as the canal lines do when seen by us through our
telescopes. The edges, as a rule, were very irregular: in some places
there were large areas of fallow land, and others were very sparsely
covered with vegetation.
John remarked that if any of these bare or sparsely-covered places were
large enough to be detected by our telescopes, in moments of extremely
good seeing, we should no doubt be told that they afforded absolute
proof that the canal lines are only disconnected markings, and the
canals a myth.
"Very probably," I replied; "yet it should be obvious that vegetation
would be sparse, or altogether absent, perhaps, for miles, in many
places along the thousands of miles over which the canals extend, and
also that it is quite likely, if we could use higher powers so as to get
a better view of the lines, the edges would appear irregular. Nature is
rarely symmetrical in her work, there is nearly always irregularity of
growth; and in artificial cultivation it is neither possible nor
desirable to fill up every acre of land simultaneously."
Merna then told us that, owing to extensions of their irrigation system,
laterally, and the consequent growth of vegetation, the width of many of
the canal lines would be seen to increase.
"Yes," said John, "and when that phenomenon is seen by our observers we
shall be informed that such increase in width is still another proof
that there are no canals upon Mars."
"Well, John," replied Merna, "it seems to me very strange that your
people should so misinterpret the meaning of such indications. Do you
really think such a contention would be put forward?"
"I'm quite sure of it," said John; "and we should be told that canals
could not increase in width! Don't you agree with me, Professor?"
"Yes, John," I answered; "I have seen and heard so many contentions and
arguments of a like nature that I cannot say your supposition is not
justified.
"I may, however, point out that it is only when the most ideal
conditions of seeing exist that we can ever hope to secure a view of the
canal lines showing the apparent breaks in their continuity. I have on a
previous occasion alluded to the drawbacks connected with the use of
very large telescopes, and it may be well to sound a note of warning,
for it would be very easy for an observer to be deceived by an illusory
appearance of the breaking up of the canal lines into a series of
scattered markings. This effect would undoubtedly occur in using a very
large telescope in any but ideally favourable atmospheric conditions,
for the high powers used with such large instruments would so exaggerate
the most minute atmospheric tremors that any lines on the Martian
surface would inevitably appear broken up, and an erroneous deduction
might be drawn by the unwary observer. If well seen, the canal
vegetation would appear as separate markings in alignment, but no
telescope is ever likely to define well enough to show the actual
canals, because they are so narrow."
We now returned to our air-ship, and went back to Sirapion; where, after
making the necessary changes and preparations, we accompanied Merna to
the City Hall, for the purpose of attending the banquet to which we had
been invited by Soranho.
[Illustration: _From a Globe made by M. Wicks_ Plate XI
MARS. MAP IV
An intricate network of canals is here seen, especially in the
neighbourhood of Elysium, where many connect with the "Trivium
Charontis."]
CHAPTER XVIII
WE ATTEND A MARTIAN BANQUET
On our arrival at the banqueting-hall we were most cordially received by
Soranho, as Chief of the Council, who introduced us to a number of
persons, several of whom were high officers of state; but, as only two
or three of them knew anything of our language, Merna had to act as
interpreter. All of them, however, appeared genuinely pleased to meet
us.
The hall was a large and very fine one, most chastely decorated in a
style which reminded one of the Etruscan. It was beautifully lighted by
artificial means, but there were no visible lamps, the light being
diffused over the hall as equally as daylight is diffused.
Many ladies were present, and clearly on entirely equal terms with the
sterner sex. They sat down with us at the banquet, and did not remain
mere spectators from a distance, as is sometimes the case at our public
functions. The dresses of both sexes were very neat, and although there
was a more ample and varied display of colour and ornament than is usual
in a similar gathering upon our world, especially in the dresses of the
males, it was always harmonious and in excellent taste. The costumes
reminded me of those in vogue in the south-eastern parts of Europe; the
ladies, however, wore rather close-fitting long hose, and no skirts; but
their tunics were somewhat longer than those worn by the men, and of
thinner material. Many of the dresses looked as though they were woven
from semi-transparent shining silver or gold. This style of dress was
most becoming to the wearers, setting off their elegant proportions, and
at the same time permitting the utmost freedom and grace of movement.
Jewellery was clearly only used as a medium for adding to the brilliancy
of the general effect, and I saw no one with any lavish or vulgar
display of jewels.
Our meal was very similar in character to that of which we had partaken
on the previous day, though on a more extended and elaborate scale. This
time, however, we partook of the delicious wines which were provided,
and found that whilst being most refreshing and exhilarating, they were,
as Merna told us, so prepared as to be non-intoxicating. They were
indeed so fine in quality and flavour that, I think, even M'Allister was
reconciled to the absence of his own favourite drink.
I occupied a seat of honour next to Soranho, and my two friends were
close by. On looking round the hall, and scanning the features of the
different individuals present, I was much impressed by the fact that the
same regularity, beauty, and symmetry was apparent in all; not one face
could be termed "plain," or gave any impression of self-indulgence or
sensuality; whilst the soft glowing light in their eyes produced a most
indescribable and charming effect upon the whole of their features.
This light is altogether different from the fierce glare seen in the
eyes of many of our animals, especially the feline race, which seems to
enlarge the eyes to enormous orbs of brilliant light. In the Martians
it is simply a colourless, soft, and liquid glow which has a different
effect on eyes of different colours; but it is charming in all.
Merna had introduced us to a lady named Eleeta, who sat next to him at
the table; and it did not require a Martian intuition to enable me
quickly to perceive that the relations in which they regarded each other
were something beyond those of ordinary friendship. Their glowing eyes
and beaming countenances, and their general animation and exhilaration
as they conversed together, told their own tale, for mutual love has
much the same indications and attributes everywhere--even upon Mars! But
the love-light shining in Martian eyes is something far more entrancing
than that seen in the duller orbs of the inhabitants of our world.
The people of Mars generally have dark hair, dark eyes, and
fresh-coloured complexions; the males having no hair upon their faces,
beyond a slight moustache. Beards never grow upon their chins, so they
have no need to shave, and are spared the work which wastes so much of
the time of terrestrials. If we could only count up the time spent in
shaving, during fifty years or so, we should find that we have devoted
several whole months to that tiresome operation.
Only a few individuals present had light hair and light-coloured eyes,
and Eleeta was one of these. She was a most charming and beautiful
girl--vivacious, and evidently very intellectual; and I thought that she
and Merna would make a most well-matched pair.
The banquet proved an extremely pleasant and sociable function; and,
when it was over, the company adjourned to another hall opening out of
the banqueting-hall, where they split up into separate groups, and
conversation soon became very animated.
On inquiring of Merna, I was informed that music is never performed on
such occasions as these, during conversational periods, as it is
considered a desecration of a high and noble art.
Merna introduced John and M'Allister to one of the chief engineers of
the canal department, who knew a little English, and soon they were
discussing with eager interest a collection of pictures and drawings of
the machinery. Seeing that our friends were thus congenially occupied,
Merna then took me across to where Eleeta and a girl friend of hers,
named Siloni, were sitting.
He told me he had instructed Eleeta in English and she had passed on her
knowledge of the language to Siloni; so we were all able to converse
together with the occasional aid of Merna's interpretation.
Merna had also acquainted his friends with our usual terms of addressing
one another, and it came almost as a surprise to me to be addressed by
the Martians as "Mr. Poynders" and "Sir"; for I had become so accustomed
to being called "Professor" by my two colleagues that my own name
sounded almost strange to me.
We had been chatting together only a short time when John and
M'Allister, with their Martian friend, the engineer, came over to us;
and soon after that we were joined by Soranho and Merna's tutors, named
respectively Corontus and Tellurio, who were followed by a numerous
company of Martians of both sexes.
Soranho, addressing me, then said, "Mr. Poynders, I should very much
like to know something about terrestrial affairs generally, especially
in regard to the methods of government amongst your nations, and the
social conditions of the people; and shall therefore be glad if you will
be good enough to give me any particulars that may be of interest in
connection with these subjects."
He then took a seat, with the tutors on either side of him; and he added
that the Martians had not been able to acquire any definite information
upon the matters to which he referred, but they knew our people were not
so far advanced as the Martians, and he did not therefore expect too
much of the terrestrials.
I told him I would endeavour to enlighten him upon these subjects so far
as lay in my power; and, as I rose to speak, the general body of the
Martians seated themselves a few feet away from us in a large semicircle
facing the chief.
I noticed that, against the wall behind the Chief, was a group of
beautifully embroidered banners representing the planets, and that those
depicting Mars and the Earth were placed in the central positions. These
two banners exhibited very graphic representations of the markings on
the respective planets.
CHAPTER XIX
THE CHIEF OF THE MARTIAN COUNCIL DISCUSSES THE SOCIAL CONDITIONS OF OUR
WORLD AND MARS
It was a most strange, and, in fact, embarrassing situation for me--an
insignificant and very retiring man in my own country--to be thus called
upon to address a large company of the most important inhabitants of
another world, and to try to make them understand the social and
political systems carried on by the nations on the earth. However, the
position had to be faced; so as clearly and concisely as I could I
explained to them our various systems of government--our political
systems and our social conditions; mentioning in connection with the
latter the extremes of wealth and the extremes of poverty which often
existed side by side.
I touched upon the rivalries between the various nations, the enormous
amounts of money expended in armaments for aggressive and defensive
purposes, our hereditary nobility, our land systems, trading, and also
the great and difficult problems of poverty, drink, and unemployment
with which we had to cope.
Whilst I was speaking, Merna, in a quiet tone of voice, translated to
the Martians sitting around us the purport of what I said; and I noticed
that often he only had to say a few words and the Martians' sense of
intuition enabled them to understand what was in his mind respecting my
address and to follow my statements.
Now and then the Chief, or one of the tutors, would put searching and
pertinent questions to me on various points, and these often brought out
answers which appeared to excite their surprise and interest.
When I had finished, Soranho then took up the theme, going fully and
thoroughly into the several matters I had dealt with; and he concluded
by saying, "We must, of course, make every allowance for the present
state of development of the terrestrials, but all the same I can
scarcely understand how it is they are unable to see that, speaking
broadly, their political and social systems are utterly wrong from
beginning to end, and must necessarily be disastrous to the welfare of
all. Of course, I speak from a Martian point of view.
"Here upon Mars the welfare of the whole community all over our planet
is the first and most important consideration. The whole adult
population, both male and female, have an equal voice in the discussion
of all matters with which the governing Council are concerned. My
office, as Chief of the Council, is held for a term of two Martian
years; and I am not a ruler imposing my own will upon the people, but
their trusted servant, appointed to supervise the carrying into effect
of the people's wishes, as expressed by their votes and by their own
appointed spokesmen.
"The whole of the land upon Mars belongs to the State, and is utilised
strictly in the interests of the whole community; no one can hold it as
a private possession, or use it for merely selfish purposes. A
necessary corollary to the private ownership of land is the overcrowding
of buildings upon small areas; and such general poverty and insanitary
conditions as those in which so many of your population have to live in
what you have termed your 'slums' are the inevitable outcome of such a
system. Private ownership of large areas of land really involves also
the practical ownership of the people upon it!
"I can assure you, Mr. Poynders, that no such overcrowding, poverty, or
insanitary conditions will be found upon our planet, go where you will.
Our people are well and comfortably housed, and you will find ample
air-space and light around every dwelling.
"On Mars no office, rank, or privilege is hereditary. It is true we have
amongst us persons of different ranks or grades, but such honours as
these can only be gained as the reward of meritorious and useful
services, and can only be held by the person who has earned them.
"We have no need of an army or navy, for we are all one united nation;
so all the enormous expenditure which is wasted in your world in
international rivalry and warfare is entirely avoided here, and schemes
for the general welfare of the people benefit instead. Ages ago we
abandoned war as a folly and a crime; and our world-wide system of
canals, which is a prime essential to our very existence, could never
have been accomplished or maintained if one section of our population
had been at war, or was likely to be at war, with another.
"Apart from all other considerations then, our vast canal system is a
guarantee of unity and of permanent universal peace upon our planet;
but, as I have said, we saw the folly of war, and abandoned it ages ago.
"Then, as regards the terrible curse of drink which you have mentioned;
if such ever existed on Mars, it must have been in the most dim and
distant past, for we have no records of such a dreadful state of affairs
as you have described as being even now one of your most difficult
problems to deal with. The absence of any excesses of this kind may,
perhaps, help to account for the fact that our population is strong and
healthy, and few die of anything but old age.
"There is no such thing here as poverty or lack of employment. There is
work for all who are able to do it; and those who, by reason of age or
infirmity, are unable to work, are all honourably provided for, so that
they can live in the same comfort as though they did work. This is not
charity or privilege, but the absolute right of all.
"Neither is there any over-working of any individual in our population,
for the ordinary working day here is only six hours--about equal to six
hours and ten minutes in your world. No one need work longer than this
except for his own pleasure; all the remainder of the time can be
devoted to rest or recreation. No one need work at all when his powers
are failing, as he will be amply provided for."
"But," I asked, "how do you manage with regard to those who will not
work? They are our most difficult people to deal with, and constitute a
great burden upon the community."
Soranho seemed astounded at this question, and exclaimed, "Is it really
possible that such beings can exist? Here no one able to work would
dream of living an idle and useless life; their natural self-respect
forbids it!
"I must, as I said, make allowances for your slower rate of
development; but I cannot help thinking that for ages past our people
must always have been upon a higher plane than terrestrials.
"You have been deploring the decrease in the birth-rate in your country,
apparently because it places you, as regards population, in an inferior
position to other countries, the inhabitants of which may at some time
become your enemies. Yet, at the same time, you have told us that a very
large number of your people are living in poverty and misery, that the
population is too numerous for work to be found for all, and that many,
being unable to find a living in their own country, have gone out, or
been sent out, to distant lands.
"What a tragedy this all is! If you had universal peace and reasonable
hours of work, as we have, there would be no need for this striving to
effect an unnecessary and useless increase in the population; and, by
doing so, you are, in fact, only adding to your own poverty and other
difficulties. A healthy and hardy population, which can be properly
provided for and maintained, is what your country requires. On Mars you
will find very few families with more than three children!
"Then, as regards trade. Your international rivalries and systems of
what you term 'protection' seem specially designed to hinder trading,
and to make it as difficult as possible, instead of encouraging the free
interchange of commodities to the benefit of every one.
"You tell me," he continued, "that it is really the interest and desire
of your nations to trade with each other, and that immense sums are
spent in building ships and docks, and otherwise in facilitating trade.
Yet I learn that tariff barriers are erected between some of the
nations, and that tariffs are continually increased, for the purpose of
_restricting_ trade! As a consequence, goods are either kept out of the
countries affected, or artificially increased in price; the poor being
half starved, or compelled to live upon inferior food!
"In addition, it appears that the collection of the tariffs involves the
upkeep of an army of customs officials, the performance of whose duties
is the cause of delay, harassment, and irritation to all who come within
the sphere of their powers.
"How much more useful it would be if that expenditure were devoted to
the extension of trade and the uplifting of the people!
"Really, Mr. Poynders, when I think of all these things, I can only say
you must not expect the Martians to admit your claim that terrestrials
are 'highly' civilised; for surely no 'highly' civilised people could
act so illogically and so unwisely, or be so wantonly cruel as to tax
the food of the poor!
"Such a policy must inevitably result in misery to the many, and reduce
the stamina of the present and future generations.
"Your people have attained a high degree of civilisation in some things,
but not in others; and as they become more advanced, they will look back
on their past policy with feelings of amazement, and will, I am sure,
regard it in exactly the same light as the Martians do now. I can only
express the hope that their enlightenment will soon come."
It is useful sometimes to be enabled to see ourselves as others see us,
and I was now learning how the Martians regarded us.
In defence of my own world and country, however, I pointed out that
many of our thinkers and workers saw these matters in much the same
light as he did, and were endeavouring to educate their fellows in the
same views. Many were opposed to wars, and to the social conditions now
prevailing; but it would be vain to look for any great change in the
near future. An alteration in human nature must first be effected, and
that must necessarily be a matter of very slow growth.
I went on to inform him that one of our great poets had written a
splendid "vision of the world and all the wonder that would be," in
which he described our world as progressing:
"Till the war drum throbbed no longer, and the battle flags were furl'd
In the Parliament of Man; the federation of the world."
"Mars," I remarked, "had already reached this ideal state of affairs;
but it could not possibly be brought about in our world until a far
distant future: for it must be the result of slow development and
gradual education of the people to see its necessity and practicability.
"Any attempt to make a sudden change would only result in tumult and
worse disasters than we were exposed to at present. Any changes in
regard to our land system must also be carried out by degrees, and after
the most careful consideration, with the view of preventing any
injustice being done to the present holders.
"Our poet," I further said, "evidently had in mind the probability that,
before this consummation of universal peace could be reached, wars of a
more terrible nature than we have ever known would take place, for he
pictures:
'A rain of ghastly dew
From the nations' airy navies grappling in the central blue.'
"It is not unlikely that the possibility, or the actual occurrence, of
such horrors as these may eventually bring about the cessation of war
between the more civilised nations; and, as the uncivilised are
gradually brought under control, there may be federations--not
necessarily amalgamations--of two or more nations. In the slow process
of time these may unite in larger and more comprehensive federations,
until at last the whole world will be embraced within them. This, of
course, is looking ages ahead of our present times.
"Few thinking people amongst us can regard war as anything but a direful
necessity arising out of our present conditions; only the thoughtless
and those who batten upon such disasters can rejoice in the idea of what
I have heard termed 'a jolly good war!'
"Whatever our ideals may be, we must, as sensible people, act in
accordance with the demands of existing circumstances. It has been well
said that while we have a large criminal population we must protect our
persons and property by means of bolts and bars, and the maintenance of
a police force; and in a like manner, whilst we are exposed to risk of
war breaking out--perhaps through no fault of our own--we must maintain
sufficient forces and armaments to cope with any forces which might be
likely to be arrayed against us. This, however, does not afford us any
excuse for not trying to do all we can to remove the causes which tend
to manufacture criminals, or to bring about wars.
"If only as much energy and effort were used with the object of averting
wars by smoothing away difficulties and removing causes of friction
between the nations as there is effort and persistency on the other side
to aggravate, and even invent, conditions likely to cause mutual
irritation, distrust, and dislike, much good would accrue. Nations
depend largely for their prosperity upon their trade with other nations,
and peace is the greatest interest to all; yet the actions of some noisy
and hysterical sections amongst them are a constant source of danger,
and are calculated to bring about wars which must inevitably prove most
disastrous to all concerned.
"Our religion," I told him, "inculcated peace and goodwill to all men;
all of us professed to believe in that. It is a good sign that there is
a strong tendency amongst the religious teachers of various bodies to
unite in the endeavour to promote peace amongst the nations, and many of
them have done much to call attention to the urgent need of social
reforms, and have sacrificed their lives in arduous work for the benefit
of their fellows.
"On the other hand, some of them are very militant, whilst others seem
to regard it as their special mission to keep social matters as they
are. If this is the case amongst the teachers, it is no wonder that the
people themselves are so slow in progressing!"
The Chief here expressed the hope that I was unduly pessimistic in
regard to our rate of progress, and remarked that "He thought a great
advance would be made much earlier than I seemed to anticipate. Events,"
he added, "were evidently likely to move very rapidly indeed in several
parts of our world; and he was certain that a great upward movement
would soon follow."
I replied that "I sincerely hoped that such was the case, and that the
great experience of the Martians with regard to the progress of ideas
certainly enabled him to express a truer and more prophetic opinion than
I could possibly venture upon. At the same time I knew how difficult it
was to bring about changes of ideas and systems amongst large masses of
the people; but notwithstanding all these things, I was of the same
opinion as a great poetical countryman of my friend M'Allister's, who
long ago wrote:
'It's coming yet, for a' that,
That man to man, the whole world o'er,
Shall brothers be, and a' that.'"
Eleeta showed her interest in her own sex by asking what part our women
took in the endeavour to improve our social and political conditions;
and seemed very surprised when I said they had no voice in the election
of members of our Imperial Parliament, although many of them took an
active part in any work for the amelioration of our social conditions.
I then gave a short account of the women's suffrage movement, and was
speaking of certain unwise actions of the militant party, when she
suddenly interrupted me by throwing up her hands and exclaiming--
"Oh, Mr. Poynders, do not say any more upon that point! I wish to think
well of your women and to make all allowances for them, but no Martian
women could possibly behave in the manner you have described; their
innate self-respect is too great to allow such conduct.
"We should all feel degraded in the eyes of our husbands, brothers, and
sisters, if any such things occurred here; but they are quite
impossible!
"Your women are entitled to a full share of the responsibilities
connected with the election of members of your state councils, just the
same as we have; but surely there are other and proper means of
obtaining their rights and privileges without resorting to such childish
and unwomanly tactics as chaining themselves up, pestering high officers
of state, and forcing their way into your council chambers."
I assured her that the majority of our women, both rich and poor, took
exactly the same view as she did on this matter, and were utterly
opposed to the methods adopted by the few, even where they themselves
were in favour of the franchise. Many, however, were so distressed by
the conduct of militant women that they opposed the franchise
altogether. The pity of it all was that the militant suffragettes seemed
to glory in shocking their sisters' susceptibilities.
Eleeta then said that "For the sake of her sex she was glad to learn
that such behaviour did not meet with general approval; still, she hoped
that before long our women would be enabled to take up their proper
position in connection with the election of our state councils."
After a little more desultory conversation, the Chief thanked me for
what he was pleased to term "the interesting statement with which I had
favoured them."
The meeting then broke up, but I observed that John, who had been
sitting with Siloni all the time, seemed to find himself in very
congenial company, which he was not at all anxious to quit.
On our way home Merna took me fully into his confidence and told me of
his hopes respecting Eleeta, at the same time giving me many particulars
concerning the beautiful young lady upon whom he had bestowed his
affections.
CHAPTER XX
THE SECRET OF THE "CARETS"--THE SUN AS SEEN FROM MARS
The next day, accompanied by Merna and Tellurio, we started off at an
early hour on an air-ship trip to the northern edge of the Sinus
Titanum.
This is really the bed of an ancient sea, from which all water has long
since disappeared. Nearly all the blue-green patches which are seen on
the planet by our observers are also old sea-beds, and they are now the
most fertile areas upon its surface.
The object of our visit was to inspect the machinery and apparatus by
which the water is lifted and forced along the canals; and remembering
what Merna had told him, M'Allister was looking forward to seeing them
with eager anticipation.
Professor Lowell has arrived at the conclusion that, owing to the shape
of the planet and other conditions, gravitation upon Mars is in a state
of stable equilibrium, and that consequently water would not flow by
gravitation, as it does upon our earth, but merely spread out as it
would on a level floor. If turned into a canal it would not flow along
without artificial propulsion, except so far as it might be carried by
its own "head."
We found, on inquiry, that this conclusion is very nearly correct, but
there is just a small amount of gravitation which is sufficient to
produce an extremely slow movement of the water in the canals.
[Illustration: _From a Globe made by M. Wicks_ Plate XII
MARS. MAP V.
The dark wedge-shaped area near the centre is "Syrtis Major." It was on
the desert area to the left of this that Professor Lowell discovered
several new canals on 30th September, 1909.]
I have already mentioned the discovery of the "carets" which exist in
certain places on the planet. They are seen as small V-shaped markings
which are dark in tint; and perhaps might better be described as
resembling our Government's "broad-arrow," the central line representing
the end of a single canal which enters the caret centrally.
Professor Lowell is of opinion that these carets must fulfil some
important purpose, as they only appear where some of the canals connect
with the dark areas of the old sea-beds. He is quite right in this
conclusion, for they are very important indeed in connection with the
working of the canal system.
They are, in fact, all situated on or adjoining the slopes of the
sea-beds, and the dark sides of the V are really two high embankments
covered with dense vegetation, and thus are sufficiently conspicuous to
be seen through our telescopes. The whole encloses an area on each side
of the canals within which large and important engineering works are
situated.
The canals which run along the bottom of the sea-beds are, of course, at
a much lower level than the adjoining red area, and the canals on the
latter area are therefore at a higher level. Those canals which cross
the sea-beds cannot be carried by means of viaducts or embankments so as
to place them upon the same level as the canals on the red areas,
because that would defeat the purpose of irrigation, which is their
chief use. It is therefore necessary to lift the water from the
low-level canals and discharge it into those upon the higher ground.
This is accomplished by means of apparatus somewhat resembling an
American "grain-elevator," on a large scale; and it consists of a long
series of very large buckets, V-shaped in cross-section, attached to
endless chain-bands, which, as they are carried round by the machinery,
scoop up the water from the low-level canals and carry it up to the
requisite height, from whence it is automatically discharged into the
high-level canals. Of course it will be understood that the ends of the
latter canals are entirely closed by embankments so that no water can
pass that way.
The buckets are an enormous size, and the electric machinery by which
they are kept in motion is of the most ingenious description.
Besides this there is an immense amount of equally ingenious electrical
machinery for forcing the water along the canals.
Merna and Tellurio showed us all over the area, and carefully explained
the construction and working of the various machines. I do not think
M'Allister ever spent a more enjoyable time in his life, for he went
about amongst the different machines examining them with the keenest
interest and manifestations of delight; and his note-book was in
constant requisition for making sketches and notes of what he saw.
We noticed that he was frequently smiling and chuckling to himself as if
he were intensely pleased; and presently he came over to us, rubbing his
hands together in high glee, and said to John, "Heh, mon, I reckon I see
my way to making a fortune when we return home, out of the ideas and
wrinkles I'm getting here from the work of the Martian engineers!"
John laughed, and congratulated him heartily on his brilliant outlook
for the future, remarking that he did not appear to regret coming to
Mars.
"Indeed, I don't," M'Allister replied; "I'm thinking it will prove the
very best thing I've done in my life."
"Well, sir," said Merna, "I told you those machines would suit you as an
engineer; are you satisfied now you have seen them?"
"More than satisfied," answered M'Allister; "they are the most
extraordinary and most ingenious machines I ever saw, and I wouldn't
have missed them for anything!"
At the sides of each high-level canal we saw a series of locks and weirs
so constructed that vessels can pass on, in successive stages, from the
high-level to the low-level canals, and _vice versâ_.
These locks and weirs are all within the area enclosed by the
embankments forming the carets, which accounts for the long and
extensive space the latter cover, as the locks are necessarily a
considerable distance apart from each other to allow for a length of
canal to be traversed before the next lock is reached. They are,
however, not in themselves sufficiently conspicuous to be separately
discerned from the earth by our telescopic observers.
Machinery for forcing the water along the canals is also provided at
most of the junctions everywhere on the planet. In this connection it
must be remembered that the water is carried by the canals from one
hemisphere to the other, and, after passing the equator, must therefore
move in a direction contrary to that of ordinary gravitation.
Thus at one season of the year the water passes from the north polar
regions down into the southern hemisphere, and at the opposite period of
the year it is carried in the same way from the south polar regions
right into the northern hemisphere.
Gravitation being almost non-effective as regards the flow of water on
Mars, the movement would be extremely slow everywhere were it not for
the machinery, which adds to the speed of the flow. The average rate of
the movement of the water in the canals is about fifty-one miles a day,
and it takes about fifty-two days for the water to pass from about
latitude 72° down to the equator, a distance of 2650 miles.
This rate of flow, as indicated by the darkening arising from the growth
of vegetation which follows the flow of the water down the canals, has
been observed and noted many times at Flagstaff Observatory.
It was now perfectly clear to us why the "carets" are only seen in the
particular places in which they have been observed by Professor Lowell
and his colleagues. They are, in fact, only needed in connection with
water-lifting apparatus, and locks and weirs, at the places where
high-level canals connect with those at a lower level!
We were all very pleased at finding the solution of a problem which had
been much discussed between us without arriving at any satisfactory
conclusion.
John then asked Tellurio if he would be good enough to explain to us how
it was that our observers on the earth saw some of the Martian canals
doubled at some periods of the year and single at other times; and
sometimes one of the twin canals was seen alone, and at other times the
second one only was visible.
"It is a very simple matter, sir," replied Tellurio. "You will
understand that we do not wish to waste any of our water, and as it is
quite unnecessary to use all our canals at the same time, we only use
those which are actually required. This arrangement also allows us to
have a much greater depth of water in the canals than would be the case
if they were all in use at once.
"Many of the canals are only required for irrigating seasonal crops; so
as soon as the requisite amount of moisture has been acquired by the
soil the water is turned from that canal into another one, passing
through an area where a later seasonal crop is to be grown. This
arrangement, moreover, applies not only to our double canals, but also
to very many of the series which you have regarded as single canals."
Thus the mysteries connected with Mars were being cleared up one after
the other; and having regard to the very simple and natural explanations
we received, we could not help laughing as we talked the matter over and
recalled the immense amount of discussion and wrangling which had
occurred amongst our scientific men in connection with these matters,
and especially at the difficulty they seemed to experience in believing
that the canals could exist at all. Then there were those charges and
theories of overstrained eyes, diplopia, and defective focussing, to say
nothing of other suggestions. Well, I will not say any more upon this
point.
In continuation of our discussion of the canal question, I asked
Tellurio "Whether the canals and irrigation system had been the means of
reclaiming any large areas of land which had previously been deserts?"
"Oh yes, sir," he answered, "that has been the case in many parts of
our world; some very large areas indeed which were once deserts have now
become very fertile. Quite apart from such reclamations, however, our
canals and irrigation systems have also effectually checked the spread
of desertism. If it had remained unchecked, probably by this time the
entire surface of our planet would have become a desert."
I then explained that I asked the question because our observers had
seen and noted upon their charts several large areas which seemed to
have become fertile. Thus, along the eastern side of Thaumasia it had
been noted that, during a period of about twenty-three years, the green
area had advanced at least 400 miles nearer to the place we called the
"Solar Lake." On measuring this area on the map it appeared to me that
at least 200,000 square miles which had previously been desert had
become fertile.
Similar extensions of vegetation had also been charted in several other
places, for instance, on the east side of the large area known to us as
"Syrtis Major." I had, however, been rather surprised not to have come
across any comment by our scientists on the significance of this very
large increase of fertile land, as, taken in connection with the great
canal system, it seemed to me very significant and full of meaning.
Merna, continuing his remarks, then said that "Lately considerable
extensions of their canal system had been carried out. New canals had
been dug, others altered or extended, and vast areas had been
considerably changed by replanting in some places and fallowing in
others. The result of all this work," he said, "would produce a
striking alteration in the configuration of some of the dark areas. Such
changes," he remarked, "were carried out very rapidly, so rapidly indeed
that it would probably be almost incredible to terrestrials; but it must
be remembered that excavation, loading and removal of soil, as well as
most other operations, were accomplished by special machinery. He had no
doubt these changes would be noted by our observers, as Mars was so
favourably situated in regard to the earth at the present time. Besides
this," he continued, "many of our canals have been dealt with, and some
of them will disappear, either temporarily or permanently."
"Well, Merna," said John, "if that is the case our observers will soon
miss them; and I can imagine some of them gazing on your planet through
their telescopes and exclaiming, 'Lo! here is the symbol of the death of
Mars. Where we used to see canals there is now only blank space; the
canals are disappearing, and the Martians must be rapidly decreasing in
numbers and no longer able to maintain their vast canal system; or
perhaps their water supply is diminishing so rapidly that it is becoming
insufficient to keep the canals in working order; so ere long all life
upon Mars must come to an end!'"
"If that should be so," said Merna, "they will be altogether wrong in
their surmises, for the disappearance of several of our canals will not
indicate death but life. Some of those canals will only be temporarily
put out of use, but others, having served their purpose, will be
discontinued permanently. They are like our flowers that have done
blooming, which may be allowed to grow again next season, or the ground
may be fallowed and fresh flowers planted elsewhere; so the vanished
canals may be succeeded by fresh ones where they are needed; and when
your people see these new canals they will _know_ that they indicate the
continued existence of vigorous and enterprising life upon Mars."
We then started upon our return home, and on the way I drew M'Allister's
attention to the smaller size of the sun as we saw it now as compared
with the size it appeared to us when on the earth. I told him that Mars
was then about 131,000,000 miles from the sun, so the sun's apparent
diameter was only about 22-1/4 minutes.
On the earth that day the sun's apparent diameter would be about 32
minutes. So to the Martians the sun only appeared about two-thirds the
size it appeared to the people on the earth.
When, on 13th August this year, Mars was at its "perihelion," or nearest
point to the sun, the latter was 129,500,000 miles distant, and would
appear rather more than 22-1/2 minutes in diameter.
At the opposite point of its orbit, where it will be in "aphelion," or
farthest from the sun, the sun will only appear about 19 minutes in
diameter.
I then explained that, although the sun is so distant, Mars receives a
very much larger percentage of the total heat and light available than
we do on the earth, because of the thinness and generally cloudless
condition of the atmosphere. It is estimated that our atmosphere and
clouds shut out nearly 50 per cent. of the light and heat which would
otherwise reach us in the course of the year. On the other hand, their
"blanketing" effect considerably lessens the amount of heat radiated
into space; thus, by keeping in the heat we have received, compensating
to some extent for the original loss in quantity.
But, owing to its thin clear atmosphere, Mars receives nearly 99 per
cent. of the total amount of heat and light proceeding to it from the
sun; so that, although the sun is more distant from the planet, the
warmth on Mars does not compare so unfavourably with the warmth on the
earth as many have imagined it to do.
M'Allister replied that "He had expected to find it very cold indeed
upon Mars in consequence of its distance from the sun, but was surprised
to find it so warm," and added, "what you have now told me, Professor,
explains why this is so, and I can only say that at present I find the
climate a delightful one--pleasantly warm, yet bracing and invigorating.
Even in the tropical regions, although it is hot, it is not the
oppressive and enervating heat that I have experienced in the tropics on
our own world."
He then remarked that "He knew the planets all moved through space and
had read that some of the stars did too, and he would like to know
whether our sun had any motion in space?"
"Yes," I replied; "as the result of a long series of observations and
calculations it has been determined that the sun is moving through space
and carrying with it all the planets in our system. Its rate of movement
is not known with certainty, but it is estimated at about 1,000,000
miles a day. Whether it is moving in a straight line or in a vast orbit
around some far distant sun is also an open question, and it may take
centuries to arrive at a definite result. This motion of our sun, rapid
though it is, is very slow compared with the motion of some of the
stars. One that appears only a small star to us, but which is probably
a sun enormously larger than ours, is moving through space at a rate
which cannot be less than 200 miles a second; and unless that movement
is direct across our line of sight its rate must be still more rapid.
Yet it is so enormously distant that, in 500 years, it would only appear
to have moved over a space of one degree on the sky! It is calculated
that Arcturus moves still more rapidly.
"The movements of several other stars have been calculated; but the
distance of the stars is so enormously great that the majority appear to
have no movement at all, though probably not one of the heavenly bodies
is at rest.
"It is estimated that the light of the nearest star we know of takes at
least four years to reach the earth, yet light travels at the rate of
186,000 miles a second. We know of others whose light takes centuries to
reach us, and, with regard to most of the stars, the light we see
probably left them thousands of years ago.
"It is only when a star is so near to us that the earth's revolution in
its orbit is sufficient to cause a change in the apparent position of
the star which can be measured with our instruments that any calculation
can be made to determine its distance from us. In nearly all cases where
the distance has been calculated, the change in position is so minute
and difficult to measure accurately, that the results obtained can only
be regarded as very rough approximations to the real distances.
"The universe is infinite in extent, and the human mind is quite unable
to conceive what is really implied in the distances of the planets
belonging to our own solar system; yet they are as nothing when
compared with the distances of the fixed stars, either from the earth or
from each other. We equally fail to realise the immense numbers of the
stars. The camera, it is estimated, shows at least one hundred millions
in the heavens; and our great telescopes can penetrate through
inconceivable distances of space and render visible millions which the
smaller instruments fail to reveal. Every increase of instrumental
power, however, carries us still farther, and reveals more and more
stars in deeper depths of the illimitable abysses of space.
"In these matters there is no finality, for though with telescopic aid:
'World after world, sun after sun, star after star are past,
Yet systems round in myriads rise more glorious than the last:
The wondrous universe of God still limitless is found,
For endless are its distances, and none its depths can sound!'"
CHAPTER XXI
OUR FIRST VIEW OF THE EARTH FROM MARS--A MARTIAN COURTSHIP
Within a few days we had our first glimpse of the earth from Mars. It
appeared only as a very thin but bright crescent of light, as the
lighted portion was less than one-twelfth part of the whole diameter of
the disc, and it was only visible for a very short time.
Owing to the clear and thin atmosphere of Mars there is very little
scintillation of the stars, and the crescent form of the earth at such
periods as the present can plainly be discerned without the aid of a
glass. To the Martians this is more readily seen than by us, as their
eyes, being larger than ours, have a much greater light grasp.
For the same reason all the stars shine much brighter than they do in
our skies, and many of the smaller ones which can be seen from Mars with
the unaided eye, would here require a low power-glass to render them
visible to us. The fact that Saturn has a ring is quite apparent to the
Martian eye.
Day by day after this we saw the lighted area extending upon the earth,
just the same as on the earth Venus can be seen with a telescope
gradually to pass from the crescent phase to the gibbous form, and
ultimately become full. Our earth is a morning and evening star to Mars
the same as Venus is to the earth, according to its position with regard
to the sun.
Whilst we were looking at the earth, I asked Merna "Whether he had ever
seen the earth transit the sun as we occasionally see Venus or Mercury
do so?"
He answered that "He carefully observed the last transit, which occurred
on a date equivalent to our 8th May 1905, and was very interested in
watching the earth pass, as a small black spot, across the sun's disc.
The moon did not commence to cross until 6 hours and 7 minutes later, by
which time the earth had passed over three-quarters of the sun's
diameter. The earth was 8 hours and 42 minutes in transit, and the moon,
which crossed a little lower down, was 8 hours and 31 minutes in
crossing."
"That must have been an interesting sight," said John, "and I should
like to have the opportunity of watching a similar transit."
"I am afraid you never will," said Merna, "for the transits only occur
at long intervals. The previous transits occurred in November 1879,
November 1800, May 1700, and May 1621. There will not be another until
May 1984, and the next after that will not occur until November 2084."
"I am sorry to hear that," remarked John, "for even if I stayed here, I
should not be likely to live long enough to see the next transit.
Possibly you may do so, Merna; you are so much younger than I am."
"Yes," Merna replied, "it is not unlikely that I may see another such
transit, for the average length of our lives on Mars is about equal to
one hundred and thirty of your years, so that leaves me an ample margin
of time."
I then went on to remark that as another result of the thinness of the
Martian atmosphere twilight is much shorter than on the earth, the
light being less diffused when the sun is below the horizon, and
refraction also considerably less than we experience.
In this connection, I mentioned to M'Allister that we can often see the
sun and the moon apparently above the earth's horizon when they are, in
fact, below it. This is caused by the refractive power of our dense
atmosphere, which has the effect of making both the sun and the moon
appear a little higher up than they really are.
"That is something new to me, Professor," exclaimed M'Allister; "and I
cannot say I quite understand how refraction, as you term it, has the
effect you mention."
"It may help you, then," I answered, "if I tell you that water acts very
much in the same way; and there is a simple and fairly well-known
experiment you might try for yourself, which would make the matter
perfectly clear to you. It is as follows:--
"Take a teacup and place a shilling at the bottom of it, then move back
until you quite lose sight of the coin. Ask some one to pour some clean
cold water gently into the cup, and, as it fills, the refraction of the
water will apparently reduce the depth of the cup, and thus bring the
coin fully into view. In much the same way the refraction of the
atmosphere enables us to see the sun or the moon when those bodies are
actually below the horizon."
"Thank you, Professor," said M'Allister; "I will try that little
experiment at the first opportunity."
I then told him that at the time when the moon is just full it may rise
towards the east just as the sun sets towards the west. Both orbs cannot
be wholly above the horizon at the same time on such occasions, but,
owing to refraction, we are able to see them both.
The sun and moon both appear flattened or oval-shaped just as they are
rising or setting, in consequence of the effects of atmospheric
refraction. These effects are usually most noticeable near the horizon,
because the object is seen through the densest layers of air. But we
never see a star in its true place in the sky, because the rays of light
which come to us from the star are bent or refracted as they pass
through our atmosphere, just as a stick appears to be bent when thrust
down into a deep pool of clear water.
All these effects, however, add to the work of astronomers, because they
must be taken into account in connection with their calculations.
* * * * *
As the time passed on, I day by day became more interested in Merna's
relations with Eleeta.
"All the world loves a lover," and we elderly people are always pleased
to note the progress of young folks' love affairs, especially if either
of them is a relative of ours. In them we seem to renew our youth, for
their entrancements seem to carry us back to the halcyon days when we
ourselves were young. When "Love took up the glass of time and turned it
in his glowing hands" everything seemed of a roseate hue, and we dwelt
in the seventh heaven of delight, at peace with all the world and
envying no one--for were we not the most happy and fortunate of mortals!
And then, to look upon a Martian courtship! To see the rich flushes
mount to the cheeks of the lovers--their softly glowing luminous eyes,
their absorbed attention in each other, and their mutual deference and
response to the most slightly indicated wish! Ah, it was indeed a scene
to gladden the heart of the father of one of them!
Eleeta's beauty, the sweetness of her disposition, and most charming and
lovable ways endeared her so to me that I did not wonder Merna found
them so attractive and satisfying; and my most fervent aspirations
ascended for their happiness, both now and in the future.
With the Martians there is no false modesty about their courtships; all
is natural, proper, and dignified; every one may see and every one
enters into the true spirit of the thing. Mere flirtations, such as we
are so familiar with, are quite unknown, as they would be contrary to
all the natural instincts of the people. Everything upon Mars is honest,
true, and straightforward--open and above-board. This must necessarily
be so, in consequence of the Martians' powers of intuition, for any
attempt at imposition or deceit would at once be detected.
I had an illustration of this when I asked Merna, "How they dealt with
their criminals?"
"We have none to deal with," he replied, "and you will understand why,
when I tell you, that if any one committed a crime, however small, and
it was desired to find out the offender, it would be impossible to
escape detection. He might fly to the other side of our world, but the
intuitions of our experts would at once make them aware of his
hiding-place; besides, he could not conceal what was on his mind from
any one with whom he associated.
"In the earlier times when only a small proportion of the Martians were
endowed with these powers to any large extent, there were occasional
crimes; but as they were always detected, crime soon ceased to exist.
"Thus you will see that, quite apart from their high standard of
morality, the Martians soon found that crime was a folly."
* * * * *
There was another love affair apparently developing which did not afford
me so much satisfaction as that to which I have just alluded.
I noticed that John and Siloni were very frequently together; and,
whatever might be the case with the latter, I had very little doubt that
John was smitten with his companion's charms. It was, perhaps, nothing
to be wondered at, for Siloni was indeed a very nice girl, with
beautiful features, dark hair, and dark eyes; whilst John was
well-built, fully six feet in height, with black hair and moustache, and
very good-looking; altogether a fine and attractive man, and it had
often been a matter of surprise to me that he had never married.
Still, such a complication as this had never entered my mind when I came
to Mars, and I was rather perplexed to know how best to deal with the
situation. However, I thought it would be well to wait a little while
and see how the matter shaped itself before taking any action.
CHAPTER XXII
CELESTIAL PHENOMENA SEEN FROM MARS--M'ALLISTER RECEIVES A PRACTICAL
LESSON IN GRAVITATION
Mars is really an ideal world for an astronomer to live in, its skies
being so clear, the air so thin and pure, and the stars shining so
brilliantly.
Besides these advantages, the rapid movements of the two satellites of
the planet result in a constant succession of celestial phenomena which
afford very frequent opportunities for most interesting observations.
Changes in the phases of the two moons, eclipses, occultations,
transits, &c., are constantly occurring, so there is nearly always
something to attract our attention to the Martian sky.
We have already seen several of these phenomena, and I will now describe
what we have observed.
Early one evening when we were out with Merna, we looked up at the sky
and saw the two moons a considerable distance apart, but approaching
each other from opposite directions, Phobos appearing to move very
rapidly. Both were near the full phase, Deimos being more nearly full
than Phobos; and we watched them drawing closer and closer together till
Phobos passed right in front of Deimos so as to hide it entirely. This
is termed an occultation; and both the satellites had become full when
the occultation occurred; but when they were again clear of each other
both were beginning to wane.
This sight may be seen anywhere near the Martian equator about every ten
hours.
The movements of Phobos seemed very peculiar to us who had lived upon
the earth and seen all the celestial bodies appearing to move in the
same direction.
I have already alluded to the fact that Phobos is only 3700 miles above
the surface of Mars, and moves so rapidly that it makes more than three
complete revolutions round the planet whilst the latter is turning only
once on its axis.
The effect of this very rapid revolution of the satellite, which has no
counterpart, so far as we know, in our Solar system is that, instead of
rising in the east and setting in the west as all the other heavenly
bodies appear to do, Phobos appears to rise in the west, cross the sky,
and set in the east.
The moon and planets all actually move from west to east; the apparent
reverse of this being caused by the more rapid movement of the earth on
its axis, giving the other bodies the appearance of moving from east to
west. If, however, our moon is closely watched, and its position with
regard to a fixed star carefully noted, it will be found that in the
course of a short time its real movement has been eastward, and that its
position with regard to the fixed star has changed, although the
revolution of the earth has appeared to carry both westward.
Phobos is 36 miles in diameter. Its actual period of revolution round
the planet is 7 hours and 39 minutes, but, owing to the movement of Mars
on its axis in the same direction, it appears to take a few minutes
over 11 hours to complete one revolution.
Near the equator, Phobos is seen above the horizon for about 4-1/4
hours, and is below it about 6-3/4 hours. According as the place from
which it is viewed is farther from the equator so will the time of
visibility of Phobos be decreased, until when latitude 69° is reached in
either hemisphere, it will cease to become visible at all. This is owing
to its nearness to the planet; and, Mars being small, the curve of its
sphere is sharp, so that the horizon is more limited than on the earth,
and the satellite is shut out from view anywhere above latitude 69° by
the body of the planet.
Another peculiarity is that, when in the zenith, Phobos appears twice as
large in area as it does when near the horizon, and notwithstanding its
very small size, Phobos appears rather larger than our moon, because it
is so near to the planet.
The length of the Martian "night" is about 12 hours and 20 minutes, and
during this very short time Phobos may be seen to rise in the west, set
in the east, and rise again once more in the west. Consequently it will
be evident that it must travel very rapidly across the sky. It really
moves over a space of 32-1/2° in a single hour--a great contrast to the
slow and stately movement of our moon, which only passes over half a
degree in an hour.
Moreover, Phobos may be seen to rise as a new moon, pass through its
phases to the full, wane, and again become new, all in the course of a
single Martian night; or it may be seen twice full and once new during
the same time.
Even this does not exhaust the list of phenomena, for, being so close
to Mars, Phobos is very frequently eclipsed by the shadow of the planet.
On the other hand, the sun may be eclipsed by Phobos something like
fourteen hundred times in the course of a Martian year; and, as already
mentioned, the other satellite is often occulted by Phobos--sometimes
when both may be only at the half full phase, and these occultations
look very peculiar.
Deimos, being only 10 miles in diameter and about 12,500 miles from the
surface of the planet, does not give rise to so many phenomena as the
nearer satellite: still they are very numerous.
It revolves round the planet in 30-1/4 hours, but appears to take
131-1/2 hours to do so, being above the horizon about 60 hours, and
below it nearly 72 hours. These are the times as seen from the equator;
but, as in the case of Phobos, the farther the place is from the equator
the shorter is the period that Deimos is seen above the horizon, until,
when latitude 82° is reached in either hemisphere, it ceases to become
visible at all.
Our moon, being so very much more distant from our earth, could be seen
from both the poles.
Deimos also passes nearly twice through all its phases whilst it is
above the horizon, viz. during about 60 hours, and may be seen twice
full and twice new in that time.
Eclipses of Deimos by the planet and occultations of it by the other
satellite are very frequent. Being so small, it can never cause an
eclipse of the sun, but it transits the sun as a dark spot about one
hundred and twenty times during the Martian year.
This is really a very inadequate list of the phenomena connected with
the satellites, but it will be seen that the number is enormous
compared with the few eclipses of the sun or moon seen on the earth
during the course of one year. Certainly Mars is an astronomer's world!
Merna heard my statements respecting these movements and phenomena as I
explained them to my two friends; and when I had finished, he remarked,
"You seem to be fairly well posted in these matters, sir?"
"Yes," I said; "thanks to our astronomers, both professional and
amateur, all these things have been very carefully calculated; and, with
the exception of a few doubtful points, we probably know nearly as much
about them as the Martians themselves do."
M'Allister then turned to me and said, "Professor, you told us that the
two satellites of Mars revolved round the planet in a certain time, but
in each case you afterwards said they appeared to take a much longer
time to do so. I'm rather puzzled to understand how that can be."
"It's really a simple matter, M'Allister," I answered, "and I think I
can make it clear to you. While the satellite is making one revolution
round the planet the latter is turning on its axis in the same direction
as the satellite is moving, following it up in fact; and you will I
think understand that in these circumstances the people on that part of
the planet where the moon is visible must necessarily keep it in view
for a longer period than would be the case if the planet were not
revolving in the same direction.
"You have been used to being on board a ship; so suppose your vessel was
steaming twelve miles an hour and there was another vessel at anchor
just twelve miles ahead of you, you would reach it in just one hour,
would you not?"
"Yes, certainly I should," replied M'Allister.
"Now," I continued, "suppose that the other vessel, instead of being at
rest, was moving away from you at the rate of six miles an hour; after
you had steamed one hour it would still be six miles ahead of you, and
it would take you exactly another hour to catch it up. So you would be
just double the time reaching it when moving as compared with the time
required to do so when it was at anchor. This is very similar to the
cases of the satellites of Mars, and much the same thing happens in
regard to Mars and the earth. If they are opposite to each other at a
certain point, Mars will have taken much more than one revolution round
its orbit before they will be opposite to each other again, because they
are both moving in the same direction. Do you see it now?" I asked.
"Yes, Professor," he replied. "I know now, because you have cleared it
all up. It's simple enough when one understands it."
Merna then asked me if I would like to see some of their astronomical
instruments, and, on my replying that I should very much like to do so,
he took us to an observatory where Corontus was at work.
I was at once struck by the small size of the telescopes; and, on
inquiring about them, Corontus told me that very large instruments had
long become obsolete, for these small ones could be used for all the
purposes for which a large one had been required, and gave better
results.
I examined one of them and found, to my surprise, that it embodied the
very ideas that I had long been trying to carry into effect. With this
view I had made many experiments, as it seemed to me that it ought to be
possible to construct an instrument of moderate and convenient
dimensions which would show as much as our monsters will show, and yet
be capable of being used with low powers when occasion required. I had
endeavoured to attain this result by the aid of electricity, but failed
to do so. Evidently I had missed something, but here was the thing
itself in successful working, as I found upon testing it.
On looking at some drawings of Saturn, which were hanging up in the
observatory, I noticed that this planet was depicted with two faint
outer rings which do not appear on our drawings of the planet. One of
these rings has, however, been discovered by M. Jarry-Desloges, but the
outermost ring is still unknown to our observers. This ring is a very
broad one, its particles being widely scattered, hence its extreme
faintness.
The Martians have also discovered two planets far beyond the orbit of
Neptune, and their knowledge of the other planets and also of the sun
and the stars is far ahead of ours.
I was also shown a comet which had recently become visible through their
telescopes, and found from its position that it was undoubtedly Halley's
comet, for which our astronomers were so eagerly watching. I wondered
whether any of them had been fortunate enough to discover it early in
August, as the Martian astronomers did. Its last appearance was in the
year 1835.
John remarked that "He thought Halley's comet might be termed 'Britain's
Comet,' for several of its appearances had coincided with the
occurrence of very important events and turning-points in our national
history, such as the Battle of Hastings, the Reformation, &c.," and he
added, "as it will be a conspicuous object in our skies in 1910, I
wonder whether any important event will occur in our country? In 1835,
when it last appeared, we had a political crisis!"
"Well, John," I replied, "I do not attach much importance to comets as
affecting mundane affairs; we have got rather beyond such beliefs as
that. Besides, when we left England early in August things were going on
all right in our political world, and there was no indication of any
serious crisis."
"Still," said John, "it would be rather curious if we did have a crisis
next year; and I should not be surprised!"
As we were walking home next day, M'Allister suddenly tripped over some
little projection and fell prone to the ground. John ran to his
assistance and raised him up, at the same time asking "If he were hurt?"
"No, not at all," said M'Allister; "I seemed to fall so lightly that I
scarcely felt it when I touched the ground."
"Ah, M'Allister!" I exclaimed, "if you had fallen like that upon our
earth, I think you would not have come off quite scatheless. You see,
upon Mars the gravitation is much less than on the earth, being only
three-eighths of what it is there, so one does not fall so swiftly, nor
so heavily, as on the earth.
"You can prove that very easily. Just take up a stone and hold it out
higher than your head, and let it fall; at the same time note, by the
second hand of your watch, how long it takes for the stone to reach the
ground."
He did so, and said that "As near as he could tell, the stone was just
about one second of time in passing from his hand to the ground."
"Just so," I replied. "On Mars a falling body only moves through a space
of about six feet in the first second of time. On the earth, however,
the gravitation is so much greater that a falling body passes through a
space of a little over sixteen feet during the first second.
"In addition to that, although you weighed twelve stones when on the
earth, you only weigh about four and a half stones here upon Mars. Now
you can understand why it was you seemed to fall so lightly."
"Yes, Professor," he replied, "and I'm glad I fell here, and not upon
the earth!"
Then, picking up the stone again and throwing it high in the air, he
watched its fall, and turning to me, remarked, "Professor, you were
quite right; that stone seemed to be quite a long time coming down
again, much longer than it would have been on our own world."
"Well, M'Allister," I replied, "now you know for certain that upon a
small planet gravitation really is much less than upon a larger planet
of the same kind.
"That's another little wrinkle for you, and you have found it all out
through tripping over a stone!"
"Losh, mon," replied he, "I seem to have learnt something almost every
day since I have been here; even a tumble down teaches me something!"
I then drew his attention to the birds flying near us, and pointed out
that they had a much wider spread of wing than our birds have, and that
this was owing to the fact that the air being so thin a wide spread of
wing was absolutely necessary to support them in the air and enable them
to fly. I further explained that, if the gravitation upon Mars were as
great as upon the earth, the birds' wings must necessarily have been
still larger, as the pull of the planet would have been so much the
greater, and would thus have prevented the birds from flying at all in
such thin air if their wings had been small.
"M'Allister," I then remarked, "you will, no doubt, have noticed the
same thing with regard to those large and beautiful butterflies we have
seen. Why, the outspread wings of the largest must have measured ten or
twelve inches across, and many of the smaller varieties were more than
six inches across. I wonder what our naturalists would say if they could
see some specimens of these large and splendidly coloured insects!"
"Well, Professor," he answered, "I never saw such large butterflies
anywhere else, not even when I was in the tropics on our own world. It
had never occurred to me that gravitation, or even the density of the
air, had anything to do with their size. Even now I do not understand
how it is the small insects are able to fly, for they are heavy for
their size, and do not possess very large wings, yet they can move very
swiftly."
"Let me explain then," I answered. "Large birds can only move their
wings with comparative slowness, and it is therefore necessary that
their wings should be large to enable them to keep their balance and be
able to fly. Their wings are somewhat in the nature of aeroplanes, and
they shift them to different angles to take advantage of the varying
currents of air.
"In the case of humming-birds and small insects, the wings are capable
of intensely rapid vibrations, so rapid indeed that, when flying, the
wings are almost, if not quite, invisible. This intensely rapid movement
enables them to fly, and is somewhat analogous to the rapid movements of
the vertical spiral screws, which you have seen on some of the Martian
air-ships that screw their way up into the air.
"Such rapid movements would not be suited to larger creatures, because
their muscular powers would have to be so enormously great that their
bodies would require to be larger and heavier in proportion. They would
thus be very unwieldy."
CHAPTER XXIII
I HAVE A SERIOUS TALK WITH JOHN
For some days past it had been becoming more and more evident to me that
John was quite infatuated with Siloni, and also that she was not
unwilling to receive his attentions. I could, therefore, no longer
remain a silent spectator, so took the first opportunity of our being
alone to broach the subject to him.
I began by saying, "John, have you any idea of remaining upon this
planet for the rest of your life?"
He looked round at me and flushed up. Then, after a little hesitation,
said, "No, Professor; why do you ask such a question as that?"
"Because, John," I answered, "it seems to me a very necessary question
to ask. If you are going away from here very shortly, what is the
meaning of your attentions to our handsome young friend Siloni? You must
excuse my speaking of this, but I do not like to see you placing
yourself in a false position. Don't you think it would be wise to see a
little less of the lady in question during the remainder of your stay
here?"
"Well, perhaps so, Professor," he replied rather reluctantly. "I never
thought it would come to this with me, considering that I am now on the
wrong side of forty. It has been said that a man does not know what love
really is until he has passed that age, and certainly I never did.
Candidly, Professor, I must confess that I am very hard hit; and I know
pretty well now what it means to be over head and ears in love with the
most charming girl I ever met in my life!
"Do not imagine I have not seen the difficulty of the situation; but,
really, I am puzzled to know what to do for the best. I am sure that
dear girl would have me, and if I take her to England----"
"John," I interrupted, "my dear boy, what can you be thinking of? How is
it possible that you can take to England as your wife a Martian girl,
who stands considerably over seven feet in height!
"Even supposing it were possible that she could live in the atmosphere
and climate of our country, she would be entirely isolated from every
one, and, moreover, would be an object of public curiosity wherever she
went.
"It would really be most unjust, humiliating, and cruel to Siloni; and
you would be made very unhappy owing to the way she would be treated."
John looked down and fidgeted his feet about on the floor as he pondered
in deep thought for some minutes, then looking up at me, he said, "I
suppose you are right, Professor; you generally are; and that I have
been rather foolish; but really I was thoroughly caught in the toils
before I realised it. Now, what would you advise me to do in the
matter?"
"I should advise you now as I did at first," I replied--"see less of
Siloni. I suppose you have not actually spoken to her on the subject
yet?"
"Oh no," he answered quickly, "I have not gone so far as that; but
Siloni must be aware of my regard for her."
"Well, that being the case," I said, "you cannot very well say anything
now, for it would place her in a most awkward and unpleasant position.
You cannot tell her you were going to propose, but have thought better
of it. Your only course, John, is to keep away from her as much as
possible without appearing to do so intentionally."
"But won't she think it very strange behaviour on my part if I avoid her
now, after being so much in her company?" he asked desperately, as if in
hopes that I might not press him to give up the idea of continuing as
before.
"No, John, I do not think so," I replied. "You know she is a Martian,
and if she has not already some intuition of the situation, the very
next time you see her this trouble will be on your mind, and she will
become aware of the exact position of affairs; and I have no doubt she
will accept the situation, though it will probably cause her
considerable pain. You should have thought of all this sooner, my boy.
It is a great pity this has happened, but there is no help for it now,
and no other honourable way out of it that I can see. I am, however,
extremely sorry for you both."
"Thank you, Professor," he exclaimed, grasping me fervently by the hand;
"but it is very hard luck indeed."
He was very quiet and self-absorbed for several days after that, but
things turned out just as I anticipated. The next time he and Siloni met
and conversed together, she became aware of the change in him, and
divined the reason of it. She said nothing, but he knew she understood;
and, except that she was quieter, she never made any difference in her
behaviour towards him when they met occasionally afterwards.
So, though I was sorry in some respects, I was very glad that this
awkward matter was settled.
CHAPTER XXIV
THE MARTIAN SEASONS
Our earliest records of Mars date back to a very remote period, viz.
2300 years before the birth of Christ! Professor Hilprecht, in the
course of his investigations on the site of the ancient city of Nippur,
made extensive excavations, and dug down and down through the ruins
until he had penetrated through those of no less than sixteen different
cities, which, at various times, had been built one over the other. He
unearthed the famous Temple of Bel, together with its great library,
consisting of over 23,000 tablets, containing the chronicles of Bel.
When a number of these tablets had been deciphered, they were found to
contain a complete system of philosophy, science, and religion, and
proved that those ancient people knew many things about astronomy, and
in some of the fundamental matters would not have much to learn from
astronomers of the present day. These tablets contained, amongst other
things, records of observations of Mars! It is claimed that Chinese
records go back to a still more remote date.
Since the discovery of the telescope our knowledge of Mars has gradually
extended, and its general surface configuration is now well known to all
students of the planet.
[Illustration: _From a Globe made by M. Wicks_ Plate XIII
MARS. MAP VI
"Syrtis Major" is seen on the extreme left just below the Equator.
"Sabaeus Sinus" is again in view just to the right of the centre, thus
this map completes the circuit of the Globe of Mars.]
The polar snow-caps were early depicted on drawings, also some of the
dark areas; especially the striking one which has been known as the
Kaiser Sea and the Hour Glass Sea, but is now usually termed Syrtis
Major. It has an outline somewhat resembling that of India; and, if we
include the southern portion, it is nearly as large in area.
Our maps of Mars are now practically uniform as regards the naming of
the places marked upon them. Formerly this was not so, as each country
had its own map and the places marked thereon were named after different
astronomers, and usually after those belonging to the country in which
the map was prepared. Much confusion arose from this practice, because
the same spot on Mars might have a different name on each map; thus it
was difficult to identify any particular spot when only the name was
known.
Some international jealousy also arose owing to the patriotic desire of
observers to identify particular spots upon Mars with the names of the
great men of their own country.
To remove this cause of friction and misunderstanding a system has now
been almost generally adopted of giving classical names to Martian
markings. Some of these are of portentous length and strange spelling,
but still the adoption of a uniform nomenclature has been a great
convenience to observers and others who have occasion to use or refer to
the maps.
On looking at a complete chart of the planet it will be seen that the
largest area of dark patches (which are believed to be areas capable of
supporting life) is situated in the southern hemisphere, and that
several of these are wedge-shaped, with the points trending northward.
On the earth it is just the opposite, the largest area of land being in
the northern hemisphere, and the wedge-shaped masses trend southward.
Our earth's surface comprises an area of about 193,000,000 square miles,
of which some 143,000,000 square miles are water, and the remaining
50,000,000 square miles land.
Mars has a surface area of about 56,000,000 square miles, about
35,000,000 square miles being desert, and the remaining 21,000,000
square miles land which may be habitable, as most of it is covered with
vegetation. There are no large areas of water anywhere upon Mars. This
calculation, however, makes no allowance for the lines of vegetation
which cross the desert, and contain canals, and, with the oases, may
have a very large population.
From the 50,000,000 square miles of land upon the earth must be deducted
the very large areas which are frozen during the greater part of the
year, and also the large areas which are deserts or bare rocks. This
would probably bring down the really habitable area to about 30,000,000
square miles.
Making a similar deduction in the case of Mars, but remembering that
more of the regions near the poles would be habitable during part of the
year than is the case on the earth (as there is practically no permanent
glaciation and the temperate zones extend nearly to the poles) the
habitable area would be reduced to, say, 15,000,000 square miles.
It will thus be seen that although the total surface area of Mars is
only rather more than one-quarter of that of the earth, the area of its
habitable land, even under its present unfavourable circumstances,
amounts to about half of the habitable area of the earth.
Looking at Mars from this point of view, it does not contrast so
unfavourably with the earth as is usually thought, especially when it is
remembered how small a proportion of the earth's area is really
populated.
Were it not for the great eccentricity of the planet's orbit, the
seasons upon Mars would be very much the same in the different zones as
they are on our world, as the inclination of the planet's equator is
only very slightly less than that of the earth. According to the latest
determination, the inclination in the case of Mars is 23° and 13'.
As the Martian year is nearly twice as long as ours (being 668 Martian
days, which are equal to 687 of our days) the seasons are of course
proportionately longer in duration. The eccentricity of the orbit,
however, causes a much greater difference between the lengths of summer
and winter in the two hemispheres.
* * * * *
In the northern hemisphere of Mars, spring lasts 191 Martian days;
summer, 181 days; autumn, 149 days; and winter, 147 days.
In the southern hemisphere spring lasts 149 days; summer, 147 days;
autumn, 191 days; and winter, 181 days.
Thus, in the northern hemisphere spring and summer together amount to
372 days, and autumn and winter to 296 days.
In the southern hemisphere, however, spring and summer have 296 days,
whilst autumn and winter last 372 days; so that the winter period of
the year is 76 days longer than in the northern hemisphere.
On the earth the winter portion of the year is seven days longer in the
southern hemisphere than it is in the northern hemisphere.
For this reason, our south polar snow-cap is larger than the north polar
cap; and we should naturally expect to find a similar condition upon
Mars, only greatly accentuated. Astronomical observation shows that this
is the case, for while the northern snow-cap on Mars attains a maximum
diameter of slightly under 80°, the southern snow-cap attains a maximum
diameter of over 96°. The snow-caps are not perfect circles, but
irregular in shape, and are, moreover, not exactly opposite to each
other.
Notwithstanding its much greater area the southern snow-cap melts to a
greater extent than the northern snow-cap does, owing to the intensity
of the heat at the melting period. The northern snow-cap usually melts
until the diameter is reduced to about 6°, whilst the much larger
southern cap may be reduced to about 5°. In the year 1894 it disappeared
entirely! The summer must have been unusually hot.
So far as can be gathered from the records of our whaling and polar
expeditions, it would appear that our north polar snow-cap is from 20°
to 30° in diameter when at the minimum; whilst the southern snow-cap is
nearly 40° in diameter when smallest.
* * * * *
We had arrived upon Mars on the 24th of September 1909, according to
terrestrial reckoning; but according to the Martian date it was then the
26th of June in the southern hemisphere, where Sirapion, our
landing-place, is situated. The season was, therefore, midsummer, and
as Sirapion is in latitude 25° south and in the sub-tropical zone, the
temperature was fairly high. The mornings were much more clear and
brilliant than those on our earth; the warmth and general "feel" of the
air at that time reminding me very much of what it is like in the south
of England between seven and eight o'clock on a hot sunny day. Those who
enjoy an early morning walk know how delightful and exhilarating it
becomes towards that time. There is neither chilliness nor uncomfortable
heat; one feels a delightful sense of freedom and that it is good to be
alive. This is really the best and most enjoyable time on a summer's
day. On Mars there was rather more warmth but a greater sense of
exhilaration. Of course, from near noon to about 3 P.M. it was much
warmer.
Usually a lovely rosy effulgence is seen in the atmosphere in the
mornings and evenings. As a rule, sunrise and sunset effects are much
more ethereal and more beautiful than those on the earth, the tints
being more delicate and the whole appearance of the sky less broadly
marked. It is as the difference between the crude broad effects of a
coloured poster and the delicate effects of a highly-finished painting.
What, in our sunsets, would appear a deep golden colour appears on Mars
as a delicate pale gold, merging into bright silver. What with us is a
carmine or deep rose, in Martian skies becomes a beautiful rose-pink;
whilst the darker, or Indian, red seen for some time at the latter
period of our sunsets is carmine in the Martian sky, and Indian red only
appears just at the last.
These tints are seen when the skies are of their normal clearness, but
after the occurrence of a great sand-storm in the desert and the upper
air has become filled with fine sand particles, the Martian sunsets are
equal in variety and depth of colour to anything seen on our earth
during the months immediately succeeding the Krakatoa eruption. Those
strange and intensely coloured sunsets will doubtless be remembered by
my readers who had the good fortune to see them during the many months
when they were visible after that great volcanic outburst in the year
1883.
Sand-storms have been unusually prevalent on Mars during the present
summer, passing over large areas of country and obscuring the sun for
considerable periods; so we have had several phenomenal sunsets
afterwards.
As the time passed on the days became cooler--the evenings being
considerably more so than on our earth in August, and twilight was very
much shorter. Towards the end of the Martian August evening dews began
to be succeeded by slight hoar frosts.
The heat in the tropics is not nearly so intense as on the earth. On the
other hand, in the high latitudes near the poles, the summer temperature
is higher than in similar latitudes on the earth, because upon Mars
there is no permanent glaciation except right at the poles.
We have, of course, seen the Martian polar stars. The axial tilt of the
planet being less than that of ours, and in a different direction, and
its orbit being inclined 1° and 51' in regard to the earth's orbit, it
follows that the poles of Mars must point to a different part of the
sky, and a considerable distance from our polar stars.
In the northern hemisphere of Mars the polar star is a small one marked
on our maps in the constellation of Cepheus, and it is almost on the
boundary between that constellation and Cygnus. The pole star lies
nearly in a line joining the brighter stars [alpha] Cephei and
[alpha] Cygni.
The south polar star is a small one marked [symbol] in that part of
the large constellation of Argo Navis which is termed Carnia.
Although the polar stars are very small, they shine more brightly in the
Martian skies than the north polar star does to us, and are therefore
more easily seen.
CHAPTER XXV
MANY THINGS SEEN UPON MARS--I RECEIVE SOME NEWS
During the remainder of our stay upon Mars we visited almost every
important place upon the planet, either by means of air-ships, motors,
or by travelling along the main canals in splendidly equipped electric
boats.
We passed through the whole length of the Eumenides-Orcus, from its
starting-point on the Phoeniceus Lacus, in the southern hemisphere, to
the Trivium Charontis, in the northern hemisphere--a distance of 3540
miles, this being the longest canal on the planet. We visited the Solis
Lacus, or "Lake of the Sun" (an area larger than England), situated in
the southern hemisphere, which has usually been seen by our observers as
a large dark patch, oval in shape. Indications of changes in this area
were, however, noted at the time of the opposition in 1907; and it is
not improbable that further alterations will be seen shortly.
Numerous important towns exist upon this area, and several canals
connect it with surrounding areas.
We visited the north pole in our air-ship, and saw the snow falling
thickly, and rapidly adding to the size and thickness of the snow-cap,
it being winter time. We visited the south pole and watched the
fast-melting snow (the cap being almost at its minimum size) and the
distribution of the resultant water down the various broad channels
which conduct it to the canals, from whence it is carried all over the
planet.
When it is spring in the northern hemisphere the winter snow-cap at the
north pole will begin to melt in like manner, and the water be
distributed in a similar way. The melting begins about the 1st April and
lasts till July, and sometimes considerably later in the year.
Thus, during the Martian year there are two distributions of water--one
from the north pole and one from the south pole; and the growth of
vegetation follows the passage of the water as it flows downwards from
the poles to the equator.
On our earth vegetation progresses in an exactly opposite direction.
Beginning near the tropics, where it is always summer, as the sun passes
northward of the equator so vegetation gradually appears and develops
onwards towards the north pole. It is exactly the same in the southern
hemisphere; after the sun crosses the equator into the south the
vegetation grows and spreads towards the south pole.
The reason of this is that on the earth the supply of water by rainfall
and snows is abundant, and it only requires the warmth of the sun to
cause vegetation to spring up again at the proper season when the winter
has passed.
On Mars the sun has the same action, but until the water comes down from
the poles and furnishes the necessary moisture, the sun can produce no
effect and there can be no fresh vegetation. Thus, on Mars, the flow of
water is the determining factor, and vegetation follows its course from
the poles towards the equator.
Observation shows that this is the case, and it has formed one of the
strongest arguments in support of the idea of water conveyance by means
of artificial canals. The opponents of the canal theory seem carefully
to avoid any mention of this argument.
While we were watching the melting of the snow at the south pole, I
mentioned to Merna and Tellurio, who accompanied me, that one of our
scientific men, relying for support on a speculation by a lady writer,
had arrived at the conclusion that the snow-caps could not possibly
supply anything like the amount of water required. The writer in
question had stated that the maximum area of the southern snow-cap was
2,400,000 square miles; and, assuming it was composed of snow of an
average depth of twenty feet, this would only give an average depth of
about one foot of water over its whole area.
The whole of the dark areas on the planet covered at least 17,000,000
square miles, and as this was seven times the area of the snow-cap, it
followed that the dark areas could not be covered with more than two
inches of water. From this scanty and inadequate supply of two inches of
water allowance must be made for an enormous loss by evaporation; so, as
the writer said, "the polar reservoirs are despoiled in the act of being
opened."
Tellurio at once settled the matter by saying, "Mr. Poynders, it is a
very pretty theory, but, unfortunately for its supporters, it is
entirely wrong, the figures being inaccurate, and the estimate of the
extent of the area to be supplied, as well as the amount of water
available, is made under a complete misapprehension of the facts."
[Illustration: _From a Globe made by M. Wicks_ Plate XIV
MARS. MAP VII
The white area at the top of this map is the south polar snow-cap, at
about its usual maximum size. In some hard winters it attains a diameter
of considerably over 100 degrees.]
"The maximum area of the south polar snow-cap is usually more than
10,000,000 square miles instead of less than 2,500,000 as stated, but it
is sometimes still greater during a hard winter. Then, where did the
writer acquire the notion that the whole of the dark areas had to be
covered with water? Only the canals and trenches have to be filled, and,
at the highest computation, these would cover only 2,250,000 square
miles! So even accepting her average of twenty feet depth of the snow
(which would give about one foot of water over the whole area of the
snow-cap), there would still be sufficient water to fill every canal and
trench upon our planet to a depth of nearly four feet six inches.
"Let us suppose we have 700 series of canals, each averaging 1400 miles
in length, and each series having an aggregate width (including the area
of the irrigation trenches) of 2-1/4 miles. You will see that gives
about 2,250,000 square miles to be covered with water. My estimate of
the area to be covered is, however, much in excess of the real amount,
as the average aggregate width of the series of canals would be less
than I have assumed, and the trenches are shallow.
"I must also point out that only a small proportion of the whole number
of canals would be in use at any given time, and the depth of the polar
snows averages considerably more than twenty feet; so a very much
greater depth of water can be secured in those canals which are in use.
The main canals which are used for navigation purposes are, of course,
much wider and deeper than the irrigation canals. In the hotter regions
many covered compensation reservoirs are provided, and these make good
the wastage caused by excessive evaporation where pipes cannot be used."
"Thank you, sir," I said; "the information you have now given me
entirely confirms the figures as to the area of the snow-cap, &c.,
mentioned by Professor Lowell, but as regards the depth of the snow and
the size of the area to be covered, he has with scientific caution
refrained from estimating to the full extent which the facts you mention
seem to warrant. In addition to this, no allowance has been made for the
water derived from the northern snow-cap."
Thus vanished the theory which was supposed to support the view that the
canals must be hopelessly unworkable, and could never be of any use for
irrigation purposes.
It had also been argued that no intelligent beings would construct
canals if the planet were generally flat, as it would only be necessary
to let the water flow over the surface as far as it would go, and thus
irrigate the parts reached by the water; whilst if it were not flat, the
canals could not be constructed at all.
I asked Tellurio "What he thought of this suggestion?"
He replied, "Well, sir--here we have a planet believed to possess only a
very scanty supply of water, which must require the most careful
husbanding and economy in distribution; yet it seems to have been calmly
suggested that we would deliberately waste the precious fluid by
allowing it to flow at random over the small portion of our land which
it would reach, where it might or might not be required! Our engineers,
I may say, are quite capable of overcoming any difficulties arising
from inequalities of the ground.
"If, as has been contended, the loss by evaporation would be so great in
canals where the water is fairly deep as to result in depletion of the
supply, it is clear there must be a hundred times greater loss from the
same cause if the water is allowed to spread in a very shallow pool over
a large area where it would be totally unprotected from the sun! Then,
again, every part of our planet not reached by the water would become
desert.
"No, sir," Tellurio added, "the Martians are far too intelligent to
waste the water in this fashion: hence their canal system by which the
water is economically distributed where required, and also protected
from undue evaporation. It must not be forgotten that our canals are
also means of communication across the deserts, and without them distant
parts of the planet would be entirely isolated from the rest of our
world, except for our air-ships.
"Our canal system has been a matter of slow growth and development.
Beginning with the straightening of the beds of old rivers and narrow
channels connecting seas, the canals were then constructed where they
were most needed; but as time passed on, and our water supply from
rainfall became less and less, we were convinced of the necessity of
adopting a complete system of canalisation in anticipation of the time
when our polar snows would be our only source of supply. This was
gradually carried into effect, and even now additional canals are being
constructed to meet the requirements of places not reached by existing
canals.
"In order to secure the return of the water to the poles, and so ensure
a future supply, it is absolutely necessary that, wherever possible, the
water should be conveyed in open channels so as to allow evaporation to
take place, otherwise much would be lost by soakage into the soil."
"Thank you, sir," I said; "those statements meet another objection which
has been urged against the possibility of the canals existing; it
apparently being assumed that the whole system must have been carried
out simultaneously, and that the population of Mars would have been much
too small to admit of that being done."
"Our population is by no means small, sir, having regard to the size of
our planet; and the Martians, as intelligent beings, have always been in
the habit of looking well ahead to ascertain what provision would be
required to satisfy our prospective needs. Your people take far too
narrow a view of these matters."
Thus many controversial matters were satisfactorily cleared up by
statements of actual facts.
During our journeys over the planet we came across a large number of
canals in different parts which have apparently not yet been discovered
by our observers. These were not all narrow lines of canals, and many of
them were double ones, so our observers have more work yet before them
in finding out these lines and recording them on their charts.
Professor Lowell, who has made many experiments in order to determine
how distant a fine line of known thickness (such as a telegraph wire)
may be situated and yet remain visible to the sight under ordinary
atmospheric conditions for clear seeing, has come to the conclusion that
when Mars arrives at its most favourable position for observation, and
other conditions are satisfactory, it will be possible to see lines on
the planet which are not more than one mile in width.
As regards the surface characteristics of Mars, we found that it is
generally very flat, and that only here and there one comes across
slight undulations, whilst hills and mountains are very few indeed.
There are, in fact, no high mountains anywhere; the highest altitudes
rarely approach 2000 feet, and such heights as these are quite
exceptional.
This was quite in accordance with our expectations, because no mountains
have ever been seen upon Mars, though they have been carefully searched
for by our observers. If there were any elevations much exceeding 2000
feet in height they would have been visible sometimes when the planet
was passing under the careful scrutiny of our observers, and they could
not have entirely escaped observation.
In all probability Mars never at any time possessed mountains whose
height would be at all comparable with that of our mountains; for,
according to scientific calculation and reasoning, the planet's internal
heat was never sufficient to have caused the formation of such high
elevations on its crust.
As the planet advanced stage after stage in its development it became
colder and colder; all upheavals ceased, and the height of any elevated
parts upon its surface would thenceforward be gradually and continuously
reduced by weathering and erosion in the same way as has happened in
many places on our own world. We have no very high mountains in the
British Isles at the present time, but geology and physical geography
teach us that many of the low elevations now existing are merely the
basic wrecks and remains of mountains which, in ages past, must have
been of considerable altitude. As the world ages and becomes colder its
surface will tend to become more and more level, and the rivers will
become straighter in consequence.
As regards animals, we discovered that the larger varieties have become
extinct, and that there are at present no animals which can properly be
termed wild or fierce, for they cannot exist in the deserts without
water or vegetation. Numerous animals, however, frequent the irrigated
parts where there is vegetation, and, though in a complete state of
freedom, have for such an extremely long period been in constant contact
with the people that they have become quite tame. The people always
treat animals with kindness, and these free creatures are entirely
without fear of them.
Most of the animals are different from any we have upon the earth, but
some bear a general resemblance to ours of the same species, though they
are all of larger size, and differ considerably in details. Like the
people, they have developed through the long ages, and have reached a
higher point than our animals, and a few have even developed the power
of speech.
This may sound exaggerated--but just think! Many of our birds have been
taught to speak the human language, and a few have even acquired this
power by imitativeness. Who that has kept dogs, cats, monkeys, and
horses has not observed the desperate efforts of some of them to make
themselves understood. All are not alike, but we often come across an
animal which seems to understand almost everything we say, but none has
yet developed the power of making an intelligible communication to us,
although some try hard to do so. It does not seem beyond the bounds of
possibility that a few thousand years hence some animals, especially the
monkey species, may be able to speak a little.
The Martians do not use any of their animals as beasts of burden, and it
would be contrary to all their ideas to do so. On Mars nearly all heavy
labour is performed by means of electrical machines, thus both the
people and the animals are spared much heavy work.
Our animals are often greatly overloaded, but we have a salutary law to
protect them from this, as well as from other forms of cruelty; and the
persons responsible for the ill-treatment may be punished.
Human beings, however, may be overloaded and, in many cases, overworked
with impunity, for there is no law to protect the unorganised workers.
Is there not something wrong about this?
It may be argued that whilst animals cannot protect themselves human
beings can; but, alas, only too often the force of circumstances compels
workers to endure anything so long as they can earn a little to keep
body and soul together.
* * * * *
Flowers seem to be very plentiful here, and grow very tall and large.
Many varieties bear a strong resemblance to our variegated lilies, the
flowers being brilliantly tinted, and often measuring twelve to fifteen
inches across. But, as upon the earth, flowers are found in all colours
and sizes, and in infinite variety.
Trees also grow very tall, many varieties resembling our palms,
especially in and near the tropics, where there are also many varieties
of cactus. In the temperate and cooler zones trees resembling our firs
and pines are plentiful; whilst fruits, vegetables, and nuts, as well as
cereals, are grown in enormous quantities on the irrigated areas, as
these products form the chief articles of food amongst the Martians.
Insects are numerous on Mars, the conditions being very favourable to
insect life; and they are all on a very much larger scale than our
insects, especially those which fly.
Everywhere we go we are received by the people with the utmost courtesy
and kindness, and have become much attached to those with whom we have
been more closely associated. They are indeed a most amiable,
intelligent, and lovable people--always good tempered--dignified, yet
ready to display great enthusiasm when occasion requires.
The marriage tie is sacred and indissoluble on Mars, and divorce is
therefore unknown; but it is also quite unnecessary, for no cause ever
arises for a dissolution of marriage.
When Merna was telling me about this, I asked him whether any attempt
had been made to dispense with marriage in any Martian community,
stating that some of our advanced people were disposed to do so.
He answered that "Some such ideas had been in vogue amongst certain of
their nations about two thousand years ago, and attempts were also made
to abolish religious observances, but they proved complete failures, and
engendered strife. No nation adopting these views ever progressed or
prospered; the people were soon clamouring for the revival of their old
institutions, and since then no one had ever desired to dispense with
them. Both religion and marriage are essential to the stability and
well-being of all nations, and the people are soon lost without them.
You may be assured," added Merna, "that those on your earth who favour
such a change are quite mistaken in thinking it would be an advance in
civilisation, for, on the contrary, it would result in a reversion to
barbarism."
The Martian educational system is very thorough. In their earlier years
the children all receive a good education in general and scientific
knowledge, then they pass into the technical, trade, and business
schools. Every kind of business and trade is thoroughly taught by
teachers who are not mere doctrinaire professors, but persons who have
made their mark as good, capable, and practical workers in the
particular trade or business which they are required to teach.
We went over several of the ordinary and trade schools, and found them
fully equipped with everything likely to be required for a thorough
educational course of training.
In the warmer zones we found several large open-air amphitheatres
capable of accommodating from 10,000 to 100,000 persons. All around the
central arenas of these were rings of beautiful scented flowers and
shrubs. Both children and adults spend much of their leisure time in
open-air recreation and athletic games, and I was therefore not
surprised to find them all so bright and happy, as well as robustly
healthy in appearance.
As a result of our visit, the Martians now enjoy a new out-door
recreation; for M'Allister, pressing John into his service, has
initiated them into all the mysteries of golf, for which pastime their
level country is well suited. I have been much amused to note that,
whilst M'Allister has always expressed great admiration of the
mechanical skill of the Martians, they have risen in his estimation at
least 100 per cent. since they have taken so enthusiastically to his
national game, and he is never tired of telling us what a "sensible"
people they are!
He has taken up their training with all his Scottish vim and
thoroughness, and has insisted upon the full rigour of the game. All
attempts to Martianise its various technical terms he has courteously,
but firmly, suppressed; the Martian vocabulary has, therefore, been
considerably extended by the addition of the numerous fearsome
technicalities which sound so strange, even to an Englishman who is not
familiar with the game. Whatever may be the ultimate result to the
Martians, there is no doubt but that M'Allister is most thoroughly
enjoying himself.
Tellurio informed me that their medical men have very little to do in
the way of curing ailments, their studies and efforts being mainly
directed to the prevention of disease; consequently disease and illness
are very rare, and many of the diseases which afflicted the people in
past ages have been entirely eradicated.
The use of radium as a medical accessory has been known to them for a
very long period, and they are able to prepare and utilise it without
the slightest risk of any untoward results.
Another large factor in ensuring a strong and healthy population is the
methodical system they adopt in planning all their towns. We in England
have only recently realised the necessity of town-planning and the
advantages of garden cities. On Mars, however, town-planning has been
most systematically carried out for centuries; all their towns are
glorified garden cities, presenting a happy combination of beauty,
utility, and healthfulness.
The general arrangement is as follows: On a circular area, varying from
one to five or more miles in diameter, according to circumstances, is
the central portion of the town, containing the splendid administrative
and business buildings, museums, winter-gardens, educational
establishments, and places of amusement, as well as many fine
residences. Surrounding this area is a wide ring-canal, on the farther
side of which is the outer zone of the town, united to the central
portion by many wide and handsome bridges. On the outer zone are
extensive residential areas, then a zone of factories and workshops, and
beyond that an area often extending for miles, which is covered with
cereals and vegetables, fruit trees and nut trees. Outside all is a zone
of timber trees. The town and its surroundings, therefore, cover a vast
area.
The canals radiate in all directions from the outer edge of the wide
ring-canal, and all quays, wharves, and warehouses are alongside of
these canals. Thus the ring-canal is kept quite clear of all such
buildings, but all round both sides of it are beautiful terraces of
white stone, with numerous pavilions, broad boulevards, winter-gardens,
and promenades.
All the buildings have open spaces or gardens around them, thus securing
ample allowance of light and air. Smoke is quite unknown; no noxious
gases or vapours are discharged into the atmosphere from any of the
factories, but all such emanations which cannot be absolutely destroyed
are purified, condensed, or otherwise dealt with within the buildings.
Thus the air is always kept pure and wholesome.
From this description it will be seen that the planning of a town is
very systematic, and that it much resembles a wheel. The hub is the
central part of the town; the spokes are represented by the bridges; and
the outer rim--a very wide one--contains the outer zones.
Besides the gardens there are large open spaces where air-ships have
their stations, from whence they can start, or on to which they can
descend. The air-ships, also, are usually constructed so that they can
descend into the canals, on which they can not only float but be
propelled.
Many of these town areas are the oases, about which so much has been
said, and which, like many other Martian details, have been described as
illusions. I only wish we had a plentiful supply of such illusions in
our own old country!
One of the oases we visited was the Lucus Ascræus, in the northern
hemisphere. A large number of canals converge from all directions on to
this spot--seventeen of them are marked on our maps--so I expected to
find it a place of considerable importance. It is, in fact, a very
thriving business and manufacturing place--the Birmingham of Mars,
besides being also one of the many centres of government. Like most of
the manufacturing towns, it is near the tropical region--because the
Martians derive most of their heat and power from solar emanations which
they have discovered, and these they store up and transmit to very
distant places for use when required. Nearly all the places on Mars to
which several canals converge are busy centres of trade and contain
large populations.
There are numerous large towns near the canals on all the dark areas,
differing only in detail from those on the oases, the general plan being
the same.
I remarked to John that "I thought the towns on the dark areas ought to
show as rounded spots slightly darker in tint than the surrounding dark
areas. Where several towns were close together they would probably be
seen as a single spot, large in area and irregular in shape. It seems
strange that, except for a few shown on Professor Lowell's charts, they
have not been seen by our astronomers; but perhaps during the present
near approach of Mars to the earth some of our keen-sighted observers
who possess large instruments may see and take note of many more of
these dark rounded spots, as they are very numerous, and new towns are
in course of development."
During the spring and summer a large number of the people find
employment in the regions near the poles, especially those whose work is
connected with the canal system and who have to see that the water from
the melting snow-caps is turned into the proper channels and everything
connected therewith kept in good working condition. All these workers,
however, migrate to warmer latitudes as the very long and dreary winter
approaches.
* * * * *
I have just received some interesting and very unexpected news which, as
some writer says, "gives me furiously to think."
John and M'Allister came to me asking anxiously whether I had fixed the
date for our departure.
I replied that we should probably keep to our original programme and
leave about the beginning of December, but asked John why he was so
anxious to know?
"Well, Professor," he answered, "there is more than one reason for my
question. I do not think our stay should be prolonged. Haven't you
noticed any change in us?"
I replied that "I had not seen any particular change or alteration in
them, except that in build and general appearance they were becoming
more like the Martians."
"Yes, Professor," exclaimed John, "that's just it. I don't know whether
it is the Martian air or the Martian food, or the combination of both,
but we certainly are becoming more like Martians every day. Our eyes are
becoming luminous, our complexions and features are changing, and, by
Jove! if I haven't grown nearly two inches since we came here! If I go
on like this I shall soon be such a giant that I shall not care to go
back at all."
"Really, John," I said, "is it so bad as that? Now I come to look at you
critically you certainly do look taller; and I can see a little
luminosity in M'Allister's eyes, and rather more in yours. I suppose,
being the youngest, you are more susceptible than M'Allister or myself."
"Yes, I think that must be the case, Professor," remarked John.
"However," I added, looking at him and smiling, "you told me there were
more reasons than one, so I suppose you have kept the weightiest reason
to the last."
"Well, I don't know about its being the weightiest reason," he
answered, "but we shall require nearly four months to accomplish our
journey to England after we leave here, and I reckon that by that time
my stock of tobacco will be pretty nearly used up. I have given a lot
away to our Martian friends, and I've tried some of the native growth;
it's rather decent stuff, but not a patch upon my mixture."
I burst out laughing in such a hearty fashion that it set them off too,
as I remarked, "Ah, John, I had a shrewd idea that there was something
more behind your anxiety than the fact that you were becoming
Martianised."
"Heh, John," exclaimed M'Allister, touching him playfully on the
shoulder, "the Professor had you all right that time, I'm thinking!"
John blushed up to the eyes, and said no more.
Ultimately it was agreed that it would be well to leave Mars on the 1st
December, according to terrestrial reckoning.
So that matter was settled; but, just after they had left, Merna and
Eleeta came in, both looking very glowing and happy.
After the usual greetings and a few casual remarks, Merna announced that
he and Eleeta were to be united in the coming autumn.
I was a little surprised at the suddenness of the announcement, but at
the same time exceedingly pleased; so, embracing them, I congratulated
them heartily and wished them every happiness; then they left to tell
some one else the news.
But, as I have said, these things "gave me to think."
CHAPTER XXVI
WE WITNESS SOME WONDERFUL AERIAL EVOLUTIONS AND LISTEN TO MARVELLOUS
MUSIC
Wherever we went we found new subjects for wonder and admiration, and
fresh proofs of the high state of civilisation and development attained
by the Martians. We had seen many evidences of their genius in
engineering and mechanical undertakings, but we found that they excelled
in every art and science, and their achievements made terrestrial
accomplishments appear poor and even paltry by comparison. Whether we
examined their sculpture, paintings, pictures, or photographs--which
latter they take direct and at one operation, with all the natural
tints--or whether we listened to music, our verdict was perforce the
same--"We had not previously known anything to equal it."
We have all become fairly accustomed to seeing numerous air-ships moving
in all directions across the sky in the daytime, but it still seems
strange to us to see the lights of the air-ships flitting about the
nocturnal sky.
I mentioned this to Merna, and he remarked that no doubt it did seem
rather strange to us, adding that my mention of air-ships was singularly
apropos of what was then in his mind, for he was just about to inform us
that an interesting aerial display had been arranged and was to take
place that evening, with the view of affording us some idea of Martian
out-door entertainments.
We all expressed our thanks, and our appreciation of the kindness we
were receiving from the Martian nation; and I ventured to suggest that
probably we were indebted to him for a considerable proportion of it.
He answered that it was true he had taken some share in this affair and
in a few of the arrangements for the functions we had already attended,
but that many others had done the same, for it was natural to the
Martians to do all in their power when any help was needed. As we were
strangers from another world they all vied with each other in making
suggestions and arrangements which would afford us pleasure, or help to
enable us to see all that was possible in their world.
We were fully aware that this was the case, for we were received with
kindness and welcome wherever we went.
Merna's affection for me seemed unbounded, and his love was shown in
every action. Yet, like all the other Martians, he was never obtrusively
demonstrative, everything being done in a quiet and natural manner. When
on the earth his disposition had been very pleasing, but now his Martian
nature seemed to have endowed him with a capacity for loving far
transcending that of his human nature.
He was the same towards John, and we often spoke about it in Merna's
absence, whilst M'Allister had become as much attached to him as we
were.
Just before sunset Merna rejoined us, and we passed out of the city into
the open country to a spot not far from the place where we had landed
from the _Areonal_. Here we found a large concourse of people assembled,
and their numbers were being added to by fresh arrivals every minute. On
looking upwards we saw air-ships speeding towards us from every quarter.
Some brought passengers and landed them, but it was evident that most of
the air-ships were about to take part in the display, as they remained
up in the air instead of coming down to the ground.
We met many Martians whom we knew, and were introduced to others, so the
time passed quickly in interesting conversation.
As soon as darkness fell Merna informed us that the display was about to
commence, adding that he had purposely refrained from giving us any
inkling of its nature, as he thought the unexpected would afford us
greater pleasure.
We were gazing upwards at the vast assemblage of air-ships, which were
lit up by the ordinary lamps used when travelling at night, when
suddenly the whole sky became brilliant with the glow of countless
thousands of coloured lights, and the air-ships began to move into their
allotted positions.
Every ship--and there was a very large number of them--was covered all
over with electric lamps. Some of the ships had all red lights, others
all blue, others yellow, and so on through the whole range of tints
known to us, besides many tints which we had never seen before.
The evolutions began with the formation of simple geometrical designs,
starting with a complete circle of immense diameter. Then, inside this
circle of many-coloured lights other ships took up their position, and,
before we were prepared for anything, a triangle of lights had been
formed. It was clear that even in their amusements the Martians were
scientific; for here outlined in glowing colours was the familiar
geometrical figure of an equilateral triangle inscribed within a circle,
perfectly worked out on a most gigantic scale, and very pretty it was.
Quickly, another triangle was formed across the first one, the result
being a six-pointed star; and so on with several other more elaborate
geometrical figures. The rapidity and certainty with which these
air-ships took up the requisite positions and showed their coloured
lights in the appropriate places was marvellous to see.
After about a dozen geometrical figures had been formed there ensued a
rapid and bewildering movement of the ships towards the southern vault
of the sky. Coloured lights flashed and whirled about in what, for a few
minutes, seemed chaotic confusion, then suddenly the chaos was
transformed into order. The vessels formed up in long rows one below the
other, each row having one distinctive colour: a little movement of the
ships from the centre to each end, in a downward direction, and the
straight rows were transformed into complete semicircles concentric with
each other, their bases seeming to reach the ground. Then they closed
together, and lo! right across the sky shone a perfect representation of
a rainbow (an extremely rare phenomenon upon Mars) glowing in brilliant
light, with every tint and _nuance_ accurate, and a thousand times
brighter than any rainbow we had ever seen. It was magnificent!
Further rapid movements followed: the semicircles were broken up; the
large vessels now being arranged in a long straight line across the sky,
with the smaller vessels in another line just below and in front of
them. The electric lamps were then instantaneously extinguished, and all
was darkness. But only for a moment; then from the top of every vessel
numerous immense pillars of coloured lights shot upwards into the sky.
We gazed at this in some perplexity, wondering what it all meant, as the
design gradually developed to its completion. Then John touched my arm,
excitedly exclaiming, "Look, Professor; it is the spectrum of the sun!"
Yes, that it was, and never had we gazed upon such an immense and
glorious spectrum. We pointed out to each other the lines of hydrogen,
sodium, strontium, and many others, all of which were truly depicted,
both in colour and position. These lines were formed by the lights of
the smaller vessels shown against the background of the lights on the
large vessels, and we noticed that all the Martians around us quickly
recognised what the lights represented.
Next we had a representation of the spectrum of Sirius, then that of
Aldebaran, and after that a spectrum which we were unable to identify.
Merna explained that it was the spectrum of their south polar star. A
few others were shown, then the line arrangement of the ships was again
broken up, the search-lights extinguished, and the coloured lamps once
more shone out.
Many of the ships now rushed across the sky over our heads in all
directions, and, after a few evolutions, the whole were seen arranged so
as to form four immense concentric circles, with a considerable space
between each ship.
The ships in the two inner circles then began to move slowly, and
passed in two wavy lines alternately in front of one ship and behind the
next ship in the outer circles, the serpentine movement gradually
becoming more and more rapid; and most wonderful changes of colour were
produced by the passage of the vessels past those lighted with lamps of
another colour. Swifter and swifter became the speed until it seemed
utterly impossible that these intricate movements could go on without
resulting in a series of collisions and disasters. Yet, with all this
bewildering whirling, twisting, and intertwining, the ships were guided
on their courses with consummate skill and with an unerring accuracy
which was marvellous to behold.
Another shake of the aerial kaleidoscope and the vessels were seen drawn
up in three parallel lines on the east and three on the west. Then the
search-lights again flashed out, filling the whole intermediate area of
the sky with beams of brilliant coloured light, which were caused to
oscillate sideways and overlap, producing a most gorgeous intermingling
of glowing colours. The Martians certainly had a complete understanding
of all the peculiarities connected with mixtures of coloured lights.
Up to this time silence had reigned, for no sound came to us from this
vast aerial fleet; but now there burst forth from both ranks of vessels
strains of music of such ravishing sweetness that I and my two
colleagues were quite overwhelmed. It seemed as though our mortal bodies
were completely etherealised by the thrilling melodies which floated
down to us from the upper air.
This was not all. When on the earth we had read of attempts to connect
musical tones and chords with the chromatic scale of colour, it being
suggested that each musical sound had its own distinctive
tone-colouring. Now we saw it practically demonstrated, for each chord
of music was accompanied by changes in the colours of the search-light
beams; and on comparing notes afterwards John and I found ourselves
agreeing that the colours shown appeared exactly to interpret what our
inner consciousness seemed to evolve, but which we could not have
expressed in words. It was like a scene of enchantment as we watched
those immense bands of glowing colours changing so rapidly and
synchronising with the chords of music. Merna informed us that the
lights of each vessel were electrically controlled from the keyboard of
one of the musical instruments on the ship.
This was followed by a piece resembling a grand chorale: then an
intricate fugue was performed, the several movements being taken up in
succession by the ranks on each side alternately, and apparently flung
to and fro from one side to the other of that vast area in magnificent
sequences and variations until it seemed that our human nature was so
uplifted, and we were so filled with ecstasy, that we could bear no
more.
Many of the instruments were quite different from anything we had known
upon the earth, and when some of these were unaccompanied the music
sounded exactly like a grand choir of Martians singing in the heavens.
It really seemed to us quite impossible that this concord of sweet
sounds could be instrumental music, so perfect was the vocal effect.
Several other pieces were played, each having its own distinctive
character; then, after a short interval, the search-lights were
suddenly flashed on to the city of Sirapion; the beautiful buildings
with their domes, towers, and minarets looking exquisitely ethereal as
they were bathed in the beams of the glowing and ever-changing prismatic
light. The beams were next directed downwards upon the assembly, and we
gained a truer appreciation of the immense numbers that were gathered
together.
After this short interlude we were entranced by the opening bars of a
very grand and majestic composition. As the first strains reached us I
noticed that all the Martians who were seated at once rose erect; every
Martian bared his head, raised his right hand, and, with an expression
of rapt intensity and reverence, gazed towards the heavens. I and my
companions immediately adopted a similar attitude, for Merna explained
that this piece was the Martian Hymn of Praise to the Great Ruler of the
Universe; and that its performance was regarded as one of their most
solemn acts of public worship.
The grandeur and majesty of this music, its melodious themes and
thrilling harmonies, are utterly beyond my powers of description; the
air and sky seemed filled and pulsating with prayer and praise, then
resounding with grand crescendoes of triumphant shouts; each succeeding
movement of the music carrying it higher and ever higher in the scale,
until at last it seemed to soar and pierce the infinite, the final
cadences dying away in melodious strains of celestial beauty and
ineffable sweetness.
Finally the air-ships all circled round the sky, then took their
departure--darting off in all directions--the sound of their sweet music
becoming fainter and fainter in the distance until at last all was
solemn silence; then the great assembly slowly and quietly dispersed.
For some minutes none of us spoke, for each was in deep thought, so
impressive and exalting had been the effect of that wonderful and
majestic hymn. When at length Merna turned to us and asked if we were
pleased with what we had seen and heard, we found it very difficult to
give adequate expression to our feelings.
Then M'Allister said, "Mon, it was beautiful, most beautiful! and I
never felt so nigh to heaven as I have this night!"
I remarked to John that "I had never expected to hear any music that
would equal, much more excel, the incomparable 'Hallelujah Chorus' in
Handel's 'Messiah.' It had always seemed to me impossible that any music
could ever be composed which would even approach it in majesty and
power; but what we had heard that night certainly surpassed it."
On looking at my watch I found that the musical portion of this feast of
tone and colour had occupied nearly three hours; yet, as I remarked, it
had seemed to me only a few minutes!
"Yes," John replied, "to me it has been an experience like that of the
monk Felix in Longfellow's 'Golden Legend.' The monk went out into the
woods one day, where he saw a snow-white bird, and listened to its sweet
singing until the sound of the convent bell warned him that it was time
to return. When he reached the convent he was amazed to find the faces
of the monks were all strange to him; he knew no one, and no one knew
him, or had ever even heard of him. At last one very old monk, who had
been there over a hundred years, said he remembered seeing a monk Felix
when he first entered the convent. The records were searched, and it was
found that Brother Felix had left the convent a hundred years before,
and as he had never returned he had been entered in the list of the
dead. So then
'They knew, at last,
That such had been the power
Of that celestial and immortal song,
A hundred years had passed,
And had not seemed so long
As a single hour.'
"That has really been something like my own experience to-night,"
continued John; "for I have scarcely been conscious of the passage of
time, and hours have seemed only minutes! I trust, Merna, that you will
convey to your friends our most grateful thanks for all the pleasure we
have derived from this magnificent display of Martian attainments."
M'Allister and I joined in this request, and Merna promised to comply
with our wishes. He seemed very pleased at our appreciation; and he told
John that his quotation had recalled to his memory the beautiful poem by
Longfellow, which had been a favourite with him during his earthly
school-days, but had lain entirely dormant in his mind until now.
We all agreed that, however long we might live, the memory of that
evening's events--the magnificent display of aerial skill, the glorious
harmonies of colour, and, above all, the majestic and incomparable
music--could never be effaced from our minds. We wondered whether aerial
flight would ever be brought so completely under control as to permit of
a similar display in the skies of our own world.
Merna replied that he was sure it would be quite possible some day, but
it must be remembered that what we had been witnessing was the result of
centuries of Martian experience in aerial navigation.
Merna then gave us an account of the progress of Martian discovery in
regard to aeronautics, from which we gathered that the earlier
experiences of the Martians had been somewhat similar to those of our
own people. They began with bags of various shapes inflated with gas
lighter than air, similar to our balloons, then experimented with
aeroplanes of various designs, also bird-like wings, on a very large
scale, actuated by electric and other motors. As time went on, however,
their atmosphere became thinner and thinner, until at last all such
forms of apparatus became nearly, if not quite, useless as a means of
artificial flight.
After this they made use of numerous vertical screws of a spiral form,
which were caused to revolve with extreme rapidity by the aid of
electrical machinery; and a few of the vessels thus equipped are still
in use. But the discovery of natural forces emanating from the sun and
from their own planet soon led to the devising of means for utilising
this natural power, and this has practically superseded everything else.
Now all their air-ships and many of their machines are actuated by this
power, and are under the most perfect control. Air-ships are used for
all purposes of passenger traffic and freight carrying. So are vessels
on the canals and motor vehicles on the roads; and railways are,
therefore, unnecessary.
CHAPTER XXVII
A FAREWELL BANQUET AND A PAINFUL PARTING
The time was nigh at hand when we must think about our arrangements for
returning to the earth, and, as it drew nearer and nearer, I became much
troubled. I felt that it would be endangering Merna's dear life to take
him to England, for our terrestrial microbes would probably prove fatal
to a Martian, so it was impossible to suggest it to him; at the same
time I felt that I could not again part with my newly-found son, who was
now all in all to me.
Pondering over the matter, I wondered whether the Martians would allow
me to stay with them and end my days on Mars with my beloved son.
Just then Soranho came to see me, and we sat awhile talking together.
Presently he said, quietly, "Mr. Poynders, you would I know desire to
stay here with your son, but are doubtful about mentioning the matter to
me. Doubt no longer, my dear sir! We shall be proud and happy to have
you with us; and I am quite sure that I am fulfilling the wishes of our
people when I now cordially invite you, in their name, to make your home
with us!"
Thus the Martian intuition had solved my difficulty; and, fervently
thanking Soranho, I told him I gratefully accepted his kind invitation
and would remain upon Mars, although parting with my two old friends
would be a hard task for me.
It had been decided that we should leave on the 1st of December, that
being the latest possible date, as the earth was moving so rapidly away
from Mars that each day's delay would mean a longer journey. As it was,
we should have about 215,000,000 miles to travel before we could reach
our destination; and, as that would require at least 108 days, we could
not arrive in England before the 18th of March 1910; probably it would
be a day or two later, as our course would take us so near the sun.
When John and M'Allister came in I went to the receptacle where my chart
was kept and brought it out. Placing it on the table, I carefully
explained what would be required, and gave them full instructions for
setting and keeping their proper course, so as to head off the earth on
its journey. These instructions I had also written out in readiness, so
that each might know and be able to act in an emergency.
Then came the most difficult part of my task, and, in hesitating words
and rather disjointed sentences, I announced to them my decision to
remain on the planet. John and M'Allister were very much moved; but, as
they saw the matter was really settled, they soon desisted from their
attempts to dissuade me.
During the day we received from Soranho an invitation, in the name of
the whole people of Mars, to attend a banquet on the day before our
departure to enable them to bid us adieu.
This we, of course, accepted; and when we arrived at the place indicated
we found that it was the largest hall in Sirapion, the immense building
being crowded with Martians from all parts of the planet.
After the banquet Soranho rose and announced that their friends from the
earth would be leaving next day, and he trusted that all who could do
so would attend at our point of departure to give us a hearty send-off.
He then dwelt upon the pleasure which our visit and company had afforded
them, and said the good wishes of the whole people would go with us;
adding that we might feel assured that anything which the Martian nation
could do, by means of transmitted influences, to aid in the advancement
of our world would be most cheerfully and willingly done.
Then he went on to make the announcement that, finding I had a strong
desire to stay with them and with my newly-found son, he had invited me,
in their name, to do so.
This announcement was received with tremendous enthusiasm: the whole
company spontaneously rising to their feet, with repeated acclamations
and expressions of satisfaction.
I then rose to express my heartfelt thanks for their kindness, saying
that for many years of my life upon the earth I had loved to study their
planet; and now that I had spent some time upon it and been the
recipient of so much kindness and goodwill from all whom I had met, I
loved both their world and their people; and in deciding to accept the
invitation so cordially given in their name I trusted they would always
find me a good citizen of Tetarta.
Merna translated this speech to them, and there ensued another scene of
indescribable enthusiasm.
John followed with a very feeling expression of his gratitude for the
welcome and kindness he had received as a stranger from another world.
Then came M'Allister's turn, and his speech was a characteristic one.
Turning to Soranho, he said: "Mon!--no, I should say 'Chief!'--I thank
you and all the people for the delightful time we have had upon Mars,
and can only say I'm very sorry to leave you. But I have an old wife of
my own in the world far across space over yonder, and away up in bonnie
Scotland. She will be looking for my return home; so, much as I should
like to stay longer with you, I cannot keep from going to her. Thank you
all, and God bless you!"
I do not know how Merna managed to translate this speech, but it
evidently gave the audience as much satisfaction as the others had done.
So, with many hearty handshakes and expressions of goodwill, we left the
hall at the conclusion of the proceedings and returned to our home,
where John and M'Allister were to sleep for the last time.
The next morning we sat discussing the final arrangements for their
departure, as they would start on their return journey in two hours'
time.
John and M'Allister were both much affected at my decision to stay upon
Mars (or Tetarta, as it will be to me in future), for they did not like
the idea of leaving me behind, and made some further attempt to induce
me to change my mind on the subject. I felt, however, that they were
really convinced I was doing the best thing possible in the
circumstances, and had no hope that I would accede to their request.
I told them my decision was unalterable, and that, as we all felt the
poignancy of the parting, it would be better to take leave of each other
now, rather than in public when they boarded the _Areonal_.
As they rose to say farewell I said, "John, my dear fellow, I have kept
a record of all our doings since we left old England, thinking that, if
published, it might prove of some interest to my countrymen.
"I have a few words to add to it, and also a letter to enclose for you
to take to my solicitors; but Merna will hand the packet to you when you
actually start. I know you will carry out my wishes and see the book
through the press, although I have mentioned the tobacco and
laughing-gas incident!"
John smiled and promised to do as I wished; then rising, I said, "So
now, dear friends, a last and long good-bye to each other. We have been
close friends for many years and have many pleasant memories of the
times we have spent together; but, remember, our thoughts may still
unite us, though sundered by many million miles of space, and dwelling
upon different worlds!
"When I was on the earth I was living upon a star of the heavens; here,
upon Tetarta, I am still upon a star of the heavens, but also along with
the only living being to whom I have been united by ties of blood and
loving kinship.
"It is, as Merna once said, only a change of dwelling-places, and our
kindly Martian friends are delighted to keep me here. It is hard to part
from you, but do not wonder if I say--'Here I will live! here I will
die!'"
Then with many, many a lingering handshake and words of mutual love and
affection, we old friends bade each other an eternal adieu.
As he reached the doorway M'Allister--as truehearted a Scot as ever his
country produced--turned towards me, and with upraised hand, glistening
eyes, and lips quivering, exclaimed, "Mon, you are doing the right
thing, but I never thought I would feel a parting with an old friend so
much as I do this! God bless you, Professor!"
CHAPTER XXVIII
LAST WORDS TO MY READERS
As I have decided to stay here upon Mars, and have just taken leave of
my two dear old friends, I will now address a few last words to those
who may read this record of our trip to Mars, and then seal up the
packet ready for John to take with him.
In the course of my conversations with Merna's tutors, I learnt much
about the past history of the Martian people; and they told me that it
dates back to such a remote antiquity that, as compared with theirs,
ours is only the history of an infancy!
Mars, being a much smaller globe than the earth, cooled down and became
habitable æons before the earth reached that stage; and at the time when
the earlier inhabitants of our world were living in woods and
caves--slowly and painfully fashioning for themselves weapons and tools
out of chipped flint-stones--there existed upon Mars a people who had
then arrived at a full and vigorous civilisation.
What wonder then that, with all these past ages of development and the
incentive which the present physical condition of the planet supplies
them, the Martians of the present day are in all respects, whether
physically, morally, or intellectually, far in advance of the
inhabitants of our much younger, and therefore less developed, world!
The lessons to be learned from this, and from the physical conditions
now prevailing on the planet, are very similar.
Mars, gradually, but inevitably, becoming a vast desert, and with the
end of all things certain to arrive in a comparatively near future,
pictures to us what must as inevitably be the fate of our own world ages
hence, unless it come to an untimely end by some catastrophe.
As Professor Lowell has pointed out, we know we have an abundant supply
of water at the present time, but we also know that, ages ago, the area
of our world covered with water was immensely greater than it is now.
From the very beginning of our world's existence the process of
diminution of the water area has always gone on, and it will still go
on--slowly, surely, and continually.
As an inevitable result of this decrease of water, and other natural
conditions, vast areas of land on both sides of our tropical zones have
become deserts; and it is a scientific certainty that this process of
desertism will, and must continue, until it covers the whole world.
But, I think, the end will long be delayed, for the loss by desertism
will, as it seems to me, for ages be compensated by the new and
habitable land arising from areas now covered by water. The old sea-beds
upon Mars are now the most fertile areas upon that planet.
As the desertism increases conditions similar to those of Mars will
arise; the earth will become more level, polar glaciation will cease,
the atmosphere become thinner, and water vapour, instead of falling as
rain, will be carried by circulatory currents to the poles, and there be
deposited as snow. What the Martians have accomplished has shown us how
to stave off the water difficulty, and also how a highly civilised and
intelligent people can bravely and calmly face the end which they
clearly foresee!
This is the lesson from the present physical condition of Mars.
On the other hand, the continual progress of civilisation upon Mars, and
the very high development attained there, coupled with what we know of
our own progress during the ages past, give certainty to the hope that
our own civilisation will continue to develop, slowly indeed, but
surely; and also to the belief that, compared to what it will be in the
future, our present stage of civilisation is merely savagery.
Development will lead to progress in everything which tends to increase
the intelligence, wisdom, and happiness of the whole human race.
Our world has seen the rise and fall of many civilisations, but fresh
ones have risen, phoenix-like, from the ashes of those which have
departed and been forgotten. "The individual withers," but "the world is
more and more." As it was in the past, so will it be in the
future--ever-changing, ever-passing, but ever-renewing, until the final
stage is reached.
Since the earliest dawn of our creation the watchword of humanity has
been "Onward!" and it is still "Onward!" but also "Upward!!" The
possibilities of the development of the human race in the ages yet to
come are so vast as to be beyond our conception; for, as Sir Oliver
Lodge has remarked, "Eye hath not seen, nor ear heard, nor has it
entered into the mind of man to conceive what the future has in store
for humanity!" Then:
"Forward, forward, let us range,
Let the great world spin for ever down the ringing grooves of change!"
This, then, is the great lesson which Martian civilisation teaches us.
Surely it affords no reason for the depression and pessimism in which
some upon the earth are so prone to indulge; but rather should it stir
them to a more earnest endeavour, by gradually removing the obstacles
which now bar their progress, to improve the social conditions of the
people; so that they in their turn may improve their intellectual
conditions, and lend their aid to the general advancement of the world
they live in.
Gloom, depression, and pessimism, of which we have had more than enough
of late years, never yet helped any one. They have, however, proved
disastrous to many.
Remember our world is young yet! so set before yourselves the great
ideal of the brotherhood of humanity! Our religion teaches it; strive to
help in attaining it; and in so doing each may, and will, achieve
something to help forward the gradual evolution of a brighter and
happier world for the generations that are to come. In that brighter and
happier world I have faith, for:
"I hold it truth with him who sings,
To one clear harp in divers tones,
That men may rise on stepping-stones
Of their dead selves to higher things."
And:
"I doubt not through the ages one increasing purpose runs,
And the thoughts of men are widen'd with the process of the suns."
[_End of the Narrative written by Wilfrid Poynders, Esq._]
CHAPTER XXIX
WHAT HAPPENED UPON OUR RETURN HOME--RESULTS OF THE MOST RECENT
OBSERVATIONS OF MARS--PROFESSOR LOWELL'S IMPORTANT DISCOVERY
_ADDENDUM_
(_Written by John Yiewsley Claxton, Esq., of Norbury, in the County
Borough of Croydon, Surrey_)
In accordance with the desire of my old friend, Wilfrid Poynders, I am
now about to publish the book which was handed to me by Merna on the
morning of our departure from Mars.
I knew that my dear old friend's thoughts and aspirations ever soared
towards the skies; but, as his last testament shows, his sympathies
embraced all humanity, and I am somewhat reluctant to add anything which
must necessarily bring the subject down to a lower plane.
As a narrative of his own personal experiences in connection with our
trip to Mars, the Professor's work is quite complete; still I thought
his readers would wish to know how it fared with his colleagues after
they left Mars, and have accordingly appended a few pages furnishing
this information.
I am quite convinced that, in deciding to remain behind on the planet,
the Professor, as M'Allister remarked, "did the right thing"; but after
the many years we have spent together in the closest and truest
friendship, I miss him--ah, more than I can say.
It was really a tremendous wrench, that parting with my two old
friends, the Professor and Merna, and leaving them behind on Mars,
although I fully appreciated the Professor's desire to end his days with
his dear son, to whom he had been so strangely reunited.
We started that morning directly after our farewell, and found a large
concourse of people assembled, who had come from all parts of the planet
to see us off.
Soranho and many other high officers of state whom we knew were present,
and, of course, the Professor, Merna, Eleeta, and Siloni, as well as
many others whom we had come to regard as personal friends; and they did
not allow us to depart empty-handed.
Merna handed me the packet which the Professor had referred to. We had
no formal farewell with the Professor--that was all over; but he came
forward at the last moment, and we parted from him with a loving
hand-clasp.
After a most affectionate leave-taking with our other friends, with whom
I took good care to include Siloni, we boarded the _Areonal_. M'Allister
at once took charge of the machinery, switched on the power, and we
immediately rose into the air, amidst shouts of farewell and repeated
good wishes from the assembled multitude.
We rose rapidly; but, so long as we kept in view of the place, we could
see the people still waving their adieus to us, and I frequently
responded to their signals.
At last, when these lovable and hospitable Martians were lost to sight,
I went into the _Areonal_, closing and bolting the outer door, which was
never again to be opened until we reached our destination--our home in
old England.
I have no doubt that, long after we lost sight of them, many of the
Martians kept the _Areonal_ in view with their telescopes, and followed
its course far into space.
I then directed M'Allister to set our course for our own world; and when
he had done so, he looked up at me and said, "Heh, mon, yon Martians are
rare good folk, and I'm right sorry to leave them!"
"Yes, so am I, M'Allister," I answered. He again looked at me keenly,
with a queer smile on his face; and remarked, "Mon, I'm thinking you are
that, and that you have left something behind you!"
I knew he meant that I had left my heart behind me, for I was thinking
the very same thing; but I turned away from him with a sigh, without
answering. The matter was not one about which I cared to speak just
then, for I felt very sad and heartsore.
Our journey passed off without any exciting incidents, everything on the
_Areonal_ working most satisfactorily. On the 4th February, 1910, we
passed within forty-one million miles of the sun, and the heat at this
stage of our journey was terrific, but we had a magnificent view of the
sunspots, the corona, and other solar surroundings. In spite of all
precautions for counteracting the tremendous pull of the sun, we were
drawn considerably out of our direct course, so the journey occupied
three days longer than we had anticipated. A large proportion of our
time was spent in the air-chamber, in order to prepare us for breathing
the atmosphere of our native world.
We passed across the orbit of Venus on two occasions, and had a near
view of this splendid planet (and also of Mercury), for many days; but
apart from its larger apparent size and intense brilliancy, we did not
see anything more than we could from the earth with a good telescope.
The dense atmosphere and its glowing light prevented us from seeing any
definite details upon its surface.
Only three days late, we arrived at our home at Norbury on Monday the
21st March 1910, about an hour before daylight. We descended quite
unobserved, and having stowed away our good ship _Areonal_ in its shed
and made all secure, we astonished Mrs. Challen by walking into the
house very soon after she had risen.
She seemed truly delighted to see us back again after our long and
unprecedented voyage through space, and as soon as our greetings were
over she asked, "Where is Mr. Poynders?"
I said we would tell her all the news whilst we had breakfast, so she
bustled about and got the meal ready very quickly. When we sat down she
listened with intense interest to our long story, expressing great
astonishment when I told her about our discovery of Merna upon Mars. I
had tried to keep her from asking about Mr. Poynders, but at length she
questioned me so directly that I was compelled to answer, though I
dreaded the effect the news would have upon her.
So, as gently as I could, I explained that Mr. Poynders, having found
his son a native of Mars, could not risk bringing him to such a climate
as ours, and, as he was unable to leave him, had decided to remain on
Mars.
Poor Mrs. Challen was so upset upon learning this that she threw up her
hands, exclaiming, "Then I shall never see my dear old master again!"
and putting her handkerchief to her streaming eyes, she hastened out of
the room to conceal her emotion.
I felt very sorry for her, as I knew she had a great respect and liking
for Mr. Poynders, with whom she had been so many years.
During the day I called upon the Professor's solicitors, in accordance
with his instructions, and handed them the letter he had entrusted to
me. They read it with many exclamations of surprise, for the news it
contained was enough to startle even staid lawyers out of their
equanimity.
One of them rang a bell, which was answered by the managing clerk, who
was requested to bring in the sealed packet of papers left by Mr.
Poynders before he went away. This was quickly brought, and, when
opened, found to contain documents settling an annuity of £150 per annum
upon Mrs. Challen, a deed of gift of the sum of £200 to M'Allister, and
another deed settling all the residue of his estate upon his old friend
John Yiewsley Claxton.
There was also a will to the same effect, in case he might die before
the papers were claimed; everything being properly signed and in due
order.
The solicitors both shook hands with me, congratulating me on this
substantial addition to my estate; but I told them I already possessed
sufficient for my wants, and would greatly prefer that Mr. Poynders
should be here to enjoy his own.
I gave them some particulars of our adventures, and we had quite a long
chat; then, taking a cordial leave of them, I returned to Norbury.
I at once acquainted Mrs. Challen with her good fortune, but she was
not to be comforted, saying she would very much rather have her old
master back again; and, as this was exactly my own feeling in the
matter, I expressed agreement with her.
However, she calmed down after a while, and I then asked her to consider
what she would desire to do in the future. If she liked to remain in the
house and look after my welfare, I should be very glad to have her as my
own housekeeper; but said it was entirely for her to decide the matter,
and she could take her own time to do so.
She replied that she had neither relatives nor friends to trouble about,
so there was no need to take any time over it, for she would only be too
pleased to retain her old position, and would do her best to make me
comfortable. I assured her that I had no doubt whatever upon that point;
thus it was all settled there and then, and she has remained with me
ever since.
My aunt was long since dead, but my two cousins, James and Timothy
Snayleye, lived in London: so I thought I would go over to apprise them
of my return home. They, however, received me so very coldly that,
beyond saying I had been to Mars and back again, and giving a few
details of what we had seen there, I did not tell them very much.
They asked a few questions now and then, but evinced very little
interest in my affairs, though I noticed them frequently exchanging nods
and winks with each other. I soon left, but after such a reception, was
rather surprised when James Snayleye walked into my house the next day
and asked to be allowed to call in a day or two and bring with him a
couple of friends who were interested in Mars, and would like to hear
anything I could tell them. I did not altogether care about discussing
my adventures with entire strangers, but, as he was so very pressing, in
the end I agreed to see them.
When they arrived I was greatly surprised to find that, instead of being
persons of about the same age as my cousin, both were elderly men. One
was introduced to me as Mr. Josias Googery, a Justice of the Peace, and
the other as Dr. Loonem.
We had no sooner sat down than the doctor started the conversation by
asking, in an unctuous tone of voice, several questions about my
trip--"Whether, ah, it was really true that I had, ah, travelled all the
way to Mars and back again in, ah, a vessel of our own construction?"
All the time he was speaking he was performing the operation known as
"washing the hands with invisible soap," a trick which always has an
irritating effect upon my nerves.
In answer to his question I said, "It was quite true that I had been to
Mars," and mentioned a few particulars of our trip.
Mr. Googery then put a few questions to me, and, as I replied, he
interjected after almost every sentence that I spoke, "Ah! h'm, yes,
just so," James Snayleye sitting by all the time with a sneering grin
upon his face which I found very aggravating.
When I had told them as much as I thought necessary, they both started
cross-examining me in such an impertinent and sceptical manner that at
length I became extremely irritated, and declined to answer any more
questions. Whereupon Dr. Loonem proceeded to wash his hands again,
saying in an oily manner, as though addressing a child, "Pray, ah, don't
excite yourself, my dear sir; don't, ah, excite yourself! You know, ah,
it's not good for you!"
This was too much for flesh and blood to bear, so I rose and said that
as I had an important engagement to attend to, I could not spare any
more time that day, at the same time ringing the bell for Mrs. Challen
to show them out.
She did so, and returned in a state of indignation, saying, she did not
like those people at all, they were so rude; and that as they were
passing through the doorway she heard the doctor say, "It's a clear case
enough; did you notice the gleam in his eyes? that alone is sufficient
to settle it!" To this Mr. Googery had replied, "Ah, h'm, yes, just so!"
"Well, Mrs. Challen," I said, "please understand that if either of those
people calls again, I am not at home."
"Certainly, sir," she answered with great alacrity, as she went out of
the room.
It was no mere excuse, but perfectly correct, when I told those people I
had an important engagement to attend to. An old friend of mine, Sir
Lockesley Halley, was President of the Dedlingtonian Astronomical
Society, and, after hearing my account of Mars, said he would be very
glad if I could attend the meeting of his Society on the following
evening and give a short address on the subject.
I was rather averse from this, as the Society was not a large one,
though it had several clever men in it, and I knew that the
professionals who controlled it, and also the majority of the members,
prided themselves on being exponents of what they termed "sane and
unsensational astronomy"; which in some cases amounted to saying that
they were a long way behind the times.
It is an interesting fact that we owe a large proportion of our
knowledge of planetary detail to the work of enthusiastic amateur
observers. In this Society, indeed, nearly all the best observational
work was done by the non-professional class; and when, as the result of
their systematic and painstaking work, they noted on their planetary
drawings some lines or markings which had not previously been recorded,
one would have thought their original work would have been commended. It
was, however, not unusual in such cases for a professional to rise and
calmly declare that the new markings were only illusions, such as he had
often predicted would be claimed as discoveries.
Thus the amateurs were kept in their proper places; but the
professionals did not always prove to be correct in their strictures and
pronouncements.
In these circumstances, I did not expect much credence to be given to
anything fresh that might be stated in my address, and therefore I
rather demurred to Sir Lockesley's proposal. He, however, made such a
personal matter of it that, as he was an extremely able man and a good
fellow, I at last consented to do as he wished.
M'Allister accompanied me to the meeting and sat among the audience.
After a few introductory remarks from Sir Lockesley, I gave my address,
which lasted about half-an-hour; but it was received even more
chillingly than I had anticipated, and the few comments made by the
members were nearly all indicative of scepticism of my statements and
unbelief in my _bona fides_. A scientific audience is usually rather
cold and unenthusiastic; but, in the present case, except for one or two
isolated hand-claps, the vote of thanks was allowed to pass _sub
silentio_. Sir Lockesley, of course, could not help this, and I saw that
he was much annoyed at my reception.
The meeting then split up into groups, lingering here and there to
discuss my statements as they moved toward the door; and M'Allister told
me that, as he stood near a group, he heard one man exclaim, "It's all
arrant nonsense! five minutes with my 12-1/16-inch reflector would
convince any sane man that there are no fine lines to be seen on Mars,
because none exist!" This brought a murmur of assent; then some one else
said, "Well, I certainly see some of the lines with my 7-1/2-inch, but
regard them as illusions"; and he also received some support.
Another man then spoke up, remarking, "My experience does not agree with
yours, gentlemen, for when I used a 6-inch refractor I could see some of
the lines, yet felt doubtful of their actuality; but since I have used a
12-inch reflector my opinion has entirely changed. The lines are visible
whenever the atmospheric conditions are favourable, and are seen with so
much certainty that I have long abandoned my doubts of their
representing real markings!" "Hear, hear!" said several, "and in a
clearer atmosphere you would see still more!"
This was the Martian controversy in a nut-shell: for so much depends
upon individual eyesight, instrumental power, and good atmospheric
conditions. Even the finest instruments fail when observational
conditions are unfavourable!
Many other people to whom I spoke about my trip to Mars exhibited the
same incredulity as those at the meeting. I showed two persons, whom I
thought would be open to conviction, some photographic views in their
natural colours, which I had brought home with me. One of them looked at
the pictures, then handed them to his friend, with the remark: "Clever
fakes, aren't they? you can do almost anything with the camera
nowadays!"
Similar opinions were either expressed or implied by others who saw
them, so now I keep all such things to myself.
Two days after the meeting Sir Lockesley called to have a chat with me,
and, whilst we were conversing, Mrs. Challen announced that two men
insisted upon seeing me, although she told them I was engaged.
"Well," I said, "show them into the next room and I will soon dispose of
them"; then asking Sir Lockesley to excuse me a few minutes, I passed
through the folding doors which separated the two rooms.
The men were perfect strangers to me, and clearly not of a class with
which I should care to make acquaintance.
"To what do I owe this visit?" I inquired, as I entered the room.
"Beg pardon, sir," said one of the men, "but we wished to see you on
urgent business, and ask you to come with us. There is a carriage at the
door!"
"But who are you, and where do you wish me to go?" I inquired.
He hummed and haa-ed, then said, "A friend desired to see me at once,
and it was only a short journey!"
"Well," I replied, "I am at present engaged with a gentleman, but I must
certainly decline to accompany you at all without further and definite
particulars as to why you wish me to do so."
Then the other man advanced, and said, "As you won't come quietly,
there's no help for it; so just look at these papers and you will see
you must come!"
He showed me several documents, and, on reading them, I was astounded to
find one was an order for my removal to a private lunatic asylum, the
papers being signed by Josias Googery, J.P., and Dr. Loonem; and others
contained statements of the evidences of my insanity, signed by my two
cousins.
Of course I was furious, and refused to go with them, whereupon they
rushed forward to seize hold of me. I shouted for Sir Lockesley to come
to my assistance, and he at once dashed into the room. The two men,
however, immediately warned him not to interfere, as they were acting in
a perfectly legal manner.
This he had to admit when the matter was fully explained to him; then he
urged me to accept the situation and go quietly, and he would take
immediate action to secure my release.
As it was clearly useless to resist a legalised process, I gave in, and
thus was I, a perfectly sane man, incarcerated in a lunatic asylum!
There I had to remain while Sir Lockesley saw my solicitors,
communicated with the Commissioners in Lunacy and others, and after much
correspondence and innumerable interviews, at last secured my release;
but not until I had endured more than a week's confinement in that
horrible place.
It was all a scheme concocted by my scapegrace cousins to have me
declared insane, and thus secure control of my fortune, they being my
only living relatives. But for Sir Lockesley's presence and influence
their precious plot might have proved quite successful.
I do not attach much blame to the magistrate and doctor, although they
might have exercised more care; but no doubt the Snayleyes had made such
suggestions to them that they were prepared to find insanity in anything
I did or said.
Mrs. Challen, who had been much affected and distressed at my being
carried off in this fashion, was delighted when at last I returned home
safe and sound after my release, and told her the trouble was all over.
M'Allister had intended going on to Glasgow during the previous week,
but had remained at home at Norbury to assist in securing my release;
doing yeoman's service in seeing various people and carrying messages.
When things had quite settled down again he went to Scotland and stayed
with his wife for three weeks.
Upon his return we discussed our future arrangements, and agreed to
become partners for the purpose of securing and working patents for
various machines which we had studied upon Mars; and this has proved a
lucrative business for us, besides supplying our engineers and
manufacturers with greatly improved machinery.
Ever since our return home we have eagerly read all the scientific news
concerning Mars that has been published, for we were anxious to learn
whether there had been any verification of the Professor's forecasts as
to what was likely to be seen from the earth at the opposition of Mars
in 1909. The result is very gratifying to us, not only as proving the
correctness of the Professor's pronouncements, but also as testifying to
the keen-sightedness of some of our astronomers and their carefulness
and accuracy as observers; though, of course, there are still
divergences of opinion as to the meaning of what has been seen.
[Illustration: _Drawn by T.E.R. Phillips_ Plate XV
MARS, AS SEEN THROUGH A 12-INCH TELESCOPE ON 16TH AUGUST, 1909
The south polar snow-cap is seen at the top, and as it is early June on
this part of Mars, the snow-cap has become small. The dark line across
it is a wide rift, the ice having commenced to break up at this part;
and the dark shading round it is water from the melting snow. The
circular light area near the centre is "Hellas," and the dark
wedge-shaped area is "Syrtis Major." The protuberance usually seen on
the eastern side of Syrtis Major has this year almost disappeared, and
but little detail is visible anywhere.]
For instance, M. Antoniadi, of Juvisy Observatory, near Paris, has
published a very interesting account of his own observations with the
fine Meudon refractor, which has an object glass 32.7 inches in
diameter; and he has also furnished several beautifully executed
drawings of what he has seen. The most noticeable new features observed
were two large detached pieces of the south polar snow-cap, the altered
shape of the Solis Lacus and other dark areas, numerous dark rounded
spots on the dark areas, much detail along the lines of the canals, and
the observation of scattered markings instead of lines.
M. Antoniadi lays great stress on the advantages of large telescopes;
and, whilst making frank admission that the drawings of Professor Lowell
show the outlines of the Martian details more accurately than the
drawings of any other observer, he dissents entirely from his views
respecting the actuality of the canal lines.
With regard to M. Antoniadi's observation of dark rounded spots, it has
been suggested by another writer that these are volcanoes, and,
moreover, that the canal lines are really cracks in the solid ice
covering frozen oceans and seas. These contentions involve the
supposition that Mars is still in the stage when volcanic action is
prevalent, and also that what have hitherto been supposed to be desert
lands are really fields of ice. Mars has passed far beyond the stage of
volcanic activity; and the theory does not account for the ochre colour
of the frozen oceans, which are exactly the same colour as our deserts
appear when viewed from a great distance, for the sandstorms so
frequently observed, nor for the general absence of any indications of
frost over a large portion of the Martian surface. It is also very
difficult to imagine the existence of a profuse growth of vegetation
along cracks in solid ice; and I am afraid this theory, like many
others, fails to fit in with the observed facts.
I may remind my readers that the Professor suggested that many more dark
rounded spots would, under favourable conditions, be discovered on the
dark areas of the planet, and he has stated what they are.
As a result of his recent observations, M. Antoniadi has boldly declared
that the supposed canal lines are really separate spots and markings
which, when seen with instruments of lesser power than the one he used,
appear to be lines, the network of canal lines being an illusion. He
contends that the markings he has seen are beyond the power of Professor
Lowell's telescope to resolve, and that what he has seen forms an
unanswerable objection to the canal theory and stops all discussion!
This argument has, however, been fully met in this book by anticipation;
and, as will be seen later on, Professor Lowell completely refutes it
and shows that M. Antoniadi is mistaken. It has also been pointed out
that, if we could secure perfect seeing, the lines might really appear
as separate markings, and that apparent breaks and irregularities are
exactly what we might expect to find in connection with canals. I gather
from a recent remark made by Professor Lowell that he also holds this
view.
Moreover, a discreet silence is observed with regard to the progress of
vegetation on Mars being from the poles towards the equator, instead of
from the equator towards the poles, as is the case on our earth.
This mode of progression can only be accounted for by the flow of water
from the poles, and such flow extending beyond the equator involves the
artificial propulsion of the water, as the flow is contrary to
gravitation.
Professor Lowell's statements as to this peculiar growth of the
vegetation do not depend upon the results of a few casual observations,
for he has given the matter most systematic and prolonged attention, and
noted upon hundreds of charts the dates when the vegetation has first
appeared in various places and latitudes after the passage of the water
down the canals.
This is such a hard nut for the opponents of the canal theory to crack,
that I am quite prepared to learn that all these careful observations
are merely illusions.
Professor Hale, of Mount Wilson Observatory, in California, has taken
some photographs of Mars which do not show any canal lines; and these
have been eagerly seized upon as another proof that the canals have no
existence.
Unfortunately, these photographs do not show many well authenticated
details which are seen with comparative ease, nor the new details seen
by M. Antoniadi. It is, therefore, no matter of wonder that they do not
show the much fainter canal lines. If the absence of the canal lines
from the photographs is proof that the canals do not exist, then the
photographs must still more emphatically prove that these much more
conspicuous details--which have been seen and drawn by M. Antoniadi and
scores of other observers--are also illusions and have no objective
existence. Those who seek the support of these photographs for their
views must be left to extricate themselves as best they can from the
dilemma in which they are now placed in regard to the observations and
drawings of those highly skilled observers.
The photographs were taken with a sixty-inch telescope, and possibly
this very large aperture was not stopped down sufficiently to secure on
the photographic plates such very fine detail as the canal lines; on the
other hand, the atmospheric conditions at the moments of exposure of the
plates may have been unfavourable for good definition. However good the
photographs may be, the deductions drawn from them are erroneous.
Against such purely negative evidence--which never affords good ground
for argument--we must set the positive evidence of Professor Lowell's
numerous photographs, which do show many of the canal lines and also
confirm the drawings of observers.
Professor Schiaparelli, who has been appealed to on the subject, still
maintains the objectivity of the canal lines which he was the first to
discover, and repudiates the suggestion that the new photographs supply
any evidence against them. He remarks that during the last thirty years
many other astronomers, using more perfect telescopes than his, have
observed and drawn these canal lines, and have taken photographs which
reproduce an identical disposition of the lines. He adds that a
collective illusion on the part of so many astronomers is impossible,
and that the photographs which do show the canals cannot be illusions.
Professor Lowell controverts M. Antoniadi's claim to have proved that
the lines are non-existent, and that the only markings are small
separate shadings which are illusively seen as lines. He points out that
what M. Antoniadi has seen is exactly what would be seen when using a
very large telescope, and that it indicates poor seeing instead of good
definition. He remarks that when using such large instruments, which are
so much more affected by atmospheric conditions than smaller ones, the
diffraction rings round a star (which should appear as complete
concentric circles) begin to waver, then break up into fragments--a sort
of mosaic--and finally end in an indiscriminate assemblance of points.
In certain kinds of bad seeing the parts may seem quite steady, but the
fact that the mosaic exists is proof positive of poor seeing. What
happens to the rings in such circumstances must also happen to fine
lines! the mosaic effect seen by M. Antoniadi is therefore "the exact
theoretic effect that a large aperture should produce on continuous
lines, such as the canals, and always does produce in the case of the
rings in the image of a star!"
It has been stated that Professor Lowell had admitted the illusory
nature of the canal lines. His reply, however, is emphatic: "I have
never made any retractation as to the reality and geometricism of the
canals; they are marvellous beyond conception, and are only doubted by
those who never observed the planet itself sufficiently well."
Seeing an announcement that Professor Lowell had arrived in England for
the purpose of lecturing on "Planetary Photography" at the Royal
Institution of Great Britain, M'Allister and I made up our minds to be
present at the lecture, a resolution which, I am glad to say, we carried
into effect.
In the course of his lecture Professor Lowell gave an account of the
methods of planetary photography initiated and carried on with such
success at the Lowell Observatory; and then proceeded to give some
interesting particulars of his observations of Mars at the opposition of
1909, which resulted in one of the most important discoveries ever
recorded in connection with that planet.
He stated that on the 30th September, 1909, when the region of the
desert to the east of Syrtis Major came into view, after its periodic
six weeks' invisibility due to the unequal length of the days of the
earth and Mars, some long new canals were plainly observed which had not
been visible when the region was previously in view. A long and careful
investigation of fifteen years' records proved absolutely that not only
had these canals never been seen before, but that they could not have
existed. They are on a region which is frequently very favourably
situated for observation, and could not possibly have been overlooked,
for they are now the most conspicuous objects on that part of the
planet. It is beyond question that they are not only new to us but new
to Mars!
The two main canals run in a south-easterly direction from Syrtis Major,
and with them are associated two smaller ones and at least two new
oases; while, from their inter-connection, they are all clearly parts of
one and the same addition to the general canal system; for they now fit
in with the system as though they had always formed part of it. These
new canals were not only seen and drawn, but several photographs were
taken at different times.
Consider what this great discovery really means! In a region which has
never been anything but a desert during the whole period over which our
observational knowledge of Mars has extended, there are now strips of
land many hundreds of miles in length and miles wide that have become
fertile almost under our very eyes; and this result has been brought
about by the passage through them of water which has artificially been
carried there for the purpose of irrigation! We know this is so, for
what we see is the growth of vegetation; and the systematic way in which
the new canals have been fitted into the existing canal scheme proves
the artificiality of the whole system.
Some sensational statements in the Press have fostered in many minds the
idea that all these hundreds of miles of new canals were constructed
within the very short period of six weeks! This is altogether wrong. It
is the _vegetation_ that has _grown_ in six weeks, in consequence of the
turning on of the water to the irrigation works. We have good scientific
reasons for believing that irrigation works on Mars could be
accomplished much quicker than on the earth; but, as the telescope does
not enable us to see the works, we do not know how long they may have
taken to construct. It may have been months, or years. We only see the
_results_ of the works when actually in operation.
When we consider these works and their results, surely it becomes
impossible to resist the evidence of intelligent design which they
furnish; while if we also remember the very recent development of these
canals, the existence of life upon Mars at the present time seems to be
demonstrated beyond the possibility of reasonable doubt! In what
physical form that life is enshrined even our science must fail to
reveal. Professor Lowell, however, pointed out that the inhabitants of
Mars are not necessarily human beings, but their work clearly proves
that they are beings endowed with a very high degree of intelligence. A
study of the canal system reveals a marvellous conception marvellously
carried into effect.
Observers at Flagstaff have, therefore, practically seen the completion
of a work which is the creation of intelligent beings on Mars; and in
the remarkable photographs shown we were, so to speak, able to look upon
the results of that work--fertility in a region which had previously
been an arid desert.
The water, as the lecturer remarked, was probably not in all cases
conveyed by means of canals dug out of the soil, but we know that in
some way--whether by canals, or by trunk lines of pipes and smaller
subsidiary pipes, or otherwise--the land has been artificially irrigated
and fertilised by water, which could not possibly have taken the course
it has without being intelligently directed. Tunnelling would be easy on
Mars.
Professor Lowell spoke of these matters in well-weighed and well-chosen
phrases, which carried conviction of his earnestness and sincerity to
the minds of his hearers; and we observed that the audience was
evidently profoundly impressed by the importance of his statements. This
fact seemed to us very significant, as he was addressing one of the most
brilliant assemblies--representing many branches of science--ever
gathered within the walls of the Royal Institution. The numerous
photographs showing the Martian canal lines were projected on to the
screen by a lantern, and thus their convincing evidence was clearly
brought before the whole of that vast audience.
Another very interesting series of photographs showed the coming and
going of the first frost of the season in the antarctic regions of Mars.
This frost was first observed and photographed at Flagstaff on the 16th
November, 1909, and other photographs were taken on the 22nd of that
month.
In connection with these, Professor Lowell quaintly remarked that, "To
chronicle thus the very weather on our neighbour will convince any one
that interplanetary communication has already commenced; and that, too,
after the usual conventional manner by mundane greetings."
Referring to the photographs, it was pointed out that the human eye can
see at least ten times as much as a photograph can show as regards
planetary detail. This, though not generally known, is perfectly true,
and it may be explained thus: We know that in terrestrial photography
the camera will reveal many details which the eye is apt to overlook;
and, by very long exposures, even celestial photography will give a
similar result. In _planetary_ photography, however, exposures must be
very short, and the picture obtained is so very tiny that it cannot show
all that the eye could see. Under good conditions, therefore, the eye at
the telescope will always see immensely more of the finer details on a
planet than any camera could show.
The great value of the photographs of Mars lies in the fact that they
demonstrate beyond the possibility of doubt the existence of certain
fine markings which many observers have seen and drawn, but as to the
reality of which others, less skilled or less favourably situated, have
been extremely sceptical. If the fine lines had no existence on the
planet they could not be photographed.
In drawing attention to the details on these photographs Professor
Lowell emphatically declared that, "The lines you see are
'_certainties_,' not matters admitting of the slightest question, for
all their strange regularity. Not only I, but all my assistants, have
seen them thousands of times the same, and sometimes with all the
clearness and sharpness of etchings or steel engravings.
"An optical mistake," he then remarked, "which has latterly been hailed
as showing that the lines were not lines but a series of dots, was made
the other day in France. The observer saw perfectly correctly, but one
with knowledge of the optics of a telescope should have known that the
effect observed was the inevitable result of using an aperture which the
seeing did not warrant; as he could easily have assured himself by
looking at the shattered rings round the synchronous image of a star."
It may here be pointed out that these weighty and well-considered
declarations--which are a complete answer to M. Antoniadi's bold
claim--were made by the most experienced observer of Mars, who, as even
his opponents admit, possesses the finest site in the world for his
astronomical work, and is equipped with a very perfect instrument.
Besides the splendid photographs of Mars, many views of Jupiter and
Saturn were shown, exhibiting clearly numerous fine details, markings,
and wisps as to which much doubt had been expressed when some observers
had shown them on their drawings. These beautiful and convincing results
of the clever and original methods of planetary photography adopted at
Flagstaff appeared to come as a complete revelation to the majority of
those present, notwithstanding their scientific experience.
Probably never before had anything so wonderful as these results of
skill, patience, and prolonged research been exhibited, even in that
great and historic home of science. As Professor Lowell remarked in a
fine peroration: "They exhibited something of the advance recently
achieved in our knowledge of solar science; on the other hand, they
constituted in themselves the beginning of a set of records in which the
future of the planet might be confronted with its achieved past, and
which should endure after those who first conceived such registry had
long passed away.... They were histories of the planets written by
themselves--their autobiographies penned by light; and in their grand
historical portrait-gallery astronomers yet to come might see the
earlier stages of the great cosmic drama which was slowly but surely
working itself out!"
At the conclusion of this most interesting lecture M'Allister turned to
me and said, "How I wish our old friend the Professor could have been
here to-night; he would have keenly appreciated what we have heard."
"Yes, he would indeed," I answered; "but remember, he knows more now
than any one we see here could tell him about Martian matters!"
Before concluding, it may be of interest to state that Professor Lowell
still maintains the accuracy of the discovery made at Flagstaff that the
existence of water vapour on Mars is demonstrated by the photographic
spectrum of the Martian atmosphere; and he asserts that the attempt to
disprove it has failed. A further discovery has since been made at the
same observatory, viz. that oxygen also is present in the atmosphere of
Mars!
During the observations in 1909 several observers noted that, at times,
very large areas on the surface of Mars had been so obscured by a
yellowish veiling that all details were entirely blotted out. The
announcement of this fact gave rise to sensational statements that a
terrible catastrophe had occurred on the planet. The explanation is,
however, very simple--seasonal mists arising from the canals, with the
addition of clouds of sand particles in the upper air, as the result of
desert sandstorms, caused a temporary obscuration of certain parts of
the planet as viewed from the earth. Only this, and nothing more!
We have been interested to note that an English observer, the Rev.
Theodore E.R. Phillips, has observed some new details on Mars in the
region where the new canals were discovered. Mr. Phillips has in past
years given considerable attention to this region, and observed several
changes in the Lacus Moeris, to the east of Syrtis Major. The lake
disappeared altogether for some considerable time, then reappeared. Last
September he saw it again, and it was evident some further changes had
occurred; and he also saw some dusky shadings on the adjacent desert of
Lybia. There seems little doubt but that he actually saw, though
imperfectly, the new canals which Professor Lowell's much clearer
atmosphere and larger instrument enabled him to see clearly.
From what has been related in the last few pages it will be seen that
many of the forecasts, as set forth in this book by our old friend the
Professor, and his statements as to the Martians being actively engaged
in altering, extending, and developing their canal system, have been
amply verified by the observations of our astronomers; and I am
confident that his other prognostications will also be fulfilled in
course of time.
Turning now from scientific matters to others affecting ourselves
personally, I may say that I have heard nothing more of my cousins the
Snayleyes; and, after the failure of their mean attempt upon my liberty
and fortune, it is not likely that I shall again be troubled by them,
for they will naturally take good care to keep out of my way.
As the days and weeks pass by I often think of those we left behind upon
that far distant world: wondering how they are faring, and whether they
have attempted to transmit any influences or communications to us, for
up to the present we have not been conscious of any such influences.
Kenneth M'Allister is a thoroughly happy man, as he is working for his
own benefit, congenially and fully occupied with matters connected with
his beloved machinery. He is on the high road to making a very large
fortune; indeed, we are both doing remarkably well, and are, therefore,
able to give financial aid to many projects in which we are interested,
having for their objects the uplifting of the people, and the
improvement of social conditions generally. It was only yesterday that
M'Allister remarked to me, "Heh, mon, if we continue to go ahead at the
same rate as we are going now, we shall both be millionaires before very
long!"
Yes, we are doing well--there is no doubt about that; but,
notwithstanding my present very satisfactory circumstances and the
certainty of a brilliant future if I stay here, ideas have long and
persistently been running in my mind that it would be far better for me
to go back to Mars, and--by Jove! strange indeed that I never thought of
it before!--perhaps those very persistent ideas are actually the outcome
of Martian influences!!
The wonderful music I heard upon Mars still rings in my ears; and, at
times, so thrilling and peculiar is its effect upon me, that I feel as
though I were being almost irresistibly impelled to return to that
planet. Well, I should very much like to see the dear old Professor and
Merna again, and also my many Martian friends. Then there's Siloni, whom
I can never forget, for mentally her image is ever before me. What a
nice girl she was! If I were to return to Mars, I wonder whether----?
Printed by BALLANTYNE, HANSON & CO Edinburgh & London
FOOTNOTES:
[1] The exact diameters of the planets are difficult to measure owing to
irradiation, and estimates of various authorities differ, especially
with regard to the more distant planets.
[2] Most probably the larger planets possess satellites which have yet
to be discovered.
[3] It is not yet ascertained with certainty whether Mercury and Venus
rotate in about twenty-four hours, or whether the period is the same as
that of their revolution round the sun. The evidence seems to point to
the latter period.
[4] The "terminator" is the boundary between the lighted and the dark
portion of the disc.
[5] Those who have seen the undercliff in the Isle of Wight will be able
to form some idea of the terraces of the lunar ring-mountains, as they
are very similar formations.
[6] This is the case as regards separate satellites; but it may be
pointed out that a similar thing must occur in regard to the rings of
Saturn. The rings are composed of swarms of satellites so small that
they can only be termed particles, and these particles at the inner edge
of the "crape ring" revolve round Saturn in 5 hours and 33 minutes, the
inner edge of the ring being only about 47,000 miles from the centre of
the planet. The planet itself revolves on its axis in 10-1/4 hours.
Thus, an immense number of these minute satellites must revolve round
the planet in less time than it takes the planet to make one rotation.
It is calculated that the particles in the outer edge of the next ring
complete one revolution round the planet in 14 hours and 28 seconds.
THE SCIENCE OF TO-DAY SERIES
_With many Illustrations. Extra Crown 8vo. 5s. net._
AERIAL NAVIGATION OF TO-DAY. A Popular Account of the Evolution of
Aeronautics. By CHARLES C. TURNER.
"If ever the publication of a book was well timed, surely it is the case
with this book on aviation.... Of the technical chapters we need only
say that they are so simply written as to present no grave difficulties
to the beginner who is equipped with an average education."--_Globe._
BOTANY OF TO-DAY. A Popular Account of the Evolution of Modern
Botany. By Prof. G.F. SCOTT-ELLIOT, M.A., B.Sc., Author of "The
Romance of Plant Life," _&c. &c._
"This most entertaining and instructive book. It is the fruit of wide
reading and much patient industry."--_Globe._
SCIENTIFIC IDEAS OF TO-DAY. A Popular Account, in Non-technical
Language, of the Nature of Matter, Electricity, Light, Heat,
Electrons, _&c. &c._ By CHARLES R. GIBSON, A.I.E.E., Author of
"Electricity of To-Day," _&c._
"As a knowledgeable writer, gifted with the power of imparting what he
knows in a manner intelligible to all, Mr. C.R. Gibson has established a
well-deserved reputation."--_Field._
ASTRONOMY OF TO-DAY. A Popular Introduction in Non-technical
Language. By CECIL G. DOLMAGE, LL.D., F.R.A.S. "With frontispiece
in colours, & 45 other illustrations.
"A lucid exposition much helped by abundant illustrations."--_The
Times._
"From cover to cover the book is readable, and every word is
intelligible to the layman. Dr. Dolmage displays literary powers of a
very high order. Those who read it without any previous knowledge of
astronomy will find that a new interest has been added to their lives,
and that in a matter of 350 pages they have gained a true conception of
the meaning of astronomy."--_The Standard._
ELECTRICITY OF TO-DAY. Its Work and Mysteries Explained. By CHARLES
R. GIBSON, A.I.E.E.
"Mr. Gibson has given us one of the best examples of popular scientific
exposition that we remember seeing. His aim has been to produce an
account of the chief modern applications of electricity without using
technical language or making any statements which are beyond the
comprehension of any reader of ordinary intelligence. In this he has
succeeded to admiration, and his book may be strongly commended to all
who wish to realise what electricity means and does in our daily
life."--_The Tribune._
SEELEY & CO., LTD., 38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
POPULAR SCIENCE
THE GREAT WORLD'S FARM. Some Account of Nature's Crops and How they
are Grown. By SELINA GAYE. With a Preface by Professor BOULGER.
With Sixteen Illustrations. Second Edition, 5s.
"A fascinating volume of popular science."--_Times._
SUN, MOON, AND STARS. A Book on Astronomy for Beginners. By AGNES
GIBERNE. With Coloured Illustrations. Twenty-eighth Thousand.
Revised. 5s.
THE WORLD'S FOUNDATIONS. Geology for Beginners. By AGNES GIBERNE.
With Illustrations. Seventh Thousand. 5s.
"The exposition is clear; the style simple and
attractive."--_Spectator._
THE OCEAN OF AIR. Meteorology for Beginners. By AGNES GIBERNE. With
Illustrations. Fifth Thousand. 5s.
"Miss Giberne can be accurate without being formidable, and unites a
keen sense of the difficulties of beginners to a full comprehension of
the matter in hand."--_Saturday Review._
AMONG THE STARS; or, Wonderful Things in the Sky. By AGNES GIBERNE.
With Coloured Illustrations. Tenth Thousand. Revised. 5s.
"An attempt to teach astronomy to small children ... it is very well
done."--_Saturday Review._
THE STORY OF THE HILLS: A Popular Account of Mountains and How they
were Made. By the Rev. H.N. HUTCHINSON, F.G.S. With many
Illustrations. 5s.
"A charmingly written and beautifully illustrated account of the making
of the mountains."--_Yorkshire Post._
THE ROMANCE OF THE MIGHTY DEEP. By AGNES GIBERNE. Second Edition.
With Illustrations. 5s.
"Agnes Giberne is always picturesque and interesting whether she writes
of the stars or of the depths of the ocean."--_Illustrated London News._
SEELEY & CO., LTD., 38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
THE ROMANCE OF MODERN PHOTOGRAPHY
ITS DISCOVERY & ITS ACHIEVEMENTS
BY C.R. GIBSON
AUTHOR OF "ELECTRICITY OF TO-DAY," ETC.
"Mr. Gibson tells the romantic story of the discovery of this wonderful
art, and the steps by which its range has been extended, until it can
achieve results which only a few years ago would have been thought
impossible."--_Newcastle Chronicle._
"The explanation of the complicated system of photographing in colours
is particularly lucid, and, indeed, the narrative is everywhere
remarkable for its fluency and clear style."--_Bystander._
"Should prove one of the most popular and fascinating of this writer's
books, and will interest all who are connected with photography."--_The
Photographic Monthly._
"A fascinating story of triumphs of thought and patience, and
illustrated with remarkable photographs."--_Church Times._
"The author has made his book remarkably comprehensive, while there is
not a dry or uninteresting page throughout."--_Country Life._
THE ROMANCE OF MODERN GEOLOGY
BY E.S. GREW, M.A.
_With Twenty-five Illustrations. Extra Crown 8vo. 5s._
"Mr. Grew possesses the golden gift of a graceful style as well as a
complete mastery of his subject, and he has written a popular
introduction to modern geology which any one can read with pleasure and
understand from beginning to end."--_Daily Graphic._
"A fascinating outline filled in with many valuable facts and much
well-founded knowledge of the history and animal life of the
earth."--_Sheffield Daily Telegraph._
"Mr. Grew has done extremely good work in this volume of Messrs.
Seeley's excellent 'Library of Romance.' He is one of the few men who
can make special knowledge interesting to the general reader.... The
illustrations are singularly felicitous."--_Daily Telegraph._
SEELEY & CO., LTD., 38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
THE ROMANCE OF THE ANIMAL WORLD
DESCRIBING THE CURIOUS AND INTERESTING IN NATURAL HISTORY
BY EDMUND SELOUS
_With Sixteen full-page Illustrations_
"Mr. Selous takes a wide range in Nature, he has seen many wonders which
he relates. Open the book where we will we find something
astonishing."--_Spectator._
"It is in truth a most fascinating book, as full of incidents and as
various in interest as any other work of imagination, and, beyond the
pleasure in the reading there is the satisfaction of knowing that one is
in the hands of a genuine authority on some of the most picturesque
subjects that natural history affords. Mr. Selous' method is strong,
safe, and sound. The volume has numerous illustrations of a high order
of workmanship and a handsome binding of striking design."--_School
Government Chronicle._
"This is a very fascinating volume, full of picturesquely written
descriptions of the life, habits, and customs of a number of birds and
beasts, including beavers, seals, bears, penguins, crocodiles, and a
host of other creatures."--_Graphic._
"A fund of information and amusement will be found in the pages of this
handsomely bound book. From the lowest animals of all, the Infusoria, to
the lion and the elephant, all come within the range of Mr. Selous'
observation, and he builds up out of the vast material at his disposal a
very readable narrative. The illustrations are carefully drawn, and are
very true to nature."--_Education._
"The volume would make an excellent present for an intelligent boy,
being full of interesting and sometimes thrilling stories from the wide
field of natural history. It is well written in a clear, easy style
which is to be commended. Mr. Edmund Selous has made a most interesting
collection of striking facts, and the book has one of the prettiest
covers that I have seen."--_Daily News._
THE ROMANCE OF MODERN EXPLORATION
WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF CURIOUS CUSTOMS, THRILLING ADVENTURES, AND
INTERESTING DISCOVERIES OF EXPLORERS IN ALL PARTS OF THE WORLD
BY ARCHIBALD WILLIAMS, B.A., F.R.G.S.
_With Twenty-six Illustrations_
"A mine of information and stirring incident."--_Scotsman._
"Mr. Williams is most catholic in his choice, taking his readers to soar
in a balloon with the luckless Andree, to wander in African forests and
Australian deserts, to seek for the North Pole with Nansen, and even to
note such an up-to-date expedition as that of the 'Discovery' in the
Antarctic Regions, to cite but the most prominent. Mr. Williams has done
this work most judiciously, ... a book which will delight both young and
old alike."--_Graphic._
"The book unites strong natural attractiveness with valuable
geographical information to a degree probably unequalled by any other
that might be offered as appropriate for the purpose of a gift book or
the recreative library."--_School Government Chronicle._
"It is a kind of epitome of the best travel books of our time, and is
exceedingly well done."--_Academy._
SEELEY & CO., LTD., 38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
THE ROMANCE OF SAVAGE LIFE
DESCRIBING THE HABITS, CUSTOMS, EVERYDAY LIFE, &c., OF PRIMITIVE MAN
BY PROF. G.F. SCOTT ELLIOT, M.A., B.Sc., &c.
_With Thirty Illustrations. Extra Crown 8vo. 5s._
"Mr. Scott Elliot has hit upon a good idea in this attempt to set forth
the life of the primitive savage. On the whole, too, he has carried it
out well and faithfully.... We can recommend the book as filling a
gap."--_Athenæum._
"A readable contribution to the excellent series of which it forms a
part. Mr. Scott Elliot writes pleasantly ... he possesses a sufficiently
vivid imagination to grasp the relation of a savage to his
environment."--_Nature._
"There are things of remarkable interest in this volume, and it makes
excellent reading and represents much research."--_Spectator._
THE ROMANCE OF PLANT LIFE
DESCRIBING THE CURIOUS AND INTERESTING IN THE PLANT WORLD
BY PROF. G.F. SCOTT ELLIOT, M.A., B.Sc., &c.
_With Thirty-four Illustrations. Extra Crown 8vo. 5s._
"The author has worked skilfully into his book details of the facts and
inferences which form the groundwork of modern Botany. The illustrations
are striking, and cover a wide field of interest, and the style is
lively."--_Athenæum._
"In twenty-nine fascinating, wall-printed, and well-illustrated
chapters, Prof. Scott Elliot describes a few of the wonders of plant
life. A very charming and interesting volume,"--_Daily Telegraph._
"Mr. Scott Elliot is of course a well-known authority on all that
concerns plants, and the number of facts he has brought together will
not only surprise but fascinate all his readers."--_Westminster
Gazette._
SEELEY & CO., LTD., 38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
THE ROMANCE OF INSECT LIFE
DESCRIBING THE CURIOUS & INTERESTING IN THE INSECT WORLD
BY EDMUND SELOUS
AUTHOR OF "THE ROMANCE OF THE ANIMAL WORLD," ETC.
_With Sixteen Illustrations. Extra Crown 8vo. 5s._
"An entertaining volume, one more of a series which seeks with much
success to describe the wonders of nature and science in simple,
attractive form."--_Graphic._
"Offers most interesting descriptions of the strange and curious
inhabitants of the insect world, sure to excite inquiry and to foster
observation. There are ants white and yellow, locusts and cicadas, bees
and butterflies, spiders and beetles, scorpions and cockroaches--and
especially ants--with a really scientific investigation of their
wonderful habits not in dry detail, but in free and charming exposition
and narrative. An admirable book to put in the hands of a boy or girl
with a turn for natural science--and whether or not."--_Educational
Times._
"Both interesting and instructive. Such a work as this is genuinely
educative. There are numerous illustrations."--_Liverpool Courier._
"With beautiful original drawings by Carton Moore Park and Lancelot
Speed, and effectively bound in dark blue cloth, blazoned with scarlet
and gold."--_Lady._
"Admirably written and handsomely produced. Mr. Selous's volume shows
careful research, and the illustrations of insects and the results of
their powers are well done."--_World._
THE ROMANCE OF MODERN MECHANISM
INTERESTING DESCRIPTIONS IN NON-TECHNICAL LANGUAGE OF WONDERFUL
MACHINERY, MECHANICAL DEVICES, & MARVELLOUSLY DELICATE SCIENTIFIC
INSTRUMENTS
BY ARCHIBALD WILLIAMS, B.A., F.R.G.S.
AUTHOR OF "THE ROMANCE OF MODERN EXPLORATION," ETC.
_With Twenty-six Illustrations, Extra Crown 8vo. 5s._
"No boy will be able to resist the delights of this book, full to the
brim of instructive and wonderful matter."--_British Weekly._
"This book has kept your reviewer awake when he reasonably expected to
be otherwise engaged. We do not remember coming across a more
fascinating volume, even to a somewhat blasé reader whose business it is
to read all that comes in his way. The marvels, miracles they should be
called, of the modern workshop are here exploited by Mr. Williams for
the benefit of readers who have not the opportunity of seeing these
wonders or the necessary mathematical knowledge to understand a
scientific treatise on their working. Only the simplest language is used
and every effort is made, by illustration or by analogy, to make
sufficiently clear to the non-scientific reader how the particular bit
of machinery works and what its work really is. Delicate instruments,
calculating machines, workshop machinery, portable tools, the pedrail,
motors ashore and afloat, fire engines, automatic machines, sculpturing
machines--these are a few of the chapters which crowd this splendid
volume."--_Educational News._
"It is difficult to make descriptions of machinery and mechanism
interesting, but Mr. Williams has the enviable knack of doing so, and it
is hardly possible to open this book at any page without turning up
something which you feel you must read; and then you cannot stop till
you come to the end of the chapter."--_Electricity._
"This book is full of interest and instruction, and is a welcome
addition to Messrs. Seeley and Company's Romance Series."--_Leeds
Mercury._
"A book of absorbing interest for the boy with a mechanical turn, and
indeed for the general reader."--_Educational Times._
"An instructive and well-written volume."--_Hobbies._
SEELEY & CO., LTD., 38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET.
WORKS BY C.J. CORNISH
THE NATURALIST ON THE THAMES. With Thirty-eight Illustrations. Demy
8vo. 7s. 6d.
"Will give great delight to any lover of natural history.... It is a
most fascinating volume, and is illustrated in a manner worthy of the
text."--_Scotsman._
"From the first page to the last there is not a single page which the
reader would not wrong himself by skipping."--_Standard._
ANIMALS OF TO-DAY: Their Life and Conversation. With Illustrations
from Photographs by C. REID, of Wishaw. Crown 8vo. 6s.
"Quite one of the brightest books of popular natural history which have
appeared in recent years is Mr. Cornish's fascinating studies of
'Animals of To-Day.'"--_Leeds Mercury._
NIGHTS WITH AN OLD GUNNER, and other Studies of Wild Life. With
Sixteen Illustrations. 6s.
"Cannot fail to be interesting to any lover of wild nature. The
illustrations are numerous and excellent."--_Pall Mall Gazette._
ANIMALS AT WORK AND PLAY: Their Emotions and Activities.
Illustrated from Photographs by GAMBIER BOLTON, F.Z.S., and others,
and from Drawings. Third Edition. 6s.
"Such a book as Mr. Cornish's shows how much there is to repay the
intelligent observer of Nature."--_Times._
"Good as the former books were, we are disposed to think that this is
even better still."--_Spectator._
WILD ENGLAND OF TO-DAY, and the Wild Life in It. Illustrated with
Original Drawings by LANCELOT SPEED, and from Photographs. Third
Edition. 6s.
"Those of us who are left in town in the dull days will seem, in reading
these pages, to sniff the fresh sea-breezes, to hear the cries of the
sea-bird and the songs of the wood-bird, to be conscious of the
murmuring stream and waving forests, and all the wild life that is
therein."--_St. James's Gazette._
LIFE AT THE ZOO. Notes and Traditions of the Regent's Park Gardens.
Illustrated from Photographs by GAMBIER BOLTON, F.Z.S. Fifth
Edition. 6s.
"Every lover of animals will find abundance of attraction and
entertainment in Mr. Cornish's delightful volume."--_Times._
THE ISLE OF WIGHT. With Four Etchings and many other Illustrations.
Super Royal 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
THE NEW FOREST. With Four Etchings and many other Illustrations.
Super Royal 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
Also a POCKET EDITION, 16mo, cloth, 2s. net; leather, 3s. net.
SEELEY & CO., LTD., 38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
EVENTS OF OUR OWN TIME.
_A Series of Volumes on the most Important Events of the last
Half-Century, each containing 320 pages or more, with Plans,
Portraits, or other Illustrations, in extra Crown 8vo. Cloth, 5s._
THE WAR IN THE CRIMEA. By General Sir EDWARD HAMLEY, K.C.B. With
Five Maps and Plans, and Four Portraits on Copper. Seventh Edition.
THE INDIAN MUTINY OF 1857. By Colonel MALLESON, C.S.I. With Three
Plans, and Four Portraits on Copper. Seventh Edition.
THE AFGHAN WARS OF 1839-1842 AND 1878-1880. By ARCHIBALD FORBES.
With Five Maps and Plans, and Four Portraits on Copper. Third
Edition.
THE REFOUNDING OF THE GERMAN EMPIRE. By Colonel MALLESON, C.S.I.
With Five Maps and Plans, and Four Portraits on Copper.
THE LIBERATION OF ITALY, 1815-1870. By the Countess MARTINENGO
CESARESCO. With Portraits on Copper. Second Edition.
OUR FLEET TO-DAY AND ITS DEVELOPMENT DURING THE LAST HALF-CENTURY.
By Rear-Admiral S. EARDLEY WILMOT. With many Illustrations. New
Edition.
_Uniform with the above._
THE WAR IN THE PENINSULA. By ALEXANDER INNES SHAND. With Four
Portraits on Copper, and Six Plans. 5s.
"Admirably lucid and well proportioned."--_Glasgow Herald._
GREAT BRITAIN IN MODERN AFRICA. By EDGAR SANDERSON, M.A. With Four
Portraits on Copper, and a Map. 5s.
"Undoubtedly the best summary of modern African history that we have
had."--_Pall Mall Gazette._
SEELEY & CO., LTD., 38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
A Catalogue of Books on Art History, and General Literature Published
by Seeley & Co Ltd 38 Great Russell Street, London
_Some of the Contents_
Elzevir Library 5
Events of Our Own Times Series 6
Miniature Library of Devotion 10
Miniature Portfolio Monographs 10
Portfolio Monographs 12
Science of To-Day Series 14
Seeley's Illustrated Pocket Library 14
Seeley's Standard Library 15
"Things Seen" Series 16
_The Publishers will be pleased to post their complete Catalogue or
their Illustrated Miniature Catalogue on receipt of a post-card_
CATALOGUE OF BOOKS
_Arranged alphabetically under the names of Authors and Series_
ABBOTT, Rev. E.A., D.D.
Hints on Home Teaching. Crown 8vo, 3s.
How to Parse. An English Grammar. Fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d.
How to Tell the Parts of Speech. An Introduction to English
Grammar. Fcap. 8vo, 2s.
How to Write Clearly. Rules and Exercises on English Composition.
1s. 6d.
Latin Gate, The. A First Latin Translation Book. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Via Latina. A First Latin Grammar. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
ABBOTT, Rev. E.A., and Sir J.R. SEELEY.
English Lessons for English People. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
ADY, Mrs. _See_ CARTWRIGHT, JULIA.
À KEMPIS, THOMAS.
Of the Imitation of Christ. With Illuminated Frontispiece and Title
Page, and Illuminated Sub-Titles to each book. In white or blue
cloth, with inset miniatures. Gilt top; crown 8vo, 6s. nett; also
in vellum, 10s. 6d. nett.
"It may well be questioned whether the great work of Thomas à
Kempis has ever been presented to better advantage."--_The
Guardian._
ALLDRIDGE, T.J.
A Transformed Colony. Sierra Leone as it was and as it is. With
Sixty-six Illustrations and a Map. Demy 8vo, 16s. nett.
ANDERSON, Prof. W.
Japanese Wood Engravings. Coloured Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo,
sewed, 2s. 6d. nett; half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett; also small 4to,
cloth, 2s. nett; lambskin, 3s. nett.
ARMSTRONG, Sir WALTER.
The Art of Velazquez. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, 3s. 6d. nett.
The Life of Velazquez. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, 3s. 6d. nett.
Velazquez. A Study of his Life and Art. With Eight Copper Plates
and many minor Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, cloth, 9s. nett.
Thomas Gainsborough. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, half-linen, 3s.
6d. nett. Also new edition, small 4to, cloth, 2s. nett; leather,
3s. nett and 5s. nett.
The Peel Collection and the Dutch School of Painting. With many
Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 5s. nett; cloth, 7s. nett.
W.Q. Orchardson. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.; half-linen, 3s.
6d. nett.
AUGUSTINE, S.
Confessions of S. Augustine. With Illuminated pages. In white or
blue cloth, gilt top, crown 8vo, 6s. nett; also in vellum, 10s. 6d.
nett.
BARING-GOULD, Rev. S.
Family Names and their Story. Demy 8vo, 7s. 6d. nett.
BEDFORD, Rev. W.K.R.
Malta and the Knights Hospitallers. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.
nett; half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
BENHAM, Rev. Canon D.D., F.S.A.
The Tower of London. With Four Plates in Colours and many other
Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 5s. nett; cloth, 7s. nett.
Mediæval London. With a Frontispiece in Photogravure, Four Plates
in Colour, and many other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed,
5s. nett; cloth, gilt top, 7s. nett.
Old St. Paul's Cathedral. With a Frontispiece in Photogravure, Four
Plates printed in Colour, and many other Illustrations. Super-royal
8vo, sewed, 5s. nett, or cloth, gilt top, 7s. nett.
BICKERSTETH, Rev. E.
Family Prayers for Six Weeks. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
A Companion to the Holy Communion. 32mo, cloth, 1s.
BINYON, LAURENCE.
Thomas Girtin: His Life and Works. An Essay. With Twenty-one
Reproductions in Autotype. Imperial 4to, £2, 2s. nett.
Dutch Etchers of the Seventeenth Century. Illustrated. Super-royal
8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.; half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
John Crome and John Sell Cotman. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo,
sewed, 3s. 6d. nett.
BIRCH, G.H.
London on Thames in Bygone Days. With Four Plates printed in Colour
and many other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 5s. nett;
cloth, 7s. nett.
BRIDGES, Rev. C.
An Exposition of Psalm CXIX. Crown 8vo, 5s.
BUTCHER, E.L.
Things Seen in Egypt. With Fifty Illustrations. Small 4to, cloth,
2s. nett; lambskin, 3s. nett; velvet leather, in box, 5s. nett.
CAMERON, D.Y.
Six Etchings by D.Y. CAMERON and WILLIAM STRANG. Imperial 4to, 6s.
nett.
CARTWRIGHT, JULIA.
Jules Bastien-Lepage. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.; cloth, 3s.
6d. nett.
Sacharissa. Some Account of Dorothy Sidney, Countess of Sunderland,
her Family and Friends. With Five Portraits. Demy 8vo, 7s. 6d.
Madame: Memoirs of Henrietta, daughter of Charles I. and Duchess of
Orleans. With Five Portraits. Demy 8vo, 7s. 6d.
Raphael in Rome. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.;
half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett; also in small 4to, cloth, 2s. nett;
leather, 3s. nett and 5s. nett.
The Early Work of Raphael. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, sewed 2s.
6d.; half-linen, 3s. 6d. Also new edition, revised, in small 4to,
in cloth, 2s. nett; leather, 3s. nett.
Raphael: A Study of his Life and Work. With Eight Copper Plates and
many other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, 7s. 6d. nett.
CESARESCO, The Countess MARTINENGO.
The Liberation of Italy. With Portraits on Copper. Crown 8vo, 5s.
CHITTY, J.R.
Things Seen in China. With Fifty Illustrations. Small 4to; cloth,
2s.; leather, 3s.; velvet leather in a box, 5s. nett.
CHORAL SERVICE-BOOK FOR PARISH CHURCHES, THE.
Compiled and Edited by J.W. ELLIOTT, Organist and Choirmaster of
St. Mark's, Hamilton Terrace, London. With some Practical Counsels
taken by permission from "Notes on the Church Service," by Bishop
WALSHAM HOW.
A. Royal 8vo, sewed, 1s.; cloth, 1s. 6d.
B. 16mo, sewed, 6d.; cloth, 8d.
_The following portions may be had separately_:--
The Ferial and Festal Responses and the Litany. Arranged by J.W.
ELLIOTT. Sewed, 4d.
The Communion Service, Kyrie, Credo, Sanctus, and Gloria in
Excelsis. Set to Music by Dr. J. NAYLOR, Organist of York Minster.
Sewed, 4d.
CHURCH, Sir ARTHUR H., F.R.S.
Josiah Wedgwood, Master Potter. With many Illustrations.
Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 5s. nett; cloth, 7s. nett; also small 4to,
cloth, 2s. nett; leather, 3s. and 5s. nett.
The Chemistry of Paints and Painting Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s.
CHURCH, Rev. A.J.
Nicias, and the Sicilian Expedition. Crown 8vo, 1s. 6d.
For other books by Professor CHURCH see Complete Catalogue.
CLARK, J.W., M.A.
Cambridge. With a coloured Frontispiece and many other
Illustrations by A. BRUNET-DEBAINES and H. TOUSSAINT, &c. Extra
crown 8vo, 6s.; also crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. nett; leather, 3s.;
special leather, in box, 5s. nett,
CODY, Rev. H.A.
An Apostle of the North. The Biography of the late Bishop BOMPAS,
First Bishop of Athabasca, and with an Introduction by the
ARCHBISHOP of RUPERTSLAND. With 42 Illustrations. Demy 8vo, 7s. 6d.
nett.
COLVIN, Sir AUCKLAND, K.C.S.I., K.C.M.G.
The Making of Modern Egypt. Fourth Edition. With Portraits and a
Map. Demy 8vo, 18s. nett.
"Should take rank as the standard history of our labours in
Egypt."--_The Spectator._
CORNISH, C.J.
Animals at Work and Play: Their Activities and Emotions. With
Twelve Illustrations. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s.
Animals of To-day: Their Life and Conversation. With Illustrations
from Photographs by C. REID of Wishaw. Crown 8vo, 6s.
The Isle of Wight. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.
nett; half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett; also a new edition, small 4to,
cloth, 2s.; leather, 3s.
Life at the Zoo. Notes and Traditions of the Regent's Park Gardens.
Illustrated from Photographs by GAMBIER BOLTON. Fifth Edition.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
The Naturalist on the Thames. With many Illustrations. Demy 8vo,
7s. 6d.
The New Forest. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d. nett; half-linen,
3s. 6d. nett; also new edition, small 4to, cloth, 2s.; leather, 3s.
nett; and special velvet leather, each copy in a box, 5s.
The New Forest and the Isle of Wight. With Eight Plates and many
other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, 7s. 6d. nett.
Nights with an Old Gunner, and other Studies of Wild Life. With
Sixteen Illustrations by LANCELOT SPEED, CHARLES WHYMPER, and from
Photographs. Crown 8vo, 6s.
Wild England of To-day and the Wild Life in it. With Sixteen
Illustrations from Drawings by LANCELOT SPEED, and from
Photographs. Crown 8vo, 6s.
CUST, LIONEL.
The Engravings of Albert Dürer. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo,
half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
Paintings and Drawings of Albert Dürer. Illustrated. Super-royal
8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d. nett.
Albrecht Dürer. A Study of his Life and Work. With Eight Copper
Plates and many other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, 7s. 6d.
DALE, J.M.
The Clergyman's Legal Handbook and Churchwarden's Guide. Seventh
Edition. Revised and brought up to date by J.S. RISLEY. 7s. 6d.
DAVENPORT, CYRIL.
Cameos. With examples in Colour and many other Illustrations.
Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 5s. nett; cloth, 7s. nett.
Royal English Bookbindings. With Coloured Plates and many other
Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d.; cloth, 4s. 6d.
DAVIES, RANDALL, F.S.A.
English Society of the Eighteenth Century in Contemporary Art. With
Four Coloured and many other Illustrations. Super royal 8vo, sewed,
5s. nett; cloth, 7s. nett.
DAWSON, Rev. E.C.
The Life of Bishop Hannington. Crown 8vo, paper boards, 2s. 6d.; or
with Map and Illustrations, cloth, 3s. 6d.
DE LA BERE, K. BAGHOT.
The New Poultry Guide for British Farmers and Others. Showing the
one and only way of making Farm Poultry a rent-paying industry, 1s.
DESTRÉE, O.G.
The Renaissance of Sculpture in Belgium. Illustrated. Super-royal
8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d. nett; half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
DOLMAGE, CECIL G., M.A., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.A.S.
Astronomy of To-Day. A popular account in non-technical language.
With Forty-six Illustrations and Diagrams. Extra crown 8vo, 5s.
nett.
EARDLEY, WILMOT, Rear-Admiral S.
Our Fleet To-day and its Development during the last Half Century.
With many Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 5s.
ELZEVIR LIBRARY, THE.
Selections from the choicest English Writers. Exquisitely
Illustrated, with Frontispiece and Title-page in Colours by H.M.
BROCK, and many other Illustrations. Half bound in cloth, gilt top,
1s. 6d. nett; full leather, 2s. nett; velvet leather, gilt edges,
in a box, 3s. nett.
Volume I. Fancy & Humour of Charles Lamb.
" II. Wit & Imagination of Benjamin Disraeli.
" III. Vignettes from Oliver Goldsmith.
" IV. Wit & Sagacity of Dr. Johnson.
" V. Insight and Imagination of John Ruskin.
" VI. Vignettes of London Life from Dickens.
" VII. XVIIIth Century Vignettes from Thackeray.
" VIII. Vignettes of Country Life from Charles Dickens.
" IX. Wisdom and Humour of Thomas Carlyle.
"Decidedly natty and original in get-up."--_The Saturday Review._
EVENTS OF OUR OWN TIMES
Crown 8vo. With Illustrations, 5s. each.
The War in the Crimea. By General Sir E. HAMLEY, K.C.B. With Copper
Plates and other Illustrations. 5s.
The Indian Mutiny. By Colonel MALLESON, C.S.I. With Copper Plates
and other Illustrations. 5s.
The Afghan Wars, 1839-42, and 1878-80. By ARCHIBALD FORBES. With
Portraits and Plans. 5s.
Our Fleet To-Day and its Development during the last Half Century.
By Rear-Admiral S. EARDLEY WILMOT. With many Illustrations. 5s.
The Refounding of the German Empire. By Colonel MALLESON, C.S.I.
With Portrait and Plans. 5s.
The Liberation of Italy. By the Countess MARTINENGO CESARESCO. With
Portraits on Copper. 5s.
Great Britain in Modern Africa. By EDGAR SANDERSON, M.A. With
Portraits and a Map. 5s.
The War in the Peninsula. By A. INNES SHAND. With Portraits and
Plans. 5s.
FERRAR, NICHOLAS.
The Story Books of Little Gidding: Being the Religious Dialogues
recited in the Great Room at Little Gidding Hall, 1631-2. From the
Original Manuscript of NICHOLAS FERRAR. With an Introduction by E.
CRUWYS SHARLAWD, and several Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s.
FLETCHER, W.Y.
Bookbinding in England and France. Seventeen Coloured Plates and
any other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, 7s. 6d. nett.
Bookbinding in France. Coloured Plates. Super-royal, sewed, 2s. 6d.
nett; half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
FORBES, ARCHIBALD.
The Afghan Wars of 1839-1842 and 1878-1880. With Four Portraits on
Copper, and Maps and Plans. Crown 8vo, 5s.
FROBENIUS, LEO.
The Childhood of Man. A Popular Account of the Lives and Thoughts
of Primitive Races. Translated by Prof. A.H. KEANE, LL.D. With 416
Illustrations. Demy 8vo, 16s. nett.
FRY, ROGER.
Discourses Delivered to the Students of the Royal Academy by Sir
Joshua Reynolds. With an Introduction and Notes by ROGER FRY. With
Thirty-three Illustrations. Square Crown 8vo 7s. 6d. nett.
GARDNER, J. STARKIE.
Armour in England. With Eight Coloured Plates and many other
Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d. nett.
Foreign Armour in England. With Eight Coloured Plates and many
other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d. nett.
Armour in England. With Sixteen Coloured Plates and many other
Illustrations. The two parts in one volume. Super-royal 8vo, cloth,
gilt top, 9s. nett.
GARNETT, R., LL.D.
Richmond on Thames. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d.
nett.
GIBERNE, AGNES.
Beside the Waters of Comfort. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
GIBSON, CHARLES R., A.I.E.E.
Electricity of To-Day. Its Works and Mysteries described in
non-technical language. With 30 Illustrations. Extra crown 8vo, 5s.
nett.
"One of the best examples of popular scientific exposition we
remember seeing."--_The Tribune._
Scientific Ideas of To-day. A Popular Account in non-technical language
of the Nature of Matter, Electricity, Light, Heat, &c., &c. With 25
Illustrations. Extra crown 8vo, 5s. nett.
How Telegraphs and Telephones Work. With many Illustrations. Crown 8vo,
1s. 6d. nett.
GODLEY, A.D.
Socrates and Athenian Society in his Day. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
Aspects of Modern Oxford. With many Illustrations. Crown 8vo,
cloth, 2s. nett; lambskin, 3s. nett; velvet leather, in box, 5s.
nett.
GOLDEN RECITER. (_See_ JAMES, Prof. CAIRNS.)
GRAHAME, GEORGE.
Claude Lorrain. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, 2s. 6d. nett;
half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
GRIFFITH, M.E. HUME.
Behind the Veil in Persia and Turkish Arabia. An Account of an
Englishwoman's Eight Years' Residence amongst the Women of the
East. With 37 Illustrations and a Map. Demy 8vo, 16s. nett.
GRINDON, LEO.
Lancashire. Brief Historical and Descriptive Notes. With many
Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s.
HADOW, W.H.
A Croatian Composer. Notes toward the Study of Joseph Haydn. Crown
8vo, 2s. 6d. nett.
Studies in Modern Music. First Series. Berlioz, Schumann, Wagner.
With an Essay on Music and Musical Criticism. With Five Portraits.
Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.
Studies in Modern Music. Second Series. Chopin, Dvoràk, Brahms.
With an Essay on Musical Form. With Four Portraits. Crown 8vo, 7s.
6d.
HAMERTON, Mrs.
Philip Gilbert Hamerton. Autobiography (1834-1858), and Memoir by
his Wife (1858-1894). With a Portrait. Demy 8vo. 16s.
HAMERTON, P.G.
The Etchings of Rembrandt, and Dutch Etchers of the Seventeenth
Century. By P.G. HAMERTON and LAURENCE BINYON. With Eight Copper
Plates and many other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, 7s. 6d. nett.
Imagination in Landscape Painting. With many Illustrations. Cr.
8vo, 6s.
The Mount. Narrative of a Visit to the Site of a Gaulish City on
Mount Beuvray. With a Description of the neighbouring City of
Autun. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Round my House. Notes on Rural Life in Peace and War. Crown 8vo,
with Illustrations, 2s. 6d. nett. Cheaper edition, 2s. nett.
Paris. Illustrated. New edition. Cloth, 2s. nett; leather 3s. nett
in special leather, full gilt, in box, 5s. nett.
HAMLEY, Gen. Sir E.
The War in the Crimea. With Copper Plates and other Illustrations.
Crown 8vo, 5s.
Cheap Edition, paper cover. Demy 8vo, 6d. nett.
HEATON, Mrs. C.
Life of Albert Dürer. With Sixteen Illustrations. 8vo, 10s. 6d.
HENDERSON, Major PERCY E.
A British Officer in the Balkans. Through Dalmatia, Montenegro,
Turkey in Austria, Magyarland, Bosnia and Herzegovina. With 50
Illustrations and a Map. Gilt top. Demy 8vo, 16s. nett.
HERBERT, GEORGE.
The Temple. Sacred Poems and Ejaculations. The Text reprinted from
the First Edition. With Seventy-six Illustrations after ALBERT
DÜRER, HOLBEIN, and other Masters. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. nett;
leather, 3s.; and in velvet leather in box, 5s. nett.
HOLLAND, CLIVE.
Things Seen in Japan. With Fifty beautiful illustrations of
Japanese life in Town and Country. Small 4to, cloth, 2s. nett;
leather, 3s. nett; in box, in velvet leather, 5s. nett.
HOW, W.W.
Hannibal, and the Great War between Rome and Carthage. 2s.
HUSON, T.
Round about Helvellyn. Twenty-four Plates in Etching and Aquatint.
Imperial 4to, 21s. nett. Large paper copies (50 only), £2, 12s. 6d.
nett.
HUTCHINSON, Rev. H.N.
The Story of the Hills. A Popular Account of Mountains and How They
were Made. With many Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 5s.
HUTTON, C.A.
Greek Terracotta Statuettes. With a Preface by A.S. MURRAY, LL.D.
With Seventeen Examples printed in Colour and Thirty-six printed in
Monochrome. 5s. nett; or cloth, 7s. nett.
JAMES, CAIRNS.
The Golden Reciter. With an Introduction by CAIRNS JAMES, Professor
of Elocution at the Royal Academy of Music, &c., With Selections
from Rudyard Kipling, Thomas Hardy, R.L. Stevenson, Seton Merriman,
H.G. Wells, Christina Rossetti, Anthony Hope, Austin Dobson,
Maurice Hewlett, Conan Doyle, &c. &c. Extra crown 8vo, 704 pp.
Cloth, 3s. 6d., and thin paper edition in cloth with gilt edges,
5s.
"A more admirable book of its kind could not well be
desired."--_Liverpool Courier._
The Golden Humorous Reciter. Edited, and with a Practical Introduction
by CAIRNS JAMES, Professor of Elocution at the Royal College of Music
and the Guildhall School of Music. A volume of Recitations and Readings
selected from the writings of F. Anstey, J.M. Barrie, S.R. Crockett,
Jerome K. Jerome, Barry Pain, A.W. Pinero, Owen Seaman, G.B. Shaw; &c.
&c. Extra crown 8vo, over 700 pages, cloth, 3s. 6d.; also a thin paper
edition, with gilt edges, 5s.
JOY, BEDFORD.
A Synopsis of Roman History. Crown 8vo, 2s.
KEANE, Prof. A.H. (_See_ FROBENIUS.)
KERR, RICHARD.
Wireless Telegraphy. Popularly Explained. With Preface by Sir W.H.
Preece, K.C.B., F.R.S., and many Illustrations. Sixth Edition,
Revised. Fcap. 8vo, sewed, 1s.; cloth, 1s. 6d.
LANG, ANDREW.
Oxford. New Edition. With 50 Illustrations by J.H. LORIMER. R.S.A.,
T. HAMILTON CRAWFORD, R.S.W., J. PENNELL, A. BRUNET-DEBAINES, A.
TOUSSAINT, and R. KENT THOMAS. Extra crown 8vo, 6s. Also Pocket
Edition, 2s. nett; leather, 3s. nett. Special yapp leather, full
gilt, in box, 5s. nett.
LEE, SIDNEY.
Stratford-on-Avon. From the Earliest Times to the Death of
Shakespeare. New revised edition, with additional Illustrations.
Extra crown 8vo, 6s. Pocket Edition, 2s. nett; leather, 3s. nett;
and in special yapp leather, full gilt, in box, 5s. nett.
LEFROY, W. CHAMBERS.
The Ruined Abbeys of Yorkshire. With many Illustrations by A.
BRUNET-DEBAINES and H. TOUSSAINT. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. nett;
leather, 3s. nett and 5s. nett.
LEGROS, ALPHONSE.
Six Etchings by Alphonse Legros. With a Biographical Note. Imperial
4to, 6s. nett.
LEYLAND, JOHN.
The Peak of Derbyshire. With Map, Etchings, and other Illustrations
by HERBERT RAILTON and ALFRED DAWSON. New Edition, Crown 8vo,
cloth, 2s.; leather, 3s.; velvet leather, in a box, 5s. nett.
The Yorkshire Coast and the Cleveland Hills and Dales. With
Etchings and other Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.
LOFTIE, Rev. W.J.
The Inns of Court and Chancery. With many Illustrations, chiefly by
HERBERT RAILTON. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. nett; leather, 3s. nett and
5s. nett.
Westminster Abbey. With Seventy-four Illustrations, chiefly by
HERBERT RAILTON. Large crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.
Whitehall. With many Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.
nett; half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
MACKENZIE, Rev. W.B.
Married Life and the Dwellings of the Righteous. 3s. 6d.; white
silk, 7s. 6d.
MALLESON, Colonel G.B., C.S.I.
The Indian Mutiny. With Copper Plates and other Illustrations.
Crown 8vo, 5s.
The Refounding of the German Empire. With Portrait and Plans. Crowa
8vo, 5s.
MCCARTHY, Justin.
Charing Cross to St. Paul's. Illustrated by J. PENMELL. Crown 8vo,
6s.
MINIATURE LIBRARY OF DEVOTION
Little Volumes of Short Extracts from the Christian Fathers. With
Decorative Title-page and Photogravure Frontispiece. 32mo, cloth
extra, each 1s. nett; leather, each 1s. 6d. nett. Also Three
Volumes in leather in case, 4s. 6d. nett. Also bound in white
vellum with gilt edges, each volume in a box, 2s. 6d. nett.
1. Saint Augustine.
2. Jeremy Taylor.
3. Saint Chrysostom.
4. Bishop Andrewes.
5. John Keble.
6. Thomas à Kempis.
7. Canon Liddon.
8. Fénelon.
9. William Law.
MINIATURE PORTFOLIO MONOGRAPHS
A New Edition in 16mo. Most of the Volumes have been carefully
revised by the Authors. Each Volume profusely Illustrated. Cloth,
2s. nett; leather, 3s. nett; velvet leather, in box, 5s. nett.
Peter Paul Rubens. By R.A.M. STEVENSON.
Japanese Wood Engravings. By Professor W. ANDERSON.
Josiah Wedgwood. By A.H. CHURCH, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry,
Royal Academy of Arts. New & Revised Edition.
D.G. Rossetti. By F.G. STEPHENS, One of the Seven Members of the
Pre-Raphaelite Brotherhood.
The Early Work of Raphael. By JULIA CARTWRIGHT (Mrs. Ady).
Fair Women in Painting and Poetry. By WILLIAM SHARP (Fiona
Macleod).
Antoine Watteau. By CLAUDE PHILLIPS, Keeper of the Wallace
Collection.
Raphael in Rome. By JULIA CARTWRIGHT (Mrs. Ady).
The New Forest. By C.J. CORNISH, Author of "Life of the Zoo," & c.
THE ISLE OF WIGHT. By C.J. CORNISH.
Gainsborough. By Sir WALTER ARMSTRONG, Keeper of the National
Gallery of Ireland.
MITFORD, MARY RUSSELL.
Country Stories. With 68 Illustrations by GEORGE MORROW. Crown 8vo,
cloth, gilt top, 2s. nett; also in leather, 3s. nett; and in
special leather yapp, full gilt in box, 5s. nett.
MONKHOUSE, W. COSMO.
The Earlier English Water-Colour Painters. With many Illustrations.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
MORIARTY, G.P.
Dean Swift. His Life and Writings. Cheaper Edition, with Two
Portraits on Copper. 3s. 6d.
MOULE, Archdeacon A.E.
New China and Old. Notes on the Country and People made during a
Residence of Thirty Years. With Thirty Illustrations. New Edition,
Revised. Crown 8vo, 5s.
MOULE, Right Rev. H.C.G., D.D. (Bishop of Durham).
The Sacred Seasons. Readings for the Sundays and Holy Days of the
Christian Year. With text printed in red and black throughout, and
illuminated with specially drawn initial letters and other
ornaments, and with twelve illuminated pages printed in three
colours and gold after illuminations in manuscripts at the British
Museum. Extra crown 8vo, 6s. nett; also white cloth, in box, 7s.
6d. nett.
At the Holy Communion. Helps for Preparation and Reception. Cloth,
1s.; leather, 2s. nett; calf, 4s. 6d.
Christ's Witness to the Life to Come. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Cross and the Spirit, The. Studies in the Epistle to the Galatians.
Foolscap 8vo, 1s. 6d.
Grace and Godliness. Studies in the Epistle to the Ephesians. Crown
8vo, 2s. 6d.
In the House of the Pilgrimage. Hymns and Sacred Songs. 2s. 6d.
Imitations and Translations. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. nett.
Jesus and the Resurrection. Expository Studies on St. John xx. and
xxi. Third Edition, 2s. 6d.
Lord's Supper, The. By BISHOP RIDLEY. Edited with Notes and a Life
by the BISHOP of DURHAM. Crown 8vo, 5s.
Our Prayer Book. Short Chapters on the Book of Common Prayer. 16mo,
1s.; leather, 2s. nett.
Pledges of His Love, The. Thoughts on the Holy Communion. 16mo,
1s.; leather, 2s. nett.
Prayers for the Home. A Month's Cycle of Morning and Evening Family
Worship, with some Occasional Prayers. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Prayers and Promises. Messages from the Holy Scriptures. 16mo, 1s.;
leather, 2s. nett; calf, 4s. 6d.
The Secret of the Presence, and other Sermons. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Temptation and Escape. Short Chapters for Beginners in the
Christian Life. 16mo, 1s.; leather, 2s. nett.
Thoughts on Christian Sanctity. 16mo, cloth, 1s.; leather, 2s.
nett.
Thoughts on Secret Prayer. 16mo, cloth, 1s.; leather, 2s. nett;
calf, 4s. 6d.
Thoughts on the Spiritual Life. 16mo, cloth, 1s.; leather, 2s.
nett.
Thoughts on Union with Christ. 16mo, cloth, 1s.; leather, 2s. nett.
MURRAY, A.S., LL.D.
Greek Bronzes. With Four Copper Plates and many other
Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d. nett; cloth, 4s. 6d.
nett.
Greek Bronzes, by Dr. MURRAY, and Greek Terracotta Statuettes, by
C.A. HUTTON. With Four Photogravures, Eight Coloured Plates, and
Seventy-seven other Illustrations. In one Volume. Super-royal 8vo,
cloth, 10s. 6d. nett.
NETTLESHIP, J.T.
Morland, George. With Six Copper Plates and Thirty other
Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 5s. nett; cloth, 6s. nett.
PAGE, J. Ll. WARDEN.
Dartmoor, An Exploration of. With Map, Etchings, and other
Illustrations. Cheap Edition, 3s. 6d.
Exmoor, An Exploration of. With Maps, Etchings, and other
Illustrations. Cheap Edition, 3s. 6d.
PENNELL, J. and E.
A Canterbury Pilgrimage. Pott 4to, cloth, gilt edges, 2s. 6d.
PENNELL, T.L., M.D., B.Sc, F.R.C.S.
Among the Wild Tribes of the Afghan Frontier. A Record of Sixteen
Years' Close Intercourse with the Natives of the Indian Marches.
With an Introduction by Field-Marshal LORD ROBERTS, V.C. Demy 8vo.
With 37 Illustrations and a Map. 16s. nett.
PHILLIPS, CLAUDE.
The Earlier Work of Titian. With many Illustrations. Super-royal
8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d. nett; cloth, 4s. 6d. nett.
The Later Work of Titian. With many Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo,
sewed, 3s. 6d. nett; cloth, 4s. 6d. nett.
Titian, a Study of his Life and Work. With Eight Copper Plates and
many other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, 9s. nett.
The Picture Gallery of Charles I. With many Illustrations.
Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d. nett; cloth, 4s. 6d. nett.
Frederick Walker. Sup.-roy. 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d. nett; half-linen,
3s. 6d. nett.
Antoine Watteau. Sup.-roy. 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d. nett; half-linen,
3s. 6d. nett; also small 4to, cloth, 2s. nett; and 3s. and 5s. nett
in leather.
POLLARD, A.W.
Italian Book Illustrations. Super-royal 8to, sewed, 2s. 6d. nett;
half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
PORTFOLIO MONOGRAPHS ON ARTISTIC SUBJECTS
"A triumph of magnificent illustration and masterly editing."--_The
Times._
Many of the Volumes are issued in two forms and at various nett
prices. Where two prices are given, the first is that of the paper
cover edition; the second that of the cloth. When only one price is
given, the Volume is bound in paper only.
ANDERSON, Prof. W.
Japanese Wood Engravings. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
ARMSTRONG, Sir WALTER.
The Art of Velazquez. 3s. 6d.
The Life of Velazquez. 3s. 6d.
The Peel Collection and the Dutch School of Painting. 5s. and 7s.
Thomas Gainsborough. Half-linen, 3s. 6d.
W.Q. Orchardson. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
BEDFORD, W.K.R.
Malta. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
BENHAM, Canon, and CHARLES WELCH, F.S.A.
Mediæval London. 5s. and 7s.
The Tower of London. 5s. and 7s.
BENHAM, Canon.
Old St Paul's Cathedral. 5s. and 7s.
BINYON, LAURENCE.
Dutch Etchers of XVIIth Century. 2s. 6d and 3s. 6d.
John Crome and J.S. Cotman. 3s. 6d.
BIRCH, G.H., F.S.A.
London on Thames. 5s. and 7s.
CARTWRIGHT, JULIA (Mrs. ADY).
Jules Bastien-Lepage. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
The Early Work of Raphael. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
Raphael in Rome. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
CHURCH, A.H., F.R.S.
Josiah Wedgwood. 5s. and 7s.
CORNISH, C.J.
The Isle of Wight. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
The New Forest. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
CUST, LIONEL, F.S.A.
The Engravings of Albert Dürer. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
The Paintings and Drawings of Albert Dürer. 3s. 6d.
DAVENPORT, CYRIL, F.S.A.
Royal English Bookbindings. 3s. 6d. and 4s. 6d.
Cameos. 5s. and 7s.
DAVIES, RANDALL, F.S.A.
English Society of the Eighteenth Century in Contemporary Art.
DESTRÉE, O.G.
The Renaissance of Sculpture in Belgium. 2s 6d. and 3s. 6d.
FLETCHER, W.Y.
Bookbinding in France. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
GARDNER, J. STARKIE.
Armour in England. 3s. 6d.
Foreign Armour in England. 3s. 6d.
GARNETT, RICHARD, C.B., LL.D.
Richmond on Thames. 3s. 6d. and 4s. 6d.
GRAHAME, GEORGE.
Claude Lorrain. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
HAMERTON, P.G.
The Etchings of Rembrandt. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
HUTTON, C.A.
Greek Terracotta Statuettes. 5s. and 7s.
LOFTIE, W.J.
Whitehall. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
MURRAY, A.S., LL.D.
Greek Bronzes. 3s. 6d. and 4s. 6d.
NETTLESHIP, J.T.
George Morland. 5s. and 6s.
PHILLIPS, CLAUDE.
Frederick Walker. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
Antoine Watteau. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
The Picture Gallery of Charles I. 3s. 6d.
The Earlier Work of Titian. 3s. 6d.
The Later Work of Titian. 3s. 6d.
POLLARD, ALFRED W.
Italian Book Illustrations. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
PRIOR, E.S., F.S.A.
The Cathedral Builders of England. 5s. and 7s.
SHARP, WILLIAM.
Fair Women. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
STEPHENS, F.G.
Dante Gabriel Rossetti. 2s. 6d.
STEVENSON, R.A.M.
Peter Paul Rubens. 3s. 6d.
WAERN, CECILIA.
John La Farge. 3s. 6d.
WEALE, W.H. JAMES.
Gerard David, Painter and Illuminator. 2s. 6d. and 3s. 6d.
PRIOR, E.S., F.S.A.
The Cathedral Builders of England. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo,
sewed, 5s. nett; cloth, extra gilt top, 7s. nett.
QUILLER COUCH, A.T.
The Pilgrims' Way. A Little Scrip for Travellers. In Prose and
Verse. With end papers in colour, and gilt top. Fcap. 8vo, cloth,
3s. 6d. nett; on thin paper, leather, 5s. nett.
REYNOLDS, Sir JOSHUA.
Discourses Delivered to the Students of the Royal Academy. With an
Introduction and Notes by ROGER FRY. With Thirty-Three
Illustrations. Extra Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d. nett.
ROCHE, C.E.
Things Seen in Holland. With Fifty Illustrations. Small 4to, cloth,
2s. nett; lambskin, 3s. nett; velvet leather, 5s. nett.
ROPES, A.R.
Lady Mary Wortley Montagu. With Eight Illustrations. Crown 8vo
cloth, 2s. 6d. nett.
RUSSELL, W. CLARK.
The British Seas. With upwards of Fifty Illustrations. Crown 8vo,
cloth, 2s.; leather, 3s.; special yapp leather in box, 5s. nett.
SANDERSON, E.
Great Britain in Modern Africa. With Four Portraits on Copper and a
Map. Crown 8vo, 5s.
SCOTT-ELLIOT, Professor G.F., M.A., B.Sc.
Botany of To-day. With Twenty-seven Illustrations. Large crown 8vo,
5s. nett.
STIGAND, Captain C.H.
Through the Unknown to Abyssinia. With Map and Forty Illustrations.
Demy 8vo, 16s. nett.
SWANN, A.J.
Fighting the Slave-Hunter in Central Africa. A Record of Twenty-Six
Years of Travel and Adventure Round the Great Lakes. With Map and
Forty-Five Illustrations. Demy 8vo, 16s. nett.
SCIENCE OF TO-DAY SERIES
The volumes of this series give an attractive, lucid, yet at the
same time scientifically accurate account of various subjects in
non-technical language. Large crown 8vo, 5s. nett.
Aerial Navigation of To-day. By CHARLES C. TURNER.
Astronomy of To-Day. By C.G. DOLMAGE, M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.A.S.
Botany of To-day. By G.F. SCOTT-ELLIOT, M.A., B.Sc.
Electricity of To-Day. By CHARLES R. GIBSON, A.I.E.E.
Scientific Ideas of To-Day. By CHARLES R. GIBSON, A.I.E.E.
SEELEY'S ILLUSTRATED POCKET LIBRARY
Crown 8vo, cloth, gilt edge, 2s. nett; also in leather, 3s. nett;
and yapp leather in box at 5s.
ADDISON and STEELE.
The Spectator in London. With Fifty-six Illustrations by RALPH
CLEAVER, and Headpieces by W.A. ATKIN BERRY, CLOUGH BROMLEY, &c.
CLARK, J.W., Registrary of the University of Cambridge.
Cambridge. With many Illustrations.
GODLEY, A.D.
Aspects of Modern Oxford. With many Illustrations.
HAMERTON, P.G.
Paris. With many Illustrations.
HERBERT, GEORGE.
The Temple. Sacred Poems and Ejaculations. The Text reprinted from
the first edition. With 76 Illustrations after DÜRER, HOLBEIN, and
other Masters.
LANG, ANDREW.
Oxford. With 40 Illustrations by various artists.
LEE, SIDNEY.
Stratford-on-Avon. From the Earliest Times to the Death of
Shakespeare. With 52 Illustrations by HERBERT RAILTON and E. HULL.
LEFROY, W. CHAMBERS.
The Ruined Abbeys of Yorkshire. With many Illustrations.
LEYLAND, JOHN.
The Peak of Derbyshire: its Scenery and Antiquities.
LOFTIE, W.J.
The Inns of Court. With 60 Illustrations.
MITFORD, MARY RUSSELL.
Country Stories. With 68 Illustrations by GEORGE MORROW.
RUSSELL, W. CLARK.
British Seas. With 50 Illustrations by J.C. HOOK, R.A., HAMILTON
MACCALLUM, COLIN HUNTER, &c.
STEVENSON, R.L.
Edinburgh. With many Illustrations by T. HAMILTON CRAWFORD, R.S.A.
(This volume is only to be had in this series in leather, 5s. nett.
For other editions of this book, see next page.)
THE STANDARD LIBRARY
Extra Crown 8vo, With many Illustrations. Price 2s. 6d, nett.
Lady Mary Wortley Montagu. By A.R. ROPES.
Mrs. Thrale. By L.B. SEELEY.
Round My House. By P.G. HAMERTON.
Fanny Burney & Her Friends. By L.B. SEELEY.
SEELEY, Sir J.R.
Goethe Reviewed after Sixty Years. With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 3s.
6d.
A Short History of Napoleon the First. With Portrait. Crown 8vo,
5s.
SEELEY, Sir J.R., and Dr. ABBOTT.
English Lessons for English People. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
SEELEY, L.B.
Mrs. Thrale, afterwards Mrs. Piozzi. With Eight Illustrations.
Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d nett.
Horace Walpole and his World. Extracts from his Letters. With Eight
Copper Plates. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.
Fanny Burney and her Friends. With Eight Illustrations. Crown 8vo,
2s. 6d nett.
SHAND, A. INNES.
The War in the Peninsula. With Portraits and Plans. 5s.
SHARLAND, E. CRUWYS.
The Story Books of Little Gidding: Being the Religious Dialogues
recited in the Great Room at Little Gidding Hall, 1631-2. With an
Introduction by E. CRUWYS SHARLAND, and several Illustrations.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
SHARP, WILLIAM.
Fair Women. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d. nett;
half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett. Also new edition, small 4to, cloth, 2s.
nett; leather, 3s. nett.
SHIPLEY, M.E.
Daily Help for Daily Need. A Selection of Scripture Verses and
Poetry for Every Day in the Year. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
SOLOMON, SOLOMON J.R.A.
The Practice of Oil Painting and Drawing. With Eighty
Illustrations. Extra crown 8vo, 6s. nett.
STEPHENS, F.G.
Rossetti, D.G. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d. nett; also small
4to, cloth, 2s. nett; leather, 3s. nett; velvet leather, in a box,
5s. nett.
STEVENSON, R.L.
Edinburgh. Fcap. 8vo, with Frontispiece, gilt top, cloth, 2s. nett;
leather, 3s. nett. Crown 8vo, Illustrated, cloth, 3s. 6d. Roxburgh,
gilt top, 5s. Library Edition. Crown 8vo, buckram, dark blue, gilt
top, Sixteen Full-page Illustrations, 6s. Presentation Edition.
Extra crown 8vo, with Sixty-four Illustrations, 6s. nett; also
People's Edition, demy 8vo, 6d, nett.
STEVENSON, R.A.M.
Rubens, Peter Paul. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, 3s. 6d. nett,
sewed; also small 4to, cloth, 2s. nett; leather, 3s. nett and 5s.
nett.
STRANG, WILLIAM.
Six Etchings. By D.Y. CAMERON and WILLIAM STRANG. Imperial 4to, 6s.
nett.
"THINGS SEEN" SERIES
Each volume with 50 Illustrations. Small 4to, cloth, 2s.; leather, 3s.;
and velvet leather, in a box, 5s. nett.
Things Seen in Japan. By CLIVE HOLLAND.
Things Seen in China. By J.R. CHITTY.
Things Seen in Egypt. By E.L. BUTCHER.
Things Seen in Holland. By C.E. ROCHE.
TOWNSHEND, Captain A.T.
A Military Consul in Turkey. With many Illustrations. Demy 8vo,
16s. nett.
TURNER, CHARLES C.
Aerial Navigation of To-day. With Seventy Illustrations and
Diagrams. Extra crown 8vo, 5s. nett.
WACE, Very Rev. H., Dean of Canterbury.
The Sacrifice of Christ. Its Vital Reality and Efficacy. Cloth, 1s.
WAERN, C.
John La Farge. Illustrated. Super-royal 8vo, sewed, 3s. 6d. nett.
WEALE, W.H. JAMES.
Gerard David, Painter and Illuminator. Illustrated. Super-royal
8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d. nett; half-linen, 3s. 6d. nett.
WELCH, C., and Canon BENHAM.
Mediæval London. With a Frontispiece in Photogravure, Four Plates
in Colour, and many other Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, sewed,
5s. nett; cloth, gilt top, 7s. nett.
WELLDON, Bishop.
The Hope of Immortality. An Essay. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s.
6d.
End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of To Mars via The Moon, by Mark Wicks
*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TO MARS VIA THE MOON ***
***** This file should be named 27633-8.txt or 27633-8.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
https://www.gutenberg.org/2/7/6/3/27633/
Produced by Chris Curnow, Greg Bergquist and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.
Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.
*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
https://gutenberg.org/license).
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that
- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License. You must require such a user to return or
destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
Project Gutenberg-tm works.
- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
of receipt of the work.
- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
[email protected]. Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at https://pglaf.org
For additional contact information:
Dr. Gregory B. Newby
Chief Executive and Director
[email protected]
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit https://pglaf.org
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
https://www.gutenberg.org
This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
